WO2015005118A1 - Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus - Google Patents

Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015005118A1
WO2015005118A1 PCT/JP2014/066885 JP2014066885W WO2015005118A1 WO 2015005118 A1 WO2015005118 A1 WO 2015005118A1 JP 2014066885 W JP2014066885 W JP 2014066885W WO 2015005118 A1 WO2015005118 A1 WO 2015005118A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
substrate
unit
mask
exposure
processing apparatus
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/066885
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
鈴木智也
小宮山弘樹
加藤正紀
渡辺智行
鬼頭義昭
堀正和
林田洋祐
木内徹
Original Assignee
株式会社ニコン
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2013142922A external-priority patent/JP2015018006A/en
Priority claimed from JP2014123088A external-priority patent/JP6459234B2/en
Application filed by 株式会社ニコン filed Critical 株式会社ニコン
Priority to CN201480049332.7A priority Critical patent/CN105556391B/en
Priority to KR1020197037109A priority patent/KR102097769B1/en
Priority to KR1020197022344A priority patent/KR102058830B1/en
Priority to KR1020197014816A priority patent/KR102007627B1/en
Priority to KR1020207009396A priority patent/KR102219169B1/en
Priority to KR1020167002859A priority patent/KR101984360B1/en
Publication of WO2015005118A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015005118A1/en
Priority to HK16108788.1A priority patent/HK1220776A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/708Construction of apparatus, e.g. environment aspects, hygiene aspects or materials
    • G03F7/70858Environment aspects, e.g. pressure of beam-path gas, temperature
    • G03F7/709Vibration, e.g. vibration detection, compensation, suppression or isolation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/24Curved surfaces
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70058Mask illumination systems
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70691Handling of masks or workpieces
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70691Handling of masks or workpieces
    • G03F7/70758Drive means, e.g. actuators, motors for long- or short-stroke modules or fine or coarse driving
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70691Handling of masks or workpieces
    • G03F7/70775Position control, e.g. interferometers or encoders for determining the stage position
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K77/00Constructional details of devices covered by this subclass and not covered by groups H10K10/80, H10K30/80, H10K50/80 or H10K59/80
    • H10K77/10Substrates, e.g. flexible substrates
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02EREDUCTION OF GREENHOUSE GAS [GHG] EMISSIONS, RELATED TO ENERGY GENERATION, TRANSMISSION OR DISTRIBUTION
    • Y02E10/00Energy generation through renewable energy sources
    • Y02E10/50Photovoltaic [PV] energy
    • Y02E10/549Organic PV cells
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02PCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
    • Y02P70/00Climate change mitigation technologies in the production process for final industrial or consumer products
    • Y02P70/50Manufacturing or production processes characterised by the final manufactured product

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a substrate processing apparatus, a device manufacturing system, a device manufacturing method, and a pattern forming apparatus for forming a pattern for an electronic device on a substrate.
  • an exposure apparatus that exposes a device pattern to a substrate provided on a moving stage that moves on a surface plate is known as a substrate processing apparatus.
  • the surface plate of this exposure apparatus is supported on the base via a mount member having a vibration isolation mechanism.
  • the moving stage moves in the X direction on a movable guide provided on the surface plate.
  • the movable guide is moved in the Y direction on the surface plate by two linear motors provided on the base.
  • the two linear motors are provided on both sides of the base in the X direction, and move the movable guide in the Y direction without contact.
  • each linear motor has a mover and a stator, and the stator is fixed on the base, while the mover is fixed on both sides in the X direction of the movable guide, It is in a non-contact state with the stator.
  • the stator is fixed on the base, while the mover is fixed on both sides in the X direction of the movable guide, It is in a non-contact state with the stator.
  • the movable guide is moved in the Y direction on the surface plate by two linear motors. Similarly, the movement of the movable stage with respect to the movable guide is also performed using the linear motor. Is going. Also in this case, the linear motor moves the moving stage in the X direction without contact. However, since the moving stage is moved with respect to the movable guide on the surface plate, vibration generated by the movement of the moving stage may be transmitted to the surface plate.
  • the exposure apparatus disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-219353 performs exposure by holding a substrate on a moving stage.
  • the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a film-like substrate is supplied in a continuous state.
  • a device pattern is scanned and exposed to a substrate to be formed. In this case, the substrate may vibrate when the substrate is supplied.
  • An aspect of the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and further reduces the vibration applied to the exposure unit and can suitably perform exposure by the exposure unit, a device manufacturing system, and device manufacturing. It is an object to provide a method and a pattern forming apparatus.
  • 1st aspect of this invention is a substrate processing apparatus, Comprising: The anti-vibration stand provided on the installation surface, The exposure unit which is provided on the said anti-vibration stand and performs the exposure process with respect to the supplied substrate And a processing unit that is provided on the installation surface, is provided in an independent state that is not in contact with the exposure unit, and performs processing on the exposure unit.
  • a first aspect of the present invention is the substrate processing apparatus, wherein the processing unit includes a position adjusting unit that adjusts a position in a width direction of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit, and the position adjusting unit includes: A base provided on the installation surface; a width moving mechanism provided on the base for moving the substrate in the width direction of the substrate with respect to the base; and provided on the base.
  • the substrate after the position adjustment by the width moving mechanism may be guided toward the exposure unit, and may have a fixed roller whose position with respect to the base is fixed.
  • 1st aspect of this invention is the said board
  • a first aspect of the present invention is the substrate processing apparatus, wherein the position adjustment unit further includes a roller position adjustment mechanism that adjusts a position of the fixed roller with respect to the exposure unit, and is provided on the vibration isolation table.
  • a fixed second substrate detection unit configured to detect the position of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit; and the roller position adjustment mechanism based on a detection result of the second substrate detection unit to control the exposure.
  • a controller that corrects the position of the substrate supplied to the unit to a second target position.
  • the substrate processing apparatus the pressing mechanism that presses the substrate supplied from the position adjustment unit to the exposure unit so that a tension is applied, and the removal unit.
  • a second substrate detection unit that is fixedly provided on a shaking table and detects the position of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit; and controls the pressing mechanism based on a detection result of the second substrate detection unit; And a controller that adjusts the amount of pressure applied to the substrate.
  • a first aspect of the present invention is the substrate processing apparatus, wherein the processing unit includes a drive unit that drives the exposure unit, and the exposure unit holds a mask that is illuminated with illumination light.
  • a mask that drives the mask holding member to move the mask in the scanning direction.
  • the mask has a member and a substrate support member that supports the substrate on which the projection light from the mask is projected.
  • a side driving unit and a substrate side driving unit that drives the substrate support member to move the substrate in the scanning direction may be included.
  • a first aspect of the present invention is the substrate processing apparatus, wherein the exposure unit includes a first frame that supports the mask holding member, and a second frame that supports the substrate support member,
  • the vibration isolation table includes: a first vibration isolation table provided between the installation surface and the first frame; a second vibration isolation table provided between the installation surface and the second frame; May be included.
  • the 1st aspect of this invention is the said substrate processing apparatus, Comprising:
  • the said exposure unit has a flame
  • the said vibration isolator is the said installation surface, the said You may provide between frames.
  • a first aspect of the present invention is the substrate processing apparatus, wherein the mask holding member holds the mask having a mask surface having a first radius of curvature around a first axis, and the mask side
  • the drive unit rotationally drives the mask holding member to move the mask in the scanning direction, and the substrate support member is along a support surface having a second radius of curvature around the second axis.
  • the substrate may be supported, and the substrate-side drive unit may move the substrate in the scanning direction by rotationally driving the substrate support member.
  • the 1st aspect of this invention is the said substrate processing apparatus, Comprising:
  • the said mask side drive part drives the said mask holding member linearly
  • the mask is moved in the scanning direction, and the substrate support member supports the substrate along a support surface having a second radius of curvature around the second axis, and the substrate side drive unit May move the substrate in the scanning direction by rotationally driving the substrate support member.
  • a first aspect of the present invention is the substrate processing apparatus, wherein the mask holding member holds the mask having a mask surface having a first radius of curvature around a first axis, and the mask side
  • the driving unit rotates the mask holding member to move the mask in the scanning direction, and the substrate support member can rotate both sides of the substrate in the scanning direction so that the substrate has a flat surface.
  • the substrate-side drive unit may move the substrate in the scanning direction by rotationally driving the pair of support rollers.
  • a second aspect of the present invention is a device manufacturing system, the substrate processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention, a substrate supply apparatus that supplies the substrate to the substrate processing apparatus, and a process performed by the substrate processing apparatus. And a substrate recovery apparatus for recovering the processed substrate.
  • a second aspect of the present invention is the device manufacturing system, wherein the substrate supply device includes a first bearing portion on which a supply roll around which the substrate is wound in a roll shape is rotatably supported; A first elevating mechanism that elevates and lowers the first bearing unit, an entrance angle detecting unit that detects an entrance angle of the substrate with respect to a first roller around which the substrate fed from the supply roll is wound, and an entrance angle detecting unit And a controller that controls the first lifting mechanism based on a detection result and corrects the approach angle to a target approach angle.
  • a second aspect of the present invention is the device manufacturing system, wherein the substrate recovery apparatus is rotatably supported by a recovery roll on which the processed substrate processed by the substrate processing apparatus is wound.
  • a control unit that controls the second elevating mechanism based on the detection result of the discharge angle detection unit and corrects the discharge angle to a target discharge angle.
  • a third aspect of the present invention is a device manufacturing method, wherein the substrate processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention is used to perform an exposure process on the substrate and to process the exposed substrate. Forming a pattern of the mask.
  • a pattern forming apparatus for forming a pattern at a predetermined position on the sheet substrate while conveying the long flexible sheet substrate in the longitudinal direction.
  • a transport unit including a plurality of guide rollers for transporting in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined transport path, and a part of the transport path, and forming the pattern at the predetermined position on the surface of the sheet substrate
  • a patterning device, a vibration isolation device provided between the base surface on which the patterning device is installed and the patterning device, and the patterning device separately provided on the base surface.
  • a guide roller installed and including a guide roller for feeding the sheet substrate toward the conveyance unit of the patterning device, and a width direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the sheet substrate
  • a position adjusting device that adjusts the position of the sheet substrate, and a position change in the width direction, a posture change of the sheet substrate, or a deformation of the sheet substrate on the upstream side of the pattern forming unit in the conveyance path.
  • a substrate error measurement unit that measures change information regarding the control unit, and a control device that controls the position adjustment device based on the change information.
  • a fourth aspect of the present invention is the pattern forming apparatus, wherein the substrate error measuring unit detects an edge in a width direction of the sheet substrate or a mark formed on the sheet substrate.
  • the change information may be measured.
  • a fourth aspect of the present invention is the pattern forming apparatus, wherein the substrate error measuring unit is provided in at least one of the patterning apparatus and the position adjusting apparatus.
  • a pattern forming apparatus for forming a pattern at a predetermined position on the sheet substrate while conveying the long flexible sheet substrate in the longitudinal direction.
  • a transport unit including a plurality of guide rollers for transporting in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined transport path, and a part of the transport path, and forming the pattern at the predetermined position on the surface of the sheet substrate
  • a patterning device, a vibration isolation device provided between the base surface on which the patterning device is installed and the patterning device, and the patterning device separately provided on the base surface.
  • a guide roller installed and including a guide roller for feeding the sheet substrate toward the conveyance unit of the patterning device, and a width direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the sheet substrate
  • a position adjusting device for adjusting the position of the sheet substrate
  • a position error measuring unit for measuring change information relating to a relative position change between the patterning device and the position adjusting device, and the position adjusting device based on the change information.
  • a control device for controlling.
  • a fourth aspect of the present invention is the pattern forming apparatus, provided in the patterning apparatus, wherein a predetermined tension is applied in the longitudinal direction upstream of the pattern forming unit in the transport path.
  • a tiltable adjustment roller is disposed so as to bend the conveyance path of the sheet substrate, and the control device tilts the adjustment roller based on the change information to form a pattern. You may adjust the position of the width direction of the sheet
  • a fifth aspect of the present invention is a device manufacturing system that sequentially performs a first process and a second process on a sheet substrate while conveying the long flexible sheet substrate in the longitudinal direction.
  • a first processing unit that is installed on a predetermined base surface and includes a plurality of rollers for feeding the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined conveyance path, and performs the first processing on the sheet substrate;
  • a plurality of rollers installed on a base surface for sending the sheet substrate sent from the first processing unit in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined conveyance path; and performing the second processing on the sheet substrate.
  • Second processing unit to be applied vibration transmission between the base surface and the first processing unit, vibration transmission between the base surface and the second processing unit, or the first processing unit and the Swing with the second processing unit
  • An anti-vibration device that insulates or suppresses transmission, a relative position change between the first processing unit and the second processing unit, or of the sheet substrate conveyed from the first processing unit to the second processing unit
  • a change measuring unit that measures change information related to a position change, and a position adjustment device that adjusts a position in a width direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the sheet substrate carried into the second processing unit based on the change information; .
  • the 5th aspect of this invention is the said device manufacturing system, Comprising:
  • the said 2nd processing unit is formed in the surface of the said sheet
  • the pattern is drawn on the surface of the sheet substrate by applying an exposure device that projects light energy corresponding to the pattern onto the light-sensitive layer or by applying ink containing any one of a conductive material, an insulating material, and a semiconductor material. It may be a patterning apparatus including any one of the printing apparatuses.
  • a fifth aspect of the present invention is the device manufacturing system, wherein the first processing unit performs one or a plurality of processes corresponding to a pre-process of a process performed on the sheet substrate by the patterning apparatus.
  • the position adjusting device is disposed in the preprocessing device installed immediately before the patterning device on the sheet substrate conveyance path or between the preprocessing device and the patterning device immediately before. May be provided.
  • a fifth aspect of the present invention is the device manufacturing system, wherein the position adjusting device includes a plurality of rotating rollers that bend and guide the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction, and the plurality of rotating rollers.
  • a drive mechanism that translates some of the rotation rollers in the direction of the rotation center axis and a control unit that controls the drive mechanism based on the change information measured by the change measurement unit may be provided.
  • a fifth aspect of the present invention is the device manufacturing system, wherein the position adjusting device includes a plurality of rotating rollers that bend and guide the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction, and the plurality of rotating rollers. You may provide the drive part which inclines the rotation center axis
  • a fifth aspect of the present invention is the device manufacturing system, wherein the change measurement unit is disposed in a conveyance path of the sheet substrate between the first processing unit and the second processing unit, and A sensor that detects a change in inclination in the width direction of the sheet substrate orthogonal to the longitudinal direction as the change information may be included.
  • a substrate processing apparatus a device manufacturing system, a device manufacturing method, and a pattern forming apparatus that can further reduce the vibration applied to the exposure unit and can suitably perform exposure by the exposure unit. be able to.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a device manufacturing system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a configuration when the device manufacturing system according to the first embodiment is simplified.
  • FIG. 3 is a view showing a configuration of a part of the exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 is a view showing a part of the arrangement of the exposure apparatus according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of the exposure unit according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a view showing the arrangement of illumination areas and projection areas of the exposure unit shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 7 is a view showing the configuration of the projection optical system of the exposure unit shown in FIG. FIG.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the device manufacturing method according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a view showing a part of the configuration of the exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a view showing the overall arrangement of the exposure unit according to the second embodiment of FIG.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of an exposure unit according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 is a view showing the arrangement of an exposure apparatus according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a view of the substrate transported in the exposure apparatus shown in FIG. 12 when viewed from the + Z direction side.
  • FIG. 14 is a view of the substrate P transported between the last roller on the position adjustment unit side and the first roller on the exposure unit side shown in FIG. 13 when viewed from the ⁇ Y direction side.
  • FIG. 15 is a view of the substrate transported by the rotating drum shown in FIG. 12 when viewed from the ⁇ X direction side.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the substrate adjustment unit illustrated in FIG. 12.
  • FIG. 17A is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the second substrate detection unit illustrated in FIG. 12
  • FIG. 17B is a diagram illustrating the beam light emitted to the substrate by the second substrate detection unit
  • FIG. 17C is a diagram illustrating the second substrate detection unit. It is a figure which shows the light beam received. It is a figure which shows the structure of the relative position detection part shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the scanning line and alignment microscope of the spot light scanned on a board
  • a substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern forming apparatus will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings and preferred embodiments.
  • the aspect of this invention is not limited to these embodiment, What added the various change or improvement is included. That is, the constituent elements described below include those that can be easily assumed by those skilled in the art and substantially the same elements, and the constituent elements described below can be appropriately combined. In addition, various omissions, substitutions, or changes of the components can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.
  • the substrate processing apparatus is an exposure apparatus that performs exposure processing on a substrate, and the exposure apparatus is incorporated in a device manufacturing system that performs various processing on a substrate after exposure to manufacture an electronic device. .
  • a device manufacturing system will be described.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a device manufacturing system 1 according to the first embodiment.
  • a device manufacturing system 1 shown in FIG. 1 is a line (flexible display manufacturing line) for manufacturing a flexible display as an electronic device (sometimes referred to as a device).
  • Examples of the flexible display include an organic EL display.
  • the substrate P is sent out from a supply roll FR1 obtained by winding a flexible substrate (sheet substrate) P in a roll shape, and various processes are continuously performed on the sent out substrate P. Then, a so-called roll-to-roll system is adopted in which the processed substrate P is wound up by the recovery roll FR2.
  • the substrate P that is a film-like sheet is sent out from the supply roll FR1, and the substrates P sent out from the supply roll FR1 are sequentially supplied to n processing apparatuses U1. , U2, U3, U4, U5,... Un, and the winding roll FR2 is shown as an example.
  • n processing apparatuses U1 U2, U3, U4, U5,... Un, and the winding roll FR2 is shown as an example.
  • a foil (foil) made of a resin or a metal such as stainless steel or an alloy is used.
  • the resin film material include polyethylene resin, polypropylene resin, polyester resin, ethylene vinyl copolymer resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, cellulose resin, polyamide resin, polyimide resin, polycarbonate resin, polystyrene resin, and vinyl acetate resin. You may use what contained 1 or 2 or more.
  • the thickness and rigidity (Young's modulus) of the substrate P may be in a range that does not cause folds or irreversible wrinkles due to buckling in the substrate P when it is transported.
  • a resin sheet such as PET (polyethylene terephthalate) or PEN (polyethylene naphthalate) having a thickness of about 25 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m is used.
  • the substrate P for example, it is desirable to select a substrate whose thermal expansion coefficient is not remarkably large so that the amount of deformation caused by heat in various processes applied to the substrate P can be substantially ignored.
  • an inorganic filler such as titanium oxide, zinc oxide, alumina, or silicon oxide
  • the thermal expansion coefficient can be reduced.
  • the substrate P may be a single layer of ultrathin glass having a thickness of about 100 ⁇ m manufactured by a float process or the like, and the resin film or a metal layer such as aluminum or copper is formed on the ultrathin glass.
  • a laminate in which (foil) or the like is bonded may be used.
  • the flexibility of the substrate P refers to the property that the substrate P can be bent without being sheared or broken even when a force of its own weight is applied to the substrate P.
  • flexibility includes a property of bending by a force of about its own weight.
  • the degree of flexibility varies depending on the material, size, and thickness of the substrate P, the layer structure formed on the substrate P, the environment along with the temperature and humidity, and the like. In any case, when the substrate P is correctly wound around various conveyance rollers, rotary drums, and other members for conveyance direction provided in the conveyance path in the device manufacturing system 1 according to the present embodiment, the substrate P buckles and folds. If the substrate P can be smoothly transported without being damaged or broken (breaking or cracking), it can be said that it is in the range of flexibility.
  • the substrate P configured in this way becomes a supply roll FR1 by being wound in a roll shape, and this supply roll FR1 is mounted on the device manufacturing system 1.
  • the device manufacturing system 1 to which the supply roll FR1 is mounted repeatedly executes various processes for manufacturing an electronic device on the substrate P sent out from the supply roll FR1. For this reason, the processed substrate P is in a state in which a plurality of electronic devices are connected. That is, the substrate P sent out from the supply roll FR1 is a multi-sided substrate.
  • the substrate P may be activated by modifying the surface in advance by a predetermined pretreatment, or may be formed with a fine partition structure (uneven structure) for precise patterning on the surface.
  • the treated substrate P is recovered as a recovery roll FR2 by being wound into a roll.
  • the collection roll FR2 is attached to a dicing device (not shown).
  • the dicing apparatus to which the collection roll FR2 is mounted divides the processed substrate P for each electronic device (dicing) to form a plurality of electronic devices.
  • the dimension in the width direction (short direction) is about 10 cm to 2 m
  • the dimension in the length direction (long direction) is 10 m or more.
  • substrate P is not limited to an above-described dimension.
  • the device manufacturing system 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
  • FIG. 1 an orthogonal coordinate system in which the X direction, the Y direction, and the Z direction are orthogonal to each other is shown.
  • the X direction is a transport direction of the substrate P in the horizontal plane, and is a direction connecting the supply roll FR1 and the recovery roll FR2.
  • the Y direction is a direction orthogonal to the X direction in the horizontal plane, and is the width direction of the substrate P.
  • the Y direction is the axial direction of the supply roll FR1 and the recovery roll FR2.
  • the Z direction is a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the X direction and the Y direction.
  • the device manufacturing system 1 includes a substrate supply device 2 that supplies a substrate P, processing devices U1 to Un that perform various processes on the substrate P supplied by the substrate supply device 2, and processing is performed by the processing devices U1 to Un.
  • a substrate recovery apparatus 4 that recovers the substrate P and a host controller (control unit) 5 that controls each device of the device manufacturing system 1 are provided.
  • the substrate supply device 2 is rotatably mounted with a supply roll FR1.
  • the substrate supply apparatus 2 includes a driving roller R1 that sends out the substrate P from the mounted supply roll FR1, and an edge position controller EPC1 that adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction (Y direction).
  • the driving roller R1 rotates while sandwiching both front and back surfaces of the substrate P, and sends the substrate P in the transport direction (+ X direction) from the supply roll FR1 to the recovery roll FR2, thereby causing the substrate P to be processed by the processing devices U1 to Un. To supply.
  • the edge position controller EPC1 moves the substrate P in the width direction so that the position at the edge of the edge in the width direction of the substrate P is within a range of about ⁇ 10 ⁇ m to several tens ⁇ m with respect to the target position. It is moved to correct the position of the substrate P in the width direction.
  • the substrate collection device 4 is rotatably mounted with a collection roll FR2.
  • the substrate recovery apparatus 4 includes a drive roller R2 that draws the processed substrate P toward the recovery roll FR2, and an edge position controller EPC2 that adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction (Y direction).
  • the substrate recovery device 4 rotates while sandwiching the front and back surfaces of the substrate P by the driving roller R2, pulls the substrate P in the transport direction, and rotates the recovery roll FR2, thereby winding the substrate P.
  • the edge position controller EPC2 is configured in the same manner as the edge position controller EPC1, and corrects the position in the width direction of the substrate P so that the edge of the end portion in the width direction of the substrate P does not vary in the width direction.
  • the processing device U1 is a coating device that applies a photosensitive functional liquid to the surface of the substrate P supplied from the substrate supply device 2.
  • a photosensitive functional liquid for example, a photoresist, a photosensitive silane coupling agent, a UV curable resin liquid, a photosensitive plating reducing solution, or the like is used.
  • the processing apparatus U1 is provided with a coating mechanism Gp1 and a drying mechanism Gp2 in order from the upstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P.
  • the coating mechanism Gp1 includes a pressure drum DR1 around which the substrate P is wound, and a coating roller DR2 facing the pressure drum DR1.
  • the coating mechanism Gp1 sandwiches the substrate P between the pressure drum roller DR1 and the coating roller DR2 in a state where the supplied substrate P is wound around the pressure drum roller DR1. Then, the application mechanism Gp1 applies the photosensitive functional liquid by the application roller DR2 while rotating the impression cylinder DR1 and the application roller DR2 to move the substrate P in the transport direction.
  • the drying mechanism Gp2 blows drying air such as hot air or dry air, removes the solute (solvent or water) contained in the photosensitive functional liquid, and dries the substrate P coated with the photosensitive functional liquid. A photosensitive functional layer is formed on the substrate P.
  • the processing device U2 heats the substrate P conveyed from the processing device U1 to a predetermined temperature (for example, about several tens to 120 ° C.) in order to stabilize the photosensitive functional layer formed on the surface of the substrate P.
  • the processing apparatus U2 is provided with a heating chamber HA1 and a cooling chamber HA2 in order from the upstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P.
  • the heating chamber HA1 is provided with a plurality of rollers and a plurality of air turn bars therein, and the plurality of rollers and the plurality of air turn bars constitute a transport path for the substrate P.
  • the plurality of rollers are provided in rolling contact with the back surface of the substrate P, and the plurality of air turn bars are provided in a non-contact state on the surface side of the substrate P.
  • the plurality of rollers and the plurality of air turn bars are arranged to form a meandering transport path so as to lengthen the transport path of the substrate P.
  • the substrate P passing through the heating chamber HA1 is heated to a predetermined temperature while being transported along a meandering transport path.
  • the cooling chamber HA2 cools the substrate P to the environmental temperature so that the temperature of the substrate P heated in the heating chamber HA1 matches the environmental temperature of the subsequent process (processing apparatus U3).
  • the cooling chamber HA2 is provided with a plurality of rollers, and the plurality of rollers are arranged in a meandering manner in order to lengthen the conveyance path of the substrate P, similarly to the heating chamber HA1.
  • the substrate P passing through the cooling chamber HA2 is cooled while being transferred along a meandering transfer path.
  • a driving roller R3 is provided on the downstream side in the transport direction of the cooling chamber HA2, and the driving roller R3 rotates while sandwiching the substrate P that has passed through the cooling chamber HA2, thereby moving the substrate P toward the processing apparatus U3. Supply.
  • the processing apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) U3 is an exposure apparatus that projects and exposes a pattern such as a circuit or wiring for a display panel on the substrate P having a photosensitive functional layer formed on the surface supplied from the processing apparatus U2. It is. Although details will be described later, the processing device U3 illuminates the transmissive mask M with the illumination light beam, and the projection light beam obtained by illuminating the illumination light beam with the mask M is used as the outer peripheral surface of the rotary drum (support drum) 25. Projection exposure is performed on the substrate P wound around a part of the substrate.
  • the processing apparatus U3 includes a driving roller R4 that sends the substrate P supplied from the processing apparatus U2 to the downstream side in the transport direction, and an edge position controller EPC3 that adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction (Y direction).
  • the drive roller R4 rotates while pinching both front and back surfaces of the substrate P, and feeds the substrate P toward the exposure position by sending the substrate P downstream in the transport direction.
  • the edge position controller EPC3 is configured in the same manner as the edge position controller EPC1, and corrects the position in the width direction of the substrate P so that the width direction of the substrate P at the exposure position becomes the target position.
  • the processing apparatus U3 has two sets of drive rollers R5 and R6 that send the substrate P to the downstream side in the transport direction in a state where the slack DL is given to the exposed substrate P.
  • the two sets of drive rollers R5 and R6 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the transport direction of the substrate P.
  • the driving roller R5 rotates while sandwiching the upstream side of the substrate P to be transported, and the driving roller R6 rotates while sandwiching the downstream side of the substrate P to be transported, thereby directing the substrate P toward the processing apparatus U4. And supply.
  • the processing apparatus U3 in order to relatively align (align) the partial image of the mask pattern of the mask M with the substrate P, an alignment microscope that detects an alignment mark or the like formed in advance on the substrate P. AM1 and AM2 are provided.
  • the processing apparatus U4 is a wet processing apparatus that performs wet development processing, electroless plating processing, and the like on the exposed substrate P conveyed from the processing apparatus U3.
  • the processing apparatus U4 has three processing tanks BT1, BT2, and BT3 that are hierarchized in the vertical direction (Z direction) and a plurality of rollers that transport the substrate P therein.
  • the plurality of rollers are arranged so that the substrate P passes through the three processing tanks BT1, BT2, and BT3.
  • a driving roller R7 is provided on the downstream side in the transport direction of the processing tank BT3.
  • the driving roller R7 rotates while sandwiching the substrate P that has passed through the processing tank BT3, so that the substrate P is directed toward the processing apparatus U5. Supply.
  • the processing apparatus U5 is a drying apparatus which dries the board
  • the processing apparatus U5 adjusts the moisture content adhering to the substrate P wet-processed in the processing apparatus U4 to a predetermined moisture content.
  • the substrate P dried by the processing apparatus U5 is transferred to the processing apparatus Un through several processing apparatuses. Then, after being processed by the processing device Un, the substrate P is wound up on the recovery roll FR2 of the substrate recovery device 4.
  • the host control device 5 performs overall control of the substrate supply device 2, the substrate recovery device 4, and the plurality of processing devices U1 to Un.
  • the host control device 5 controls the substrate supply device 2 and the substrate recovery device 4 to transport the substrate P from the substrate supply device 2 toward the substrate recovery device 4.
  • the host controller 5 controls the plurality of processing apparatuses U1 to Un to execute various processes on the substrate P while synchronizing with the transport of the substrate P.
  • the host controller 5 includes a computer and a storage medium in which a program is stored, and the computer executes the program stored in the storage medium, whereby the host controller 5 of the first embodiment is used. Function.
  • the substrate P sent out from the supply roll FR1 is sequentially wound through the n processing apparatuses U1 to Un to the collection roll FR2.
  • the present invention is not limited to this configuration.
  • the device manufacturing system 1 may be configured such that the substrate P sent out from the supply roll FR1 is wound around the collection roll FR2 via one processing apparatus. At this time, when different processing is performed on the substrate P, the substrate P is supplied again to different processing devices using the substrate supply device 2 and the substrate recovery device 4.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a configuration when the device manufacturing system 1 according to the first embodiment is simplified.
  • the simplified device manufacturing system 1 includes a substrate supply device 2, a processing device U3 (hereinafter referred to as an exposure device) as an exposure device, a substrate recovery device 4, and a host control device 5.
  • Have. 2 is an orthogonal coordinate system in which the X direction, the Y direction, and the Z direction are orthogonal to each other, and is an orthogonal coordinate system similar to that in FIG.
  • the substrate supply apparatus 2 has a configuration in which the edge position controller EPC1 is omitted. This is because the exposure apparatus U3 is provided with an edge position controller EPC3.
  • the substrate supply apparatus 2 will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the substrate supply device 2 includes a first bearing portion 111 on which the supply roll FR1 is mounted, and a first lifting mechanism 112 that moves the first bearing portion 111 up and down. Further, the substrate supply device 2 has an approach angle detection unit 114, and the approach angle detection unit 114 is connected to the host control device 5.
  • the host control device 5 functions as a control device (control unit) of the substrate supply device 2.
  • a lower control device that controls the substrate supply device 2 may be provided, and the lower control device may control the substrate supply device 2.
  • the first bearing portion 111 rotatably supports the supply roll FR1.
  • the supply roll FR1 pivotally supported by the first bearing portion 111 has a winding diameter of the supply roll FR1 corresponding to the amount of the substrate P fed out when the substrate P is fed (sent out) toward the exposure apparatus U3. It gets smaller. For this reason, the position at which the substrate P is sent out from the supply roll FR1 changes in accordance with the feed amount at which the substrate P is sent out.
  • the first elevating mechanism 112 is provided between the installation surface E and the first bearing portion 111.
  • the first elevating mechanism 112 moves the first bearing portion 111 in the Z direction (vertical direction) together with the supply roll FR1.
  • the first elevating mechanism 112 is connected to the host controller 5, and the host controller 5 moves the first bearing portion 111 in the Z direction by the first elevating mechanism 112 to remove the substrate P from the supply roll FR ⁇ b> 1. Can be set to a predetermined position.
  • the entrance angle detection unit 114 detects the entrance angle ⁇ 1 of the substrate P entering the transport roller 127 of the exposure apparatus U3 described later.
  • the approach angle detection unit 114 is provided around the transport roller 127.
  • the approach angle ⁇ 1 is an angle formed by a straight line extending in the vertical direction passing through the central axis of the transport roller 127 (parallel to the Z axis) and the substrate P upstream of the transport roller 127 in the XZ plane.
  • the approach angle detection unit 114 outputs the detection result to the connected host control device 5.
  • the host control device 5 controls the first elevating mechanism 112 based on the detection result of the approach angle detection unit 114. Specifically, the host controller 5 controls the first elevating mechanism 112 so that the approach angle ⁇ 1 becomes a predetermined target approach angle. That is, when the delivery amount of the substrate P from the supply roll FR1 increases, the winding diameter of the supply roll FR1 decreases, so that the entry angle ⁇ 1 with respect to the target entry angle increases. For this reason, the host controller 5 moves the first elevating mechanism 112 downward (lowers) in the Z direction, thereby reducing the approach angle ⁇ 1 and correcting the approach angle ⁇ 1 to be the target approach angle. .
  • the host controller 5 performs feedback control on the first elevating mechanism 112 based on the detection result of the approach angle detection unit 114 so that the approach angle ⁇ 1 becomes the target approach angle. For this reason, since the board
  • the feedback control may be any control such as P control, PI control, and PID control.
  • the exposure apparatus U3 includes a position adjustment unit 120, an exposure unit 121, a drive unit 122 (see FIG. 3), a pressing mechanism 130, and a vibration isolation table (anti-vibration apparatus) 131.
  • the vibration isolation table 131 is provided on the installation surface E, and reduces the transmission of vibration (so-called floor vibration) from the installation surface E to the exposure unit 121 main body.
  • the position adjustment unit 120 is provided on the installation surface E, and includes the edge position controller EPC3 shown in FIG.
  • the position adjustment unit 120 is provided adjacent to the substrate supply apparatus 2 in the X direction.
  • the exposure unit 121 is provided on the vibration isolation table 131 and is provided on the opposite side of the substrate supply apparatus 2 with the position adjustment unit 120 in the X direction.
  • the drive unit 122 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the installation surface E, and is provided adjacent to the exposure unit 121 in the Y direction. That is, the position adjustment unit 120, the exposure unit 121, and the drive unit 122 are provided at different positions on the installation surface E. Further, the exposure unit 121, the position adjustment unit 120, and the drive unit 122 (see FIG. 3) are in a mechanically non-coupled state (a non-contact independent state).
  • the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 are provided on the installation surface E, while the exposure unit 121 is provided on the installation surface E via the vibration isolation table 131. For this reason, the exposure unit 121 is in a different vibration mode from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122. In other words, the exposure unit 121 is provided in a state where the vibration is propagated from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 (a state in which vibrations are difficult to propagate to each other, that is, a state in which the vibrations are effectively insulated). .
  • the exposure apparatus U3 includes a first substrate detection unit 123 and a second substrate detection unit 124 that detect the position of the substrate P.
  • the first substrate detection unit 123 and the second substrate detection unit 124 are connected to the host control device 5.
  • the host control apparatus 5 functions as a control apparatus (control unit) of the exposure apparatus U3.
  • a control apparatus of the exposure apparatus U3 a low-order control apparatus that controls the exposure apparatus U3 may be provided, and the low-order control apparatus may control the exposure apparatus U3.
  • the position adjustment unit 120 includes a base 125, the edge position controller EPC ⁇ b> 3 (width movement mechanism), and a fixed roller 126.
  • the base 125 is provided on the installation surface E and supports the edge position controller EPC3 and the fixed roller 126.
  • the base 125 may be a vibration isolation table having a vibration isolation function.
  • the base 125 is provided with a base position adjustment mechanism 128 that adjusts the position of the base 125 in the Y direction or the rotational direction around the Z axis.
  • the base position adjustment mechanism 128 is connected to the host control device 5, and the host control device 5 controls the base position adjustment mechanism 128, whereby the edge position controller EPC 3 and the fixed roller 126 installed on the base 125. Can be adjusted together. That is, the base position adjustment mechanism 128 functions as a roller position adjustment mechanism that adjusts the position of the fixed roller 126 in the Y direction with respect to the exposure unit 121.
  • the edge position controller EPC3 is movable on the base 125 in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P.
  • the edge position controller EPC3 has a plurality of rollers including a transport roller 127 provided on the most upstream side in the transport direction in which the substrate P is transported.
  • the transport roller 127 guides the substrate P supplied from the substrate supply device 2 into the position adjustment unit 120.
  • the edge position controller EPC3 is connected to the host controller 5 and controlled by the host controller 5 based on the detection result of the first substrate detection unit 123.
  • the fixed roller 126 guides the substrate P, whose position has been adjusted in the width direction by the edge position controller EPC3, toward the exposure unit 121.
  • the fixed roller 126 is rotatable and its position with respect to the base 125 is fixed. Therefore, the position of the substrate P entering the fixed roller 126 in the width direction can be adjusted by moving the substrate P in the width direction by the edge position controller EPC3.
  • the first substrate detection unit 123 detects the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed from the edge position controller EPC3 to the fixed roller 126.
  • the first substrate detection unit 123 is fixed on the base 125. Therefore, the first substrate detection unit 123 is in the same vibration mode as the edge position controller EPC3 and the fixed roller 126.
  • the first substrate detection unit 123 detects the position of the edge of the end portion of the substrate P that is in rolling contact with the fixed roller 126.
  • the first substrate detection unit 123 outputs the detection result to the connected host control device 5.
  • the second substrate detection unit 124 detects the position of the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121.
  • the second substrate detection unit 124 is fixed on a vibration isolation table 131 on which the exposure unit 121 is installed. For this reason, the second substrate detection unit 124 is in the same vibration mode as the exposure unit 121.
  • the second substrate detection unit 124 is provided on the introduction side where the substrate P of the exposure unit 121 is introduced. Specifically, the second substrate detection unit 124 is provided adjacent to the guide roller 28 at a position on the upstream side of the most upstream guide roller 28 in the transport direction provided in the exposure unit 121.
  • the second substrate detector 124 detects the position of the substrate P supplied to the exposure unit 121 in the width direction (Y direction) and the vertical direction (Z direction).
  • the second substrate detection unit 124 outputs the detection result to the connected host controller 5.
  • the host control device 5 controls the edge position controller EPC3 based on the detection result of the first substrate detection unit 123. Specifically, the host controller 5 determines the Y direction from the positions of the edges (both edges in the Y direction) of both ends of the substrate P that is in contact with (rolls into) the fixed roller 126 detected by the first substrate detection unit 123. And the difference between the first target position (target center position) defined in advance. Then, the host controller 5 feedback-controls the edge position controller EPC3 so that the difference becomes zero, moves the substrate P in the width direction, and sets the center position in the width direction of the substrate P with respect to the fixed roller 126 as the first position. Correct to the target center position.
  • the edge position controller EPC3 can maintain the position in the width direction of the substrate P with respect to the fixed roller 126 at the first target position, so that the positional deviation in the width direction of the substrate P with respect to the fixed roller 126 can be reduced.
  • the feedback control may be any control such as P control, PI control, PID control and the like.
  • the host controller 5 controls the base position adjustment mechanism 128 based on the detection result of the second substrate detection unit 124. Specifically, the host controller 5 calculates the difference between the center position obtained from the positions of both ends in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 124 and the second target center position defined in advance. . Then, the host controller 5 feedback-controls the base position adjustment mechanism 128 so that the difference becomes zero, and adjusts the position of the base 125 by the base position adjustment mechanism 128, thereby The position of the fixed roller 126 in the Y direction is adjusted. At this time, the host controller 5 adjusts the position of the fixed roller 126 so that the substrate P is not twisted and not displaced in the width direction.
  • the host controller 5 adjusts the position so that the axial direction of the fixed roller 126 is parallel to the axial direction of the guide roller 28. Then, the host controller 5 adjusts the position of the fixed roller 126 in the Y direction or the rotation direction around the Z axis by the base position adjustment mechanism 128, thereby the center in the width direction of the substrate P supplied to the exposure unit 121. Since the position can be maintained at the second target center position, the twist of the substrate P and the positional deviation in the width direction can be reduced. Also in this case, the feedback control may be any control such as P control, PI control, PID control and the like.
  • the position adjustment unit 120 can correct the position in the width direction of the substrate P supplied to the fixed roller 126 to the first target position, and the position of the substrate P supplied to the guide roller 28 of the exposure unit 121 is the first position. Two target positions can be corrected.
  • the position of the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121 is corrected.
  • the substrate P is supplied from the substrate supply device 2 to the position adjustment unit 120.
  • the position of the substrate P to be processed may be corrected.
  • a substrate detection unit is provided on the upstream side in the conveyance direction of the conveyance roller 127, and a roll position adjustment mechanism for adjusting the position of the supply roll FR1 is provided.
  • the high-order control apparatus 5 may adjust supply roll FR1 by controlling a roll position adjustment mechanism based on the detection result of a board
  • the position of the substrate P supplied from the exposure unit 121 to the substrate recovery apparatus 4 may be corrected.
  • FIG. 3 is a view showing a part of the configuration of the exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) U3 according to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 4 is a view showing the structure of the drive unit of the substrate support mechanism 12 in FIG. It is.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of the exposure unit 121 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a view showing the arrangement of the illumination area IR and the projection area PA of the exposure unit 121 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 7 is a view showing the configuration of the projection optical system PL of the exposure unit 121 shown in FIG.
  • the exposure unit 121 shown in FIGS. 2 to 5 is a so-called scanning exposure apparatus, and includes a plurality of guide rollers 28 constituting a substrate support mechanism (substrate transport mechanism) 12 and a rotatable cylindrical rotating drum 25. While carrying P in the carrying direction (scanning direction), the mask pattern image formed on the planar mask M is projected and exposed onto the surface of the substrate P.
  • 3 and 4 are views of the exposure unit 121 as viewed from the ⁇ X side, and FIGS. 5 and 7 are orthogonal coordinate systems in which the X, Y, and Z directions are orthogonal. 1 is the same orthogonal coordinate system.
  • the mask M used in the exposure unit 121 will be described.
  • the mask M is created as a transmission type planar mask in which a mask pattern is formed with a light shielding layer together with chromium on one surface (mask surface P1) of a flat glass plate, for example, and is held on a mask stage 21 described later. Used in the state.
  • the mask M has a pattern non-formation region in which no mask pattern is formed, and is attached on the mask stage 21 in the pattern non-formation region. The mask M can be released with respect to the mask stage 21.
  • the mask M may be formed with the whole or a part of the panel pattern corresponding to one display device, or may be a multi-surface pattern in which panel patterns corresponding to a plurality of display devices are formed. May be. Further, a plurality of panel patterns may be repeatedly formed on the mask M in the scanning direction (X direction) of the mask M, or small panel patterns may be repeatedly formed in a direction orthogonal to the scanning direction (Y direction). A plurality may be formed. Further, the mask M may be formed with a panel pattern for the first display device and a panel pattern for the second display device having a size different from that of the first display device.
  • the exposure unit 121 installed on the vibration isolation table 131 includes a mask holding mechanism 11 that supports the apparatus frame 132 and the mask stage 21 in addition to the alignment microscopes AM ⁇ b> 1 and AM ⁇ b> 2 described above. And a substrate support mechanism 12, a projection optical system PL, and a low-order control device (control unit) 16.
  • the exposure unit 121 receives the illumination light beam EL1 from the illumination mechanism 13 and transmits the transmitted light (imaging light beam) generated from the mask pattern of the mask M held by the mask holding mechanism 11 to the substrate support mechanism 12. Projection is performed on the substrate P supported by the rotary drum 25, and a projection image of a part of the mask pattern is formed on the surface of the substrate P.
  • the lower-level control device 16 controls each part of the exposure apparatus U3 and causes each part to execute processing.
  • the lower level control device 16 may be a part or all of the higher level control device 5 of the device manufacturing system 1. Further, the lower level control device 16 may be a device controlled by the higher level control device 5 and different from the higher level control device 5.
  • the lower control device 16 includes, for example, a computer.
  • the vibration isolation table 131 is provided on the installation surface E and supports the device frame 132. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the vibration isolation table 131 includes a first vibration isolation table 131a provided outside in the Y direction and a second vibration isolation table provided inside the first vibration isolation table 131a. 131b.
  • the apparatus frame 132 is provided on the first vibration isolation table 131a and the second vibration isolation table 131b, and supports the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate support mechanism 12, the illumination mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL.
  • the apparatus frame 132 includes a first frame 132 a that supports the mask holding mechanism 11, the illumination mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL, and a second frame 132 b that supports the substrate support mechanism 12.
  • the first frame 132a and the second frame 132b are provided independently, and are arranged so that the first frame 132a covers the second frame 132b.
  • the first frame 132a is provided on the first vibration isolation table 131a
  • the second frame 132b is provided on the second vibration isolation table 131b.
  • the first frame 132a includes a first lower frame 135 provided on the first vibration isolation base 131a, a first upper frame 136 provided above the first lower frame 135 in the Z direction, and a first upper frame 136. And an arm portion 137 standing upright.
  • the first lower frame 135 has a leg portion 135a standing on the first vibration isolation base 131a and an upper surface portion 135b supported by the leg portion 135a, and the projection optical system via the holding member 143 on the upper surface portion 135b.
  • System PL is supported.
  • the holding member 143 is kinematically supported by washer members 145 made of metal balls or the like disposed at three locations on the upper surface portion 135b.
  • the leg portion 135a is arranged at a predetermined portion so that a rotation axis AX2 of the rotary drum 25 described later is inserted in the Y direction.
  • the first upper frame 136 also has a leg portion 136a standing on the upper surface portion 135b and an upper surface portion 136b supported by the leg portion 136a, and holds the mask on the upper surface portion 136b.
  • the mechanism 11 (mask stage 21) is supported.
  • the arm part 137 stands on the upper surface part 136 b and supports the illumination mechanism 13 so that the illumination mechanism 13 is positioned above the mask holding mechanism 11.
  • the second frame 132b is composed of a lower surface portion 139 provided on the second vibration isolation table 131b and a pair of bearing portions 140 standing upright on the lower surface portion 139 in the Y direction.
  • the pair of bearing portions 140 is provided with an air bearing 141 that pivotally supports the rotation axis AX2 that is the rotation center of the rotary drum 25.
  • the mask holding mechanism 11 transmits power to a mask stage (mask holding member) 21 for holding the mask M, a moving mechanism (linear guide, air bearing, etc.) (not shown) for moving the mask stage 21, and a moving mechanism. And a transmission member 23 for the purpose.
  • the mask stage 21 is configured in a frame shape surrounding a pattern formation region of the mask M, and an upper surface portion 136b of the first upper frame 136 by a mask side drive portion (drive source such as a motor) 22 provided in the drive unit 122.
  • a mask side drive portion drive source such as a motor
  • the driving force transmitted from the transmission member 23 is used for linear driving of the mask stage 21 by the moving mechanism.
  • the mask side drive unit (drive source) 22 is fixed to the column frame 146 so as to extend in the X direction.
  • the linear motor includes a magnet track (stator) of the linear motor
  • the transmission member 23 includes a linear motor coil unit (movable element) facing the magnet track with a certain gap.
  • the holding member 143 that supports the projection optical system PL on the apparatus frame 132 side corresponds to the exposure position by the projection optical system PL on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum 25 (or the surface of the substrate P).
  • a displacement sensor SG1 for measuring a change in the height of the surface and a displacement sensor SG2 for measuring a change in the position of the mask M in the Z direction from the lower side of the mask stage 21 are provided.
  • the rotating drum 25 that supports the substrate P by winding it around a substantially half circumference is provided with a substrate-side drive unit (drive of a rotary motor or the like) provided in the drive unit 122 shown in FIG. It is rotated by the source 26.
  • the rotary drum 25 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer peripheral surface (circumferential surface) having a curvature radius Rfa centered on the rotation axis AX2 extending in the Y direction.
  • a plane including the center line of the rotation axis AX2 and parallel to the YZ plane is defined as a center plane CL (see FIG. 5).
  • a part of the circumferential surface of the rotary drum 25 is a support surface P2 that supports the substrate P with a predetermined tension. That is, the rotary drum 25 supports the substrate P in a stable cylindrical curved surface by winding the substrate P around the support surface P2 with a constant tension.
  • Each air bearing 141 that supports the rotary shaft AX2 with the bearing portions 140 on both sides rotatably supports the rotary shaft AX2 in a non-contact state.
  • the rotary shaft AX2 is supported by the air bearing 141 at both ends of the rotary drum 25.
  • a normal bearing using a ball or needle processed with high accuracy may be used.
  • the plurality of guide rollers 28 are respectively provided on the upstream side and the downstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P with the rotary drum 25 interposed therebetween.
  • four guide rollers 28 are provided, two on the upstream side in the transport direction and two on the downstream side in the transport direction.
  • the substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P transported from the position adjustment unit 120 to the rotary drum 25 by the two guide rollers 28.
  • the substrate support mechanism 12 rotates the rotating drum 25 through the rotation axis AX2 by the substrate side driving unit 26, thereby supporting the substrate P introduced into the rotating drum 25 while supporting the substrate P on the support surface P2 of the rotating drum 25. It is conveyed toward the roller 28.
  • the substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P conveyed to the guide roller 28 toward the substrate recovery device 4.
  • a disk-like scale plate 25c having substantially the same diameter as the radius Rfa of the outer peripheral surface 25a of the rotary drum 25 is fixed coaxially with the rotation axis AX2 on at least one end side of the rotary drum 25 around which the substrate P is wound.
  • a diffraction grating is formed at a constant pitch in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the scale plate 25c, and the rotation angle or rotation of the rotary drum 25 is detected by optically detecting the diffraction grating by the read head EH for encoder measurement. The amount of movement of the surface 25a of the drum 25 in the circumferential direction is measured.
  • the rotation angle information of the rotary drum 25 measured by the read head EH is also used as a feedback signal for servo control of the motor that rotates the rotary drum 25.
  • the displacement sensor SG ⁇ b> 1 is arranged so as to measure the displacement (radial displacement) of the height position of the surface of the substrate P, but the region on the end side of the rotary drum 25 that is not covered with the substrate P. You may arrange
  • a rotor RT in which a magnet unit MUr of a rotary motor that generates torque around the rotary shaft AX2 is annularly arranged and an axial direction on the rotary shaft AX2 And a magnet unit MUs for a voice coil motor that gives a thrust of.
  • a coil unit CUr disposed so as to face the magnet unit MUr around the rotor RT, and a coil wound so as to surround the magnet unit MUs.
  • Units CUs are provided.
  • the voice coil motor (MUs, CUs) generates thrust in the direction of the rotation axis AX2 (Y direction) even when the rotary drum 25 is rotating, the rotary drum 25 (and the scale plate 25c) is moved to Y. Can be finely moved in the direction. Thereby, a minute positional shift in the Y direction of the substrate P during scanning exposure can be sequentially corrected.
  • a displacement sensor DT1 for measuring the displacement in the Y direction of the end surface Tp of the rotation axis AX2, or a displacement sensor DT2 for measuring the displacement in the Y direction of the end surface of the scale plate 25c.
  • the change in the position of the rotary drum 25 in the Y direction can be sequentially measured in real time. Therefore, if the voice coil motors (MUs, CUs) are servo-controlled based on the measurement signals from the displacement sensors DT1, DT2, the position of the rotary drum 25 in the Y direction can be accurately determined. .
  • the exposure apparatus U3 of the first embodiment is an exposure apparatus assuming a so-called multi-lens system.
  • 6 is a plan view of the illumination area IR (IR1 to IR6) on the mask M held by the mask stage 21 as viewed from the ⁇ Z side (left figure in FIG. 6), and is supported by the rotary drum 25.
  • a plan view (right view of FIG. 6) of the projection area PA (PA1 to PA6) on the substrate P viewed from the + Z side is shown.
  • a symbol Xs in FIG. 6 indicates the scanning direction (rotating direction) of the mask stage 21 and the rotating drum 25.
  • the multi-lens type exposure apparatus U3 illuminates the illumination light beam EL1 on a plurality of (for example, six in the first embodiment) illumination regions IR1 to IR6 on the mask M, and each illumination light beam EL1 corresponds to each illumination region IR1.
  • a plurality of projection light beams EL2 obtained by irradiating with IR6 are projected and exposed to a plurality of projection areas PA1 to PA6 (for example, six in the first embodiment) on the substrate P.
  • the plurality of illumination areas IR1 to IR6 illuminated by the illumination mechanism 13 will be described.
  • the plurality of illumination regions IR1 to IR6 are arranged in two rows in the scanning direction of the substrate P across the center plane CL, and the illumination regions IR1, IR3,. And IR5 are arranged, and illumination regions IR2, IR4, and IR6 are arranged on the mask M on the downstream side in the scanning direction.
  • Each of the illumination regions IR1 to IR6 is an elongated trapezoidal region having parallel short sides and long sides extending in the width direction (Y direction) of the mask M.
  • each of the trapezoidal illumination areas IR1 to IR6 is an area where the short side is located on the center plane CL side and the long side is located outside.
  • the odd-numbered illumination areas IR1, IR3, and IR5 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the Y direction.
  • the even-numbered illumination areas IR2, IR4, and IR6 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the Y direction.
  • the illumination area IR2 is arranged between the illumination area IR1 and the illumination area IR3 in the Y direction.
  • the illumination area IR3 is arranged between the illumination area IR2 and the illumination area IR4 in the Y direction.
  • the illumination area IR4 is arranged between the illumination area IR3 and the illumination area IR5 in the Y direction.
  • the illumination area IR5 is arranged between the illumination area IR4 and the illumination area IR6 in the Y direction.
  • the illumination areas IR1 to IR6 are arranged so that the triangular portions of the hypotenuses of adjacent trapezoidal illumination areas overlap each other when viewed from the scanning direction of the mask M.
  • each of the illumination areas IR1 to IR6 is a trapezoidal area, but may be a rectangular area.
  • the mask M has a pattern formation area A3 where a mask pattern is formed and a pattern non-formation area A4 where a mask pattern is not formed.
  • the pattern non-formation region A4 is a low reflection region that absorbs the illumination light beam EL1, and is arranged so as to surround the pattern formation region A3 in a frame shape.
  • the illumination areas IR1 to IR6 are arranged so as to cover the entire width of the pattern formation area A3 in the Y direction.
  • the illumination mechanism 13 emits an illumination light beam EL1 that is illuminated by the mask M.
  • the illumination mechanism 13 includes a light source device and an illumination optical system IL.
  • the light source device includes, for example, a lamp light source such as a mercury lamp, a solid-state light source such as a laser diode or a light emitting diode (LED).
  • Illumination light emitted from the light source device includes, for example, bright lines (g-line, h-line, i-line) emitted from a lamp light source, far-ultraviolet light (DUV light) such as KrF excimer laser light (wavelength 248 nm), and ArF excimer laser light. (Wavelength 193 nm).
  • the illumination light emitted from the light source device has a uniform illuminance distribution and is guided to the illumination optical system IL via a light guide member such as an optical fiber.
  • the illumination optical system IL is provided with a plurality (for example, six in the first embodiment) of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 corresponding to the plurality of illumination regions IR1 to IR6.
  • the illumination light beam EL1 from the light source device is incident on each of the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6.
  • Each of the illumination modules IL1 to IL6 guides the illumination light beam EL1 incident from the light source device to each of the illumination regions IR1 to IR6. That is, the illumination module IL1 guides the illumination light beam EL1 to the illumination region IR1, and similarly, the illumination modules IL2 to IL6 guide the illumination light beam EL1 to the illumination regions IR2 to IR6.
  • the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 are arranged in two rows in the scanning direction of the mask M across the center plane CL.
  • the illumination modules IL1, IL3, and IL5 are arranged on the side (left side in FIG. 5) where the illumination regions IR1, IR3, and IR5 are arranged with respect to the center plane CL.
  • the illumination modules IL1, IL3, and IL5 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the Y direction.
  • the illumination modules IL2, IL4, and IL6 are arranged on the side (right side in FIG. 5) where the illumination regions IR2, IR4, and IR6 are arranged with respect to the center plane CL.
  • the illumination modules IL2, IL4, and IL6 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the Y direction.
  • the illumination module IL2 is disposed between the illumination module IL1 and the illumination module IL3 in the Y direction.
  • the illumination module IL3 is disposed between the illumination module IL2 and the illumination module IL4 in the Y direction.
  • the illumination module IL4 is disposed between the illumination module IL3 and the illumination module IL5 in the Y direction.
  • the illumination module IL5 is disposed between the illumination module IL4 and the illumination module IL6 in the Y direction.
  • the illumination modules IL1, IL3, and IL5 and the illumination modules IL2, IL4, and IL6 are symmetrically arranged with respect to the center plane CL as viewed from the Y direction.
  • Each of the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 includes a plurality of optical members such as an integrator optical system, a rod lens, and a fly-eye lens, and illuminates each of the illumination regions IR1 to IR6 with an illumination light beam EL1 having a uniform illuminance distribution.
  • the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 are arranged above the mask M in the Z direction.
  • Each of the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 illuminates each illumination region IR of the mask pattern formed on the mask M from above the mask M.
  • the plurality of projection areas PA1 to PA6 on the substrate P are arranged in correspondence with the plurality of illumination areas IR1 to IR6 on the mask M. That is, the plurality of projection areas PA1 to PA6 on the substrate P are arranged in two rows in the transport direction across the center plane CL, and the projection areas PA1, PA3, PA3, PA3 are arranged on the upstream substrate P in the transport direction (scanning direction). PA5 is arranged, and projection areas PA2, PA4, and PA6 are arranged on the substrate P on the downstream side in the transport direction.
  • Each of the projection areas PA1 to PA6 is an elongated trapezoidal area having a short side and a long side extending in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P.
  • each of the trapezoidal projection areas PA1 to PA6 is an area where the short side is located on the center plane CL side and the long side is located outside.
  • the projection areas PA1, PA3, and PA5 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the width direction.
  • the projection areas PA2, PA4, and PA6 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the width direction.
  • the projection area PA2 is arranged between the projection area PA1 and the projection area PA3 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2.
  • the projection area PA3 is disposed between the projection area PA2 and the projection area PA4 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2.
  • the projection area PA4 is disposed between the projection area PA3 and the projection area PA5 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2.
  • the projection area PA5 is disposed between the projection area PA4 and the projection area PA6 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2.
  • the projection areas PA1 to PA6 are overlapped so that the triangular portions of the oblique sides of the adjacent trapezoidal projection areas PA overlap each other when viewed from the transport direction of the substrate P. ) Is arranged.
  • the projection area PA has such a shape that the exposure amount in the area where the adjacent projection areas PA overlap is substantially the same as the exposure amount in the non-overlapping area.
  • the projection areas PA1 to PA6 are arranged so as to cover the entire width in the Y direction of the exposure area A7 exposed on the substrate P.
  • the length from the center point of the illumination area IR1 (and IR3, IR5) on the mask M to the center point of the illumination area IR2 (and IR4, IR6) is set to be substantially equal.
  • the projection optical system PL is provided with a plurality (for example, six in the first embodiment) of projection modules PL1 to PL6 corresponding to the plurality of projection areas PA1 to PA6.
  • a plurality of projection light beams EL2 from the plurality of illumination regions IR1 to IR6 are incident on the plurality of projection modules PL1 to PL6, respectively.
  • Each projection module PL1 to PL6 guides each projection light beam EL2 from the mask M to each projection area PA1 to PA6.
  • the projection module PL1 guides the projection light beam EL2 from the illumination region IR1 to the projection region PA1, and similarly, the projection modules PL2 to PL6 each project the projection light beam EL2 from the illumination regions IR2 to IR6 to the projection regions PA2 to PA6.
  • the plurality of projection modules PL1 to PL6 are arranged in two rows in the scanning direction of the mask M across the center plane CL.
  • Projection modules PL1, PL3, and PL5 are arranged on the side (left side in FIG. 5) on which projection areas PA1, PA3, and PA5 are arranged with respect to center plane CL.
  • Projection modules PL1, PL3, and PL5 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the Y direction.
  • the projection modules PL2, PL4, and PL6 are arranged on the side where the projection areas PA2, PA4, and PA6 are arranged (right side in FIG. 5) with respect to the center plane CL.
  • Projection modules PL2, PL4, and PL6 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the Y direction.
  • the projection module PL2 is disposed between the projection module PL1 and the projection module PL3 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2.
  • the projection module PL3 is disposed between the projection module PL2 and the projection module PL4 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2.
  • the projection module PL4 is disposed between the projection module PL3 and the projection module PL5 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2.
  • the projection module PL5 is disposed between the projection module PL4 and the projection module PL6 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2.
  • the projection modules PL1, PL3, and PL5 and the projection modules PL2, PL4, and PL6 are arranged symmetrically about the center plane CL as viewed from the Y direction.
  • the plurality of projection modules PL1 to PL6 are provided corresponding to the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6. That is, the projection module PL1 projects an image of the mask pattern of the illumination area IR1 illuminated by the illumination module IL1 onto the projection area PA1 on the substrate P. Similarly, the projection modules PL2 to PL6 project the mask pattern images of the illumination areas IR2 to IR6 illuminated by the illumination modules IL2 to IL6 onto the projection areas PA2 to PA6 on the substrate P.
  • the projection modules PL1 to PL6 will be described with reference to FIG. Since each of the projection modules PL1 to PL6 has the same configuration, the projection module PL1 will be described as an example.
  • the projection module PL1 projects an image of the mask pattern in the illumination area IR (illumination area IR1) on the mask M onto the projection area PA on the substrate P.
  • the projection module PL1 includes a first optical system 61 that forms an image of the mask pattern in the illumination region IR on the intermediate image plane P7, and at least one of the intermediate images formed by the first optical system 61.
  • a second optical system 62 that re-images the image on the projection area PA of the substrate P, and a projection field stop 63 disposed on the intermediate image plane P7 on which the intermediate image is formed.
  • the projection module PL1 includes a focus correction optical member 64, an image shift optical member 65, a magnification correction optical member 66, and a rotation correction mechanism 67.
  • the first optical system 61 and the second optical system 62 are, for example, telecentric catadioptric optical systems obtained by modifying a Dyson system.
  • the first optical system 61 has its optical axis (hereinafter referred to as the second optical axis BX2) substantially orthogonal to the center plane CL.
  • the first optical system 61 includes a first deflecting member 70, a first lens group 71, and a first concave mirror 72.
  • the first deflecting member 70 is a triangular prism having a first reflecting surface P3 and a second reflecting surface P4.
  • the first reflecting surface P3 is a surface that reflects the projection light beam EL2 from the mask M and causes the reflected projection light beam EL2 to enter the first concave mirror 72 through the first lens group 71.
  • the second reflecting surface P4 is a surface on which the projection light beam EL2 reflected by the first concave mirror 72 enters through the first lens group 71 and reflects the incident projection light beam EL2 toward the projection field stop 63.
  • the first lens group 71 includes various lenses, and the optical axes of the various lenses are disposed on the second optical axis BX2.
  • the first concave mirror 72 is arranged on a pupil plane on which a large number of point light sources generated by the fly-eye lens are imaged by various lenses from the fly-eye lens to the first concave mirror 72 via the illumination field stop.
  • the projection light beam EL2 from the mask M passes through the focus correction optical member 64 and the image shift optical member 65, is reflected by the first reflecting surface P3 of the first deflecting member 70, and is the upper half field of view of the first lens group 71.
  • the light enters the first concave mirror 72 through the region.
  • the projection light beam EL2 incident on the first concave mirror 72 is reflected by the first concave mirror 72, passes through the lower half field of view of the first lens group 71, and enters the second reflective surface P4 of the first deflecting member 70.
  • the projection light beam EL2 incident on the second reflecting surface P4 is reflected by the second reflecting surface P4 and enters the projection field stop 63.
  • the projection field stop 63 has an opening that defines the shape of the projection area PA. That is, the shape of the opening of the projection field stop 63 defines the shape of the projection area PA.
  • the second optical system 62 has the same configuration as that of the first optical system 61, and is provided symmetrically with the first optical system 61 with the intermediate image plane P7 interposed therebetween.
  • the second optical system 62 has an optical axis (hereinafter referred to as a third optical axis BX3) that is substantially perpendicular to the center plane CL and parallel to the second optical axis BX2.
  • the second optical system 62 includes a second deflecting member 80, a second lens group 81, and a second concave mirror 82.
  • the second deflecting member 80 has a third reflecting surface P5 and a fourth reflecting surface P6.
  • the third reflecting surface P5 is a surface that reflects the projection light beam EL2 from the projection field stop 63 and causes the reflected projection light beam EL2 to enter the second concave mirror 82 through the second lens group 81.
  • the fourth reflecting surface P6 is a surface on which the projection light beam EL2 reflected by the second concave mirror 82 enters through the second lens group 81 and reflects the incident projection light beam EL2 toward the projection area PA.
  • the second lens group 81 includes various lenses, and the optical axes of the various lenses are disposed on the third optical axis BX3.
  • the second concave mirror 82 is arranged on a pupil plane on which a large number of point light source images formed by the first concave mirror 72 are imaged by various lenses from the first concave mirror 72 through the projection field stop 63 to the second concave mirror 82. ing.
  • the projection light beam EL2 from the projection field stop 63 is reflected by the third reflecting surface P5 of the second deflecting member 80, and enters the second concave mirror 82 through the upper half field region of the second lens group 81.
  • the projection light beam EL ⁇ b> 2 that has entered the second concave mirror 82 is reflected by the second concave mirror 82, passes through the lower half field of view of the second lens group 81, and enters the fourth reflecting surface P ⁇ b> 6 of the second deflecting member 80.
  • the projection light beam EL2 incident on the fourth reflection surface P6 is reflected by the fourth reflection surface P6, passes through the magnification correction optical member 66, and is projected onto the projection area PA. Thereby, the image of the mask pattern in the illumination area IR is projected to the projection area PA at the same magnification ( ⁇ 1).
  • the focus correction optical member 64 is disposed between the mask M and the first optical system 61.
  • the focus correction optical member 64 adjusts the focus state of the mask pattern image projected onto the substrate P.
  • the focus correction optical member 64 is formed by superposing two wedge-shaped prisms in opposite directions (in the opposite direction in the X direction in FIG. 7) so as to form a transparent parallel plate as a whole. By sliding the pair of prisms in the direction of the slope without changing the distance between the faces facing each other, the thickness of the parallel plate is made variable. As a result, the effective optical path length of the first optical system 61 is finely adjusted, and the focus state of the mask pattern image formed on the intermediate image plane P7 and the projection area PA is finely adjusted.
  • the image shift optical member 65 is disposed between the mask M and the first optical system 61.
  • the image shift optical member 65 adjusts the image of the mask pattern projected onto the substrate P so as to be movable in the image plane.
  • the image shifting optical member 65 is composed of a transparent parallel flat glass that can be tilted in the XZ plane of FIG. 6 and a transparent parallel flat glass that can be tilted in the YZ plane of FIG. By adjusting the respective tilt amounts of the two parallel flat glass plates, the image of the mask pattern formed on the intermediate image plane P7 and the projection area PA can be slightly shifted in the X direction and the Y direction.
  • the magnification correcting optical member 66 is disposed between the second deflection member 80 and the substrate P.
  • a concave lens, a convex lens, and a concave lens are arranged coaxially at predetermined intervals, the front and rear concave lenses are fixed, and the convex lens between them is moved in the optical axis (principal ray) direction. It is configured.
  • the mask pattern image formed in the projection area PA is isotropically enlarged or reduced by a small amount while maintaining a telecentric imaging state.
  • the optical axes of the three lens groups constituting the magnification correcting optical member 66 are inclined in the XZ plane so as to be parallel to the principal ray of the projection light beam EL2.
  • the rotation correction mechanism 67 is a mechanism that slightly rotates the first deflecting member 70 around an axis perpendicular to the second optical axis BX2 by an actuator (not shown), for example.
  • the rotation correction mechanism 67 can slightly rotate the image of the mask pattern formed on the intermediate image plane P7 by rotating the first deflection member 70 within the plane P7.
  • the projection light beam EL2 from the mask M exits from the illumination area IR in the normal direction of the mask surface P1 and enters the first optical system 61.
  • the projection light beam EL2 incident on the first optical system 61 is transmitted through the focus correction optical member 64 and the image shift optical member 65, and the first reflection surface (plane mirror) P3 of the first deflection member 70 of the first optical system 61. And is reflected by the first concave mirror 72 through the first lens group 71.
  • the projection light beam EL2 reflected by the first concave mirror 72 passes through the first lens group 71 again, is reflected by the second reflecting surface (plane mirror) P4 of the first deflecting member 70, and enters the projection field stop 63.
  • the projection light beam EL2 that has passed through the projection field stop 63 is reflected by the third reflecting surface (planar mirror) P5 of the second deflecting member 80 of the second optical system 62, and then reflected by the second concave mirror 82 through the second lens group 81. Is done.
  • the projection light beam EL2 reflected by the second concave mirror 82 passes through the second lens group 81 again, is reflected by the fourth reflecting surface (plane mirror) P6 of the second deflecting member 80, and enters the magnification correcting optical member 66. .
  • the projection light beam EL2 emitted from the magnification correcting optical member 66 is incident on the projection area PA on the substrate P, and an image of the mask pattern appearing in the illumination area IR is projected to the projection area PA at the same magnification ( ⁇ 1). .
  • the drive unit 122 includes a mask side drive unit 22 attached to a support frame 146 installed on the installation surface E, and a substrate side drive unit 26.
  • the mask side drive unit 22 is connected to the linear motor magnet track (stator) fixed to the column frame 146 so as to extend in the X direction, and the transmission member 23 coupled to the mask stage 21. It is composed of a linear motor coil unit (movable element) that is fixed and faces the magnet track with a certain gap.
  • the board side drive unit 26 includes a coil unit CUr fixed as a stator on the column frame 146 side, and a mover on the rotor RT on the rotation axis AX2 side of the rotary drum 25.
  • the mask side drive unit 22 and the substrate side drive unit 26 have a configuration capable of transmitting power directly to the transmission member 23 and the rotation shaft AX2 in a non-contact manner (direct drive method).
  • the board-side drive unit 26 includes an electric motor and a magnetic gear, and the electric motor is fixed to the support frame 146 side, and a magnetic gear is interposed between the output shaft of the electric motor and the rotation shaft AX2. Also good.
  • the lower-level control device 16 shown in FIG. 5 moves the mask stage 21 and the rotary drum 25 in synchronization. For this reason, the image of the mask pattern formed on the mask surface P1 of the mask M is curved following the surface (circumferential surface) of the substrate P wound around the support surface P2 (25a in FIG. 4) of the rotary drum 25. Surface) is continuously and repeatedly exposed to projection.
  • an operation (rewinding) of returning the mask M to the initial position in the ⁇ X direction is required.
  • the rotating drum 25 is continuously rotated at a constant speed and the substrate P is continuously fed at a constant speed, the pattern exposure is not performed on the substrate P during the rewinding operation of the mask M, and the panel P is transported in the transport direction of the substrate P.
  • the working pattern is formed in a jump (separated) manner.
  • the speed of the substrate P peripheral speed here
  • the speed of the mask M during scanning exposure are assumed to be 50 mm / s to 100 mm / s in practice, the mask stage is used when the mask M is rewound. If 21 is driven at a maximum speed of, for example, 500 mm / s, the margin in the transport direction between panel patterns formed on the substrate P can be reduced.
  • the movement position and speed of the mask stage 21 in the X direction are precisely measured by a laser interferometer or a linear encoder, and the movement position and speed of the outer peripheral surface of the rotary drum 25 are determined by the scale plate 25c in FIG.
  • the pressing mechanism 130 is provided between the position adjustment unit 120 and the exposure unit 121.
  • the pressing mechanism 130 presses the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121 so that tension is applied.
  • the pressing mechanism 130 includes a pressing member 151 and an elevating mechanism 152 that moves the pressing member 151 up and down.
  • the pressing member 151 presses the substrate P against the substrate P in a contact or non-contact state.
  • an air turn bar having an air ejection port and a suction port for making a non-contact state with the substrate P, or a friction roller in contact with the substrate P is used.
  • the elevating mechanism 152 elevates and lowers the pressing member 151 in a direction in which the pressing member 151 is pressed from one surface (back surface) of the substrate P to the other surface (front surface), that is, in the Z direction.
  • the elevating mechanism 152 is connected to the host controller 5 and controlled by the host controller 5 based on the detection result of the second substrate detector 124.
  • the host control device 5 controls the pressing mechanism 130 based on the detection result of the second substrate detection unit 124. Specifically, the host control device 5 calculates the displacement amount of the position per unit time (for example, several milliseconds) of the substrate P from the position of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 124. The host controller 5 adjusts the amount of movement of the pressing member 151 in the Z direction according to the calculated amount of displacement. That is, if the calculated displacement amount is large, the host controller 5 controls the lifting mechanism 152 to raise the pressing member 151 in the Z direction, assuming that the vibration of the substrate P is large. The host control device 5 raises the pressing member 151 in the Z direction to apply tension to the substrate P, and the vibration of the substrate P is suppressed by the pressing member 151.
  • the substrate collection apparatus 4 includes a position adjustment unit 160, a second bearing portion 161 on which the collection roll FR2 is mounted, and a second lifting mechanism 162 that raises and lowers the second bearing portion 161.
  • the substrate recovery apparatus 4 includes a discharge angle detection unit 164 and a third substrate detection unit 165, and the discharge angle detection unit 164 and the third substrate detection unit 165 are connected to the host control device 5.
  • the host control device 5 functions as a control device (control unit) of the substrate recovery device 4, similarly to the substrate supply device 2.
  • a low-order control device that controls the substrate recovery apparatus 4 may be provided, and the low-order control device may control the substrate recovery apparatus 4.
  • the position adjustment unit 160 includes the edge position controller EPC2 shown in FIG.
  • the position adjustment unit 160 has substantially the same configuration as the position adjustment unit 120 of the exposure apparatus U3, and includes a base 170 and an edge position controller EPC2.
  • the base 170 is provided on the installation surface E and supports the edge position controller EPC2.
  • the base 170 may be a vibration isolation table having a vibration isolation function.
  • the edge position controller EPC2 is movable on the base 170 in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P.
  • the edge position controller EPC2 has a plurality of rollers including a transport roller 167 provided on the most downstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P.
  • the transport roller 167 guides the substrate P discharged from the position adjustment unit 160 to the collection roll FR2.
  • the edge position controller EPC2 is connected to the host controller 5 and controlled by the host controller 5 based on the detection result of the third substrate detector 165.
  • the third substrate detection unit 165 detects the position in the width direction of the substrate P recovered from the edge position controller EPC2 to the recovery roll FR2.
  • the third substrate detection unit 165 is fixed on the second lifting mechanism 162. For this reason, the 3rd board
  • the third substrate detection unit 165 detects the position of the edge of the end portion of the substrate P recovered by the recovery roll FR2.
  • the third substrate detection unit 165 outputs the detection result to the connected higher order control device 5.
  • the host controller 5 controls the edge position controller EPC2 based on the detection result of the third substrate detector 165. Specifically, the host controller 5 determines the difference between the position of the edge of the end of the substrate P recovered by the recovery roll FR2 detected by the third substrate detection unit 165 and the predetermined third target position. Is calculated. Then, the host controller 5 feedback-controls the edge position controller EPC2 so that the difference becomes zero, moves the substrate P in the width direction, and sets the position in the width direction of the substrate P with respect to the collection roll FR2 to the third position. The target position. Therefore, the edge position controller EPC2 can maintain the position in the width direction of the substrate P with respect to the collection roll FR2 at the third target position.
  • the feedback control may be any control such as P control, PI control, PID control and the like.
  • the second bearing portion 161 rotatably supports the collection roll FR2.
  • the collection roll FR2 pivotally supported by the second bearing portion 161 has a winding diameter of the collection roll FR2 corresponding to the collection of the substrate P. For this reason, the position where the substrate P is recovered in the recovery roll FR2 changes according to the recovery amount of the substrate P.
  • the second elevating mechanism 162 is provided between the installation surface E and the second bearing portion 161.
  • the second elevating mechanism 162 moves the second bearing portion 161 together with the recovery roll FR2 in the Z direction (vertical direction).
  • the second elevating mechanism 162 is connected to the host controller 5, and the host controller 5 moves the second bearing portion 161 in the Z direction by the second elevator mechanism 162, so that the substrate P is collected by the collection roll FR ⁇ b> 2.
  • the position where the water is collected can be set to a predetermined position.
  • the discharge angle detector 164 detects the discharge angle ⁇ 2 of the substrate P discharged from the transport roller 167 of the edge position controller EPC2.
  • the discharge angle detection unit 164 is provided around the transport roller 167.
  • the discharge angle ⁇ 2 is an angle formed by a straight line extending in the vertical direction passing through the central axis of the transport roller 167 and the substrate P on the downstream side of the transport roller 167 in the XZ plane.
  • the discharge angle detection unit 164 outputs a detection result to the connected host control device 5.
  • the host control device 5 controls the second elevating mechanism 162 based on the detection result of the discharge angle detecting unit 164. Specifically, the host controller 5 controls the second elevating mechanism 162 such that the discharge angle ⁇ 2 becomes a predetermined target discharge angle. That is, when the collection amount of the substrate P to the collection roll FR2 increases, the winding diameter of the collection roll FR2 increases, and the discharge angle ⁇ 2 with respect to the target discharge angle decreases. Therefore, the host controller 5 moves the second lifting mechanism 162 upward (in the Z direction) to increase the discharge angle ⁇ 2 and correct the discharge angle ⁇ 2 to be the target discharge angle. .
  • the host controller 5 feedback-controls the second elevating mechanism 162 based on the detection result of the discharge angle detection unit 164 so that the discharge angle ⁇ 2 becomes the target discharge angle. For this reason, since the board
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the device manufacturing method according to the first embodiment.
  • step S201 the function / performance design of a display panel using a self-luminous element such as an organic EL is performed, and necessary circuit patterns and wiring patterns are designed by CAD or the like.
  • step S202 a mask M for a necessary layer is manufactured based on the pattern for each layer designed by CAD or the like (step S202).
  • step S203 a supply roll FR1 around which a flexible substrate P (resin film, metal foil film, plastic, or the like) serving as a display panel base material is wound is prepared (step S203).
  • the roll-shaped substrate P prepared in step S203 has a surface modified as necessary, a pre-formed base layer (for example, micro unevenness by an imprint method), and light sensitivity.
  • These functional films and transparent films (insulating materials) may be laminated in advance.
  • step S204 a backplane layer composed of electrodes, wiring, insulating film, TFT (thin film semiconductor), etc. constituting the display panel device is formed on the substrate P, and an organic EL or the like is laminated on the backplane.
  • a light emitting layer (display pixel portion) is formed by the self light emitting element (step S204).
  • This step S204 includes a conventional photolithography process in which the photoresist layer is exposed using the exposure apparatus U3 described in each of the previous embodiments, but a photosensitive silane coupling agent is used instead of the photoresist.
  • An exposure process for pattern-exposing the coated substrate P to form a pattern based on hydrophilicity and water repellency on the surface, and pattern exposure of the photosensitive catalyst layer to form a metal film pattern (wiring, electrode, etc.) by electroless plating A wet process, or a printing process in which a pattern is drawn by a conductive ink containing a conductive material such as silver nanoparticles, an ink containing an insulating material, or an ink containing a semiconductor material (pentacene, semiconductor nanorod, etc.), etc. Processing by is also included.
  • the substrate P is diced for each display panel device continuously manufactured on the long substrate P by a roll method, or a protective film (environmental barrier layer) or a color filter is formed on the surface of each display panel device.
  • a device is assembled by pasting sheets or the like (step S205).
  • an inspection process is performed to determine whether the display panel device functions normally or satisfies desired performance and characteristics (step S206). As described above, a display panel (flexible display) can be manufactured.
  • the exposure unit 121 is installed on the installation surface E via the vibration isolation table 131, and the exposure unit 121, the position adjustment unit 120, and the drive unit 122 are provided in an independent state. Can do. That is, in the first embodiment, the exposure unit 121, the position adjustment unit 120, and the drive unit 122 can be separated by the vibration isolation table 131, that is, can be in different vibration modes. Therefore, the exposure unit 121 can reduce vibration from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 by the vibration isolation table 131.
  • the position of the substrate P in the width direction with respect to the fixed roller 126 can be maintained at the first target position. For this reason, since the board
  • the position of the substrate P with respect to the transport roller 127 can be maintained at the second target position. For this reason, in the first embodiment, the position of the substrate P supplied to the exposure unit 121 can be made constant. Thereby, since the position of the board
  • the vibration of the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121 can be further reduced by pressing the substrate P by the pressing mechanism 130.
  • the apparatus frame 132 is divided into a first frame 132a and a second frame 132b, the mask stage 21 is supported on the first frame 132a, and the rotary drum 25 is mounted on the second frame 132b. Can be supported.
  • the 1st frame 132a and the 2nd frame 132b can be provided in an independent state, respectively. That is, the first frame 132a and the second frame 132b can be cut off, that is, different vibration modes can be set. For this reason, the transmission of the mutual vibration of the 1st frame 132a and the 2nd frame 132b can be reduced.
  • the entrance angle ⁇ 1 of the substrate P supplied from the supply roll FR1 to the transport roller 127 of the position adjustment unit 120 of the exposure apparatus U3 with respect to the transport roller 127 can be made constant. For this reason, the influence on the board
  • the discharge angle ⁇ 2 of the substrate P supplied from the transport roller 167 of the position adjustment unit 160 of the substrate recovery apparatus 4 to the recovery roll FR2 with respect to the transport roller 167 can be made constant. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the influence on the substrate P due to the displacement of the discharge angle ⁇ 2 (such as uneven winding of the substrate P on the collection roll FR2).
  • FIG. 9 is a view showing a part of the configuration of an exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) U3 according to the second embodiment.
  • the apparatus frame 132 is separated into the first frame 132a and the second frame 132b, but the exposure unit of the exposure apparatus U3 of the second embodiment.
  • 121a is a single device frame 180.
  • the apparatus frame 180 is provided on the vibration isolation table 131, and holds the transmissive cylindrical mask MA, the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate support mechanism 12, the illumination mechanism 13, and the projection. Supports the optical system PL.
  • the apparatus frame 180 includes a lower surface portion 181 provided on the vibration isolation table 131, a pair of bearing portions 182 standing on the lower surface portion 181, an intermediate portion 183 supported on the pair of bearing portions 182, A leg portion 184 standing on the portion 183, an upper surface portion 185 supported by the leg portion 184, and an arm portion 186 standing on the upper surface portion 185.
  • Each of the pair of bearing portions 182 is provided with an air bearing 141 that pivotally supports the rotation axis AX2 of the rotary drum 25 of the substrate support mechanism 12.
  • Each air bearing 141 rotatably supports the rotary shaft AX2 in a non-contact state.
  • the projection optical system PL is installed via the holding member 143.
  • Washers 145 are interposed at three locations between the holding member 143 and the intermediate portion 183.
  • the holding member 143 is kinematically supported on the intermediate portion 183 by three washer members 145.
  • the upper surface portion 185 is provided with a driving roller (capstan roller) 94 for supporting the mask holding mechanism 11 (hollow cylindrical body) and for rotationally driving the cylindrical mask MA around the rotation center line AX1.
  • the illumination mechanism 13 is arranged inside the mask holding mechanism 11 and illuminates the illumination area IR (IR1 to IR6) on the cylindrical mask MA from the inside in an arrangement as shown in the left diagram of FIG.
  • the upper surface portion 185 is provided with a bearing 187 for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft of the drive roller 94, and the mask side drive portion 22 for rotationally driving the drive roller 94 is shown in FIG.
  • the configuration is the same as that of the substrate side drive unit 26.
  • encoder measuring scales (diffraction gratings) or scale plates 25c similar to those in FIG. 4 are provided at both ends of the cylindrical mask holding mechanism 11 in the direction of the rotation center line AX1. The position in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical mask MA is precisely measured by the read head EH arranged so as to oppose it.
  • the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate support mechanism 12, the illumination mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL can be supported by a single device frame 180. For this reason, since the positional relationship among the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate support mechanism 12, the illumination mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL can be fixed in the second embodiment, the positional relationship can be easily adjusted without significant adjustment. It becomes possible to install in.
  • the mask holding mechanism 11 has a mask holding drum 21a for holding the transmission type mask MA in a cylindrical shape, a guide roller 93 for supporting the mask holding drum 21a, and the mask holding drum 21a as a center line.
  • a driving roller 94 that drives around AX1 and a mask side driving unit 22 are provided.
  • the mask holding drum 21a forms a mask surface P1 on which the illumination area IR on the mask MA is arranged.
  • the mask surface P1 includes a surface (hereinafter referred to as a cylindrical surface) obtained by rotating a line segment (bus line) around an axis (cylindrical center axis) parallel to the line segment.
  • the cylindrical surface is, for example, an outer peripheral surface of a cylinder, an outer peripheral surface of a column, or the like.
  • the mask holding drum 21a is made of, for example, glass or quartz and has a cylindrical shape having a certain thickness, and the outer peripheral surface (cylindrical surface) forms the mask surface P1.
  • the illumination region IR on the mask MA is curved in a cylindrical surface shape having a constant radius Rm from the first axis AX1.
  • a portion that overlaps the mask pattern of the mask MA when viewed from the radial direction of the mask holding drum 21a, for example, a central portion other than both ends in the Y direction of the mask holding drum 21a is transparent to the illumination light beam EL1. Has light properties.
  • the mask MA is created as a transmission type planar sheet mask in which a pattern is formed with a light-shielding layer such as chromium on one surface of a strip-like ultrathin glass plate (for example, a thickness of 100 to 500 ⁇ m) with good flatness, It is used in a state in which it is curved along the outer peripheral surface of the mask holding drum 21a and wound (attached) around this outer peripheral surface.
  • the mask MA has a pattern non-formation region A4 where no pattern is formed, and is attached to the mask holding drum 21a in the pattern non-formation region A4. The mask MA can be released to the mask holding drum 21a.
  • the mask MA may be integrated by drawing a mask pattern made of a light shielding layer such as chromium directly on the outer peripheral surface of the mask holding drum 21a made of a transparent cylindrical base material.
  • the mask holding drum 21a functions as a support member for the mask MA.
  • the guide roller 93 and the driving roller 94 extend in the Y direction parallel to the central axis of the mask holding drum 21a.
  • the guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 are provided to be rotatable around an axis parallel to the central axis.
  • Each of the guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 has an outer diameter at the end portion in the axial direction larger than the outer shape of the other portion, and this end portion circumscribes the mask holding drum 21a.
  • the guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 are provided so as not to contact the mask MA held on the mask holding drum 21a.
  • the drive roller 94 is connected to the mask side drive unit 22.
  • the driving roller 94 rotates the mask holding drum 21a around the central axis AX1 by transmitting the power from the mask side driving unit 22 to the mask holding drum 21a.
  • the mask holding mechanism 11 includes one guide roller 93, but the number is not limited and may be two or more.
  • the mask holding mechanism 11 includes one drive roller 94, but the number is not limited and may be two or more.
  • At least one of the guide roller 93 and the driving roller 94 is disposed inside the mask holding drum 21a and may be inscribed in the mask holding drum 21a.
  • portions of the mask holding drum 21a that do not overlap with the mask pattern of the mask MA as viewed from the radial direction of the mask holding drum 21a (both ends in the Y direction) are translucent to the illumination light beam EL1. It does not have to be translucent.
  • one or both of the guide roller 93 and the driving roller 94 may have a truncated cone shape, for example, and the central axis (rotating axis) thereof may be non-parallel to the central axis AX1.
  • the illumination mechanism 13 is configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the plurality of illumination modules ILa1 to ILa6 of the illumination mechanism 13 are arranged inside the mask holding drum 21a.
  • Each of the plurality of illumination modules ILa1 to ILa6 guides the illumination light beam EL1 emitted from the light source, and irradiates the mask MA with the guided illumination light beam EL1 from the inside of the mask holding drum 21a.
  • the illumination mechanism 13 illuminates the illumination area IR of the mask MA held by the mask holding mechanism 11 with uniform brightness using the illumination light beam EL1.
  • the light source may be arranged inside the mask holding drum 21a or may be arranged outside the mask holding drum 21a.
  • the light source may be a device (external device) different from the exposure device U3.
  • the exposure unit 121a can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 by the vibration isolation table 131, and can obtain the same effect as the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 shows the overall configuration of the exposure unit 121b according to the third embodiment, which uses a cylindrical reflective mask MB and supports the substrate P in a planar shape.
  • the mask MB is a reflective mask using, for example, a metal cylinder.
  • the mask MB is formed in a cylindrical body having an outer peripheral surface (circumferential surface) having a curvature radius Rm with the first axis AX1 extending in the Y direction as the center, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.
  • the circumferential surface of the mask MB is a mask surface P1 on which a predetermined mask pattern is formed.
  • the mask surface P1 includes a high reflection part that reflects the light beam in a predetermined direction with high efficiency and a reflection suppression part that does not reflect the light beam in the predetermined direction or reflects with low efficiency, and the mask pattern includes the high reflection part and the reflection suppression. It is formed by the part. Since such a mask MB is a metal cylinder, it can be produced at low cost.
  • the mask MB only needs to have a circumferential surface having a radius of curvature Rm with the first axis AX1 as the center, and is not limited to a cylindrical shape.
  • the mask MB may be an arc-shaped plate material having a circumferential surface.
  • the mask MB may be a thin plate shape, or the thin plate mask MB may be curved so as to have a circumferential surface.
  • the mask holding mechanism 11 has a mask holding drum 21b that holds the mask MB.
  • the mask holding drum 21b holds the mask MB so that the first axis AX1 of the mask M is the center of rotation.
  • the mask side drive unit 22 is connected to the low order control device 16 and rotates the mask holding drum 21b around the first axis AX1.
  • the mask holding mechanism 11 holds the cylindrical mask M with the mask holding drum 21b
  • the present invention is not limited to this configuration.
  • the mask holding mechanism 11 may wind and hold the thin plate-like mask MB along the outer peripheral surface of the mask holding drum 21b.
  • the mask holding mechanism 11 may hold the mask MB, which is an arc-shaped plate material, on the outer peripheral surface of the mask holding drum 21b.
  • the substrate support mechanism 12 includes a pair of drive rollers 196 over which the substrate P is stretched, an air stage 197 that supports the substrate P in a planar shape, and a plurality of guide rollers 28.
  • the pair of driving rollers 196 is rotated by the substrate side driving unit 26 to move the substrate P in the scanning direction.
  • the air stage 197 is provided between the pair of driving rollers 196 and is provided on the back side of the substrate P that is stretched between the pair of driving rollers 196 with a certain tension, and is in a non-contact state or a low friction state.
  • the substrate P is supported in a flat shape.
  • the plurality of guide rollers 28 are respectively provided on the upstream side and the downstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P with the pair of drive rollers 196 interposed therebetween.
  • four guide rollers 28 are provided, two on the upstream side in the transport direction and two on the downstream side in the transport direction.
  • the substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P transported from the position adjustment unit 120 to one drive roller 196 by the two guide rollers 28.
  • the substrate P guided by one drive roller 196 is passed over the pair of drive rollers 196 with a constant tension by being guided by the other drive roller 196.
  • the substrate support mechanism 12 rotates the pair of drive rollers 196 by the substrate-side drive unit 26, so that the substrate P stretched over the pair of drive rollers 196 is directed toward the guide roller 28 while being supported by the air stage 197. Transport.
  • the substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P conveyed to the guide roller 28 toward the substrate recovery device 4.
  • the illumination mechanism 13 illuminates the illumination light beam EL1 from the outer peripheral side of the mask holding drum 21b. That is, in the illumination mechanism 13, the light source device and the illumination optical system IL are provided on the outer periphery of the mask holding drum 21b.
  • the illumination optical system IL is an epi-illumination system using a polarization beam splitter PBS. Between each of the illumination modules IL1 to IL6 of the illumination optical system IL and the mask MB, a polarization beam splitter PBS and a quarter wavelength plate 198 are provided. That is, the illumination modules IL1 to IL6, the polarization beam splitter PBS, and the quarter wavelength plate 198 are provided in order from the incident side of the illumination light beam EL1 from the light source device.
  • the illumination light beam EL1 emitted from the light source device enters the polarization beam splitter PBS through the illumination modules IL1 to IL6.
  • the illumination light beam EL1 incident on the polarization beam splitter PBS is reflected by the polarization beam splitter PBS, passes through the quarter-wave plate 198, and is illuminated on the illumination region IR.
  • the projection light beam EL2 reflected from the illumination region IR passes through the quarter-wave plate 198 again, and is converted into a light beam that passes through the polarization beam splitter PBS.
  • the projection light beam EL2 that has passed through the quarter-wave plate 198 passes through the polarization beam splitter PBS and enters the projection optical system PL.
  • the position adjustment with the exposure unit 121b is performed.
  • the unit 120 and the drive unit 122 can be provided in an independent state (a state in which vibration transmission is insulated). For this reason, the exposure unit 121b can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 by the vibration isolation table 131, and can obtain the same effect as that of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 is a view showing a configuration of an exposure apparatus U3 according to the fourth embodiment
  • FIG. 13 is a view when the substrate P transported in the exposure apparatus U3 shown in FIG. 12 is viewed from above (+ Z direction).
  • FIG. 14 is a view when the substrate P transported between the last roller 126 on the position adjustment unit 120a side and the first roller AR1 on the exposure unit 121c side shown in FIG. 13 is viewed from the ⁇ Y direction side.
  • 15 is a view of the substrate P transported by the rotary drum 25 shown in FIG. 12 when viewed from the ⁇ X direction side.
  • the exposure apparatus (processing apparatus) U3 includes a position adjustment unit 120a and an exposure unit 121c provided on the downstream side (+ X direction side) in the transport direction of the substrate P with respect to the position adjustment unit 120a.
  • the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c are provided separately. That is, the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c are in an independent state where they are not in contact with each other, or the transport path of the substrate P between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c or the transport path of the substrate P after the exposure unit 121c.
  • the exposure unit 121c is provided on an installation surface (base surface) E via a passive or active vibration isolation table (vibration isolation device, vibration isolation device) 131.
  • the position adjustment unit 120 a is provided on the installation surface E via the base 200. Thereby, vibrations from other processing apparatuses U1, U2, U4 to Un, etc. and vibrations from the position adjustment unit 120a are not transmitted to the exposure unit 121c via the installation surface E.
  • the base 200 may be a vibration isolation table (vibration isolation device, vibration isolation device) having a vibration isolation / anti-vibration function.
  • the position adjustment unit (position adjustment device) 120a includes an edge position controller EPC3a, a fixed roller (guide roller) 126, a first substrate detection unit 202, and a lower control device (control unit) 204.
  • the edge position controller EPC3a, the fixed roller 126, and the first substrate detection unit 202 are provided in the order described above from the upstream side ( ⁇ X direction side) in the transport direction of the substrate P.
  • the edge position controller EPC3a is arranged in the width direction of the substrate P so that the position in the width direction of the substrate P transported with a predetermined tension (for example, a constant value in the range of 20 to 200N) in the longitudinal direction becomes the target position. Adjust (correct) the position at.
  • the edge position controller EPC3a is movable in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P in the position adjustment unit 120a.
  • the edge position controller EPC3a moves in the Y direction when the actuator 206 (see FIG. 13) is driven, and adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction.
  • the edge position controller EPC3a has guide rollers Rs1, Rs2 and a driving roller NR for transporting the substrate P toward the fixed roller 126.
  • the guide rollers Rs1 and Rs2 guide the substrate P to be transported, and the drive roller NR transports the substrate P by rotating while sandwiching both front and back surfaces of the substrate P.
  • Reference numeral 207b denotes a support member (a main body frame of the position adjustment unit 120a) that supports the first substrate detection unit 202 and rotatably supports the fixed roller 126, and an edge position on the main body frame 207b.
  • a frame 207a of the controller EPC3a is mounted so as to be movable in the Y direction.
  • the fixed roller 126 guides the substrate P, whose position has been adjusted in the width direction by the edge position controller EPC3a, toward the exposure unit 121c.
  • the first substrate detection unit (substrate error measurement unit, change measurement unit) 202 detects the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed from the fixed roller 126 toward the exposure unit 121c.
  • the first substrate detection unit 202 includes a detection unit 202a that detects the Y-direction position of the ⁇ Y side edge portion Ea in the width direction of the substrate P, and a + Y side edge portion.
  • a detection unit 202b that detects the position of Eb in the Y direction, and measures a change in the position of the substrate P in the width direction based on detection signals from both detection units 202a and 202b.
  • the first substrate detection unit 202 (202a, 202b) is not limited to detecting the position of the substrate P in the width direction, but is related to a change in the posture of the substrate P (a slight inclination), a deformation of the substrate P (extension in the width direction), and the like.
  • a sensor configuration that detects (measures) information may be used.
  • the position in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202 and the change information of the substrate P are sent to the lower control device 204.
  • the first substrate detection unit 202 may detect the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed toward the fixed roller 126 from the edge position controller EPC3a.
  • the first substrate detector 202 changes the posture of the substrate P, in particular, a slight inclination around the X axis (in the YZ plane) of the substrate P in the transport path parallel to the horizontal plane (XY plane) from the fixed roller 126 to the exposure unit 121c. 14, as shown in FIG. 14, each of the detection units 202 a and 202 b includes a Z position (a height position in the normal direction of the surface of the substrate P) Ze1 of each of the edge portions Ea and Eb of the substrate P.
  • a Z sensor capable of measuring changes in Ze2 is incorporated.
  • the exposure unit 121c side (roller AR1) is slightly inclined with respect to the XY plane with respect to the fixed roller 126.
  • the difference value between the Z position Ze1 detected by the detection unit 202a and the Z position Ze2 detected by the detection unit 202b changes according to the amount of inclination.
  • the relative position change ⁇ Zs in the Z direction between the fixed roller 126 (position adjustment unit 120a) and the exposure unit 121c (roller AR1) is canceled out, and the detection units 202a and 202b are arranged.
  • the slight inclination (around the X axis) of the substrate P at the position obtained can be accurately obtained.
  • the slight inclination change of the substrate P measured by the Z sensors incorporated in the detection units 202a and 202b is the relative inclination around the Z axis between the fixed roller 126, that is, the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c. Responds to change.
  • the Z sensor an optical or capacitive non-contact type gap sensor can be used.
  • the detection units 202a and 202b are preferably arranged at positions close to the first roller (AR1) on the exposure unit 121c side in the longitudinal direction (transport direction) of the substrate P.
  • the position adjustment unit 120a (edge position controller EPC3a) functions to correct such displacement of the substrate P in the Y direction, but includes a substrate adjustment unit 214 (in detail, including a roller AR1 provided on the exposure unit 121c side). It can also be corrected by (described later). Therefore, by controlling one or both of the position adjustment unit 120a and the substrate adjustment unit 214 based on the change information regarding the slight inclination (around the X axis) of the substrate P detected by the detection units 202a and 202b, The position of the substrate P supported by the rotary drum 25 in the Y direction can be maintained with high accuracy. Further, regarding the position adjustment in the width direction of the substrate P until it reaches the rotary drum 25, the position adjustment unit 120a can be used as a rough adjustment, and the substrate adjustment unit 214 can be used as a fine adjustment.
  • the lower-level control device 204 controls the position of the substrate P in the width direction by controlling the edge position controller EPC3a of the position adjustment unit 120a, the substrate adjustment unit 214, or the like.
  • the lower level control device 204 may be a part or all of the higher level control device 5, or may be a computer different from the higher level control device 5 controlled by the higher level control device 5.
  • the exposure unit (patterning device) 121c includes a substrate support mechanism 12a, a second substrate detection unit 208, an illumination mechanism 13a, an exposure head (pattern formation unit) 210, and a lower level control device (control unit) 212.
  • the exposure unit 121c is stored in the temperature control chamber ECV.
  • This temperature control chamber ECV keeps the inside at a predetermined temperature, thereby suppressing the shape change due to the temperature of the substrate P transported inside.
  • the temperature control chamber ECV is disposed on the installation surface E via a passive or active vibration isolation table 131.
  • the substrate support mechanism (transport unit) 12a transports the substrate P sent from the position adjustment unit 120a to the downstream side (+ X direction) while supporting the substrate P.
  • the upstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P ( ⁇ X)
  • the substrate adjustment unit 214, the guide roller Rs3, the tension roller RT1, the rotating drum 25, the tension roller RT2, and the driving rollers R5 and R6 are provided in this order from the direction side.
  • the substrate adjustment unit 214 has a plurality of rollers (AR1, RT3, AR2), and adjusts the position in the width direction of the substrate P, thereby correcting the torsion and wrinkle generated on the substrate P, while adjusting the substrate P. Transport in the transport direction (+ X direction). The configuration of the substrate adjustment unit 214 will be described later.
  • the guide roller Rs3 conveys the substrate P, whose position in the width direction of the substrate P has been adjusted by the substrate adjusting unit 214, to the rotary drum 25.
  • the rotating drum 25 conveys the substrate P toward the driving rollers R5 and R6 while holding a portion where a predetermined pattern is exposed on the substrate P while rotating on the circumferential surface.
  • the functions of the driving rollers R5 and R6 are as described in the first embodiment.
  • the tension rollers RT1 and RT2 apply a predetermined tension to the substrate P that is wound around and supported by the rotary drum 25.
  • Reference numeral 215 in FIG. 13 denotes a support member that rotatably supports the plurality of rollers of the substrate adjustment unit 214, the guide roller Rs3, the tension roller RT1, the rotating drum 25, the tension roller RT2, and the driving rollers R5 and R6. (Main body frame of the exposure unit 121c).
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the substrate adjustment unit 214.
  • the substrate adjustment unit 214 includes adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 and a tension roller RT3.
  • the adjustment roller AR1, the tension roller RT3, and the adjustment roller AR2 are provided in the order described above from the upstream side ( ⁇ X direction side) in the transport direction of the substrate P.
  • the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 are arranged so as to bend the transport path of the substrate P in a state where a predetermined tension is applied. Specifically, by providing the tension roller RT3 below the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 ( ⁇ Z direction side), the conveyance path is bent in a state where a predetermined tension is applied by the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2.
  • the substrate P transported in the + X direction from the position adjustment unit 120a is bent downward ( ⁇ Z direction) by the adjustment roller AR1 in a state where a predetermined tension is applied, and is guided to the tension roller RT3.
  • the substrate P transported upward (in the + Z direction) is bent in the + X direction by the adjustment roller AR2 and guided to the guide roller Rs3 in a state where a predetermined tension is applied.
  • the tension roller RT3 is pivotally supported at both ends in the Y direction so that it can be translated in the Z direction. While the substrate P is being transported, a predetermined biasing force is generated in the ⁇ Z direction to tension the substrate P. give.
  • the adjustment roller AR1 is rotatable with respect to the rotation axis AX3a by the bearing 214a, and the adjustment roller AR2 is also rotatable with respect to the rotation axis AX3b by the bearing 214b.
  • the rotation axes AX3a and AX3b are provided in parallel along the Y direction.
  • the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 can be tilted with respect to an axis parallel to the Y direction. That is, one end side ( ⁇ Y direction side) of the rotation shaft AX3a of the adjustment roller AR1 can be slightly moved in the Z direction and the X direction with the other end side (+ Y direction side) as a fulcrum.
  • the adjustment roller AR2 can move in the X direction and the Z direction on one end side ( ⁇ Y direction side) of the rotation axis AX3b with the other end side (+ Y direction side) as a fulcrum.
  • the minute movement on one end side ( ⁇ Y direction side) of the rotation shafts AX3a and AX3b is driven by an actuator such as a piezo element (not shown).
  • an actuator such as a piezo element (not shown).
  • the two adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 are slightly tilted in the XY plane or the YZ plane, but the tension roller RT1 may be tilted without tilting the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2. . Further, the adjusting roller AR2 and the tension roller RT1 may be tilted without tilting the adjusting roller AR1.
  • the second substrate detection unit (substrate error measurement unit, change measurement unit) 208 detects the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed in the + Z direction from the tension roller RT1 toward the rotary drum 25. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, the second substrate detection unit 208 is provided on each of both ends in the width direction of the substrate P, and detects edges at both ends in the width direction of the substrate P.
  • FIG. 17A is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the second substrate detection unit 208
  • FIG. 17B is a diagram illustrating the beam light Bm irradiated onto the substrate P by the second substrate detection unit 208
  • FIG. 17C is a diagram illustrating the second substrate detection unit 208.
  • the second substrate detection unit 208 includes an irradiation system 216 that irradiates the beam light Bm, and a light receiving system 218 that receives the beam light Bm.
  • the irradiation system 216 includes a light projecting unit 220, a cylindrical lens 222, and a reflection mirror 224, and the light receiving system 218 includes a reflection mirror 226, an imaging optical system 228, and an image sensor 230.
  • the light projecting unit 220 includes a light source that emits the light beam Bm, and irradiates the emitted light beam Bm toward the substrate P.
  • the beam light Bm irradiated by the light projecting unit 220 is irradiated onto the substrate P via the cylindrical lens 222 and the reflection mirror 224.
  • the cylindrical lens 222 converges the incident light beam Bm with respect to the Z direction so as to be a slit-shaped light beam Bm parallel to the Y direction of the substrate P on the substrate P.
  • the length of the beam light Bm irradiated toward the substrate P is Lbm. At least a part of the beam light Bm irradiated toward the substrate P is reflected by the substrate P, and the remaining beam light Bm that does not hit the substrate P goes straight without being reflected by the substrate P.
  • the slit-shaped light beam Bm reflected from the substrate P enters the imaging optical system 228 via the reflection mirror 226.
  • the imaging optical system 228 images the beam light Bm reflected from the reflection mirror 226 on the image sensor 230, and the image sensor 230 images the incident beam light Bm.
  • the length of the beam light Bm imaged by the image sensor 230 becomes the length Lbm1 of the beam light Bm reflected from the substrate P. Therefore, the length of the Lbm1 is measured to measure the length of the substrate.
  • the position of the edge of P can be detected.
  • the second substrate detection unit 208 can detect the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed in the + Z direction from the tension roller RT1 toward the rotary drum 25 with high accuracy. Further, the second substrate detection unit 208 detects (measures) change information related to a change in the position of the substrate P in the width direction, deformation of the substrate P (extension in the width direction), and the like by detecting the position of the substrate P. Can do.
  • the position in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 208 and the change information of the substrate P are sent to the lower control device 204.
  • Reference numeral 230 a indicates an imaging region of the imaging element 230.
  • the configuration of the first substrate detection unit 202 may be the same as that of the second substrate detection unit 208.
  • a plurality of alignment microscopes (substrate error measurement unit, change measurement unit) AM1 and AM2 of the exposure unit 121c are provided along the width direction of the substrate P, and are formed on the substrate P as shown in FIG.
  • the mark Ks is detected.
  • the alignment marks Ks are formed at regular intervals along the longitudinal direction of the substrate P on both ends of the substrate P, and the exposure areas A7 aligned in the longitudinal direction on the substrate P.
  • five exposure regions A7 are provided at regular intervals along the width direction of the substrate P.
  • five alignment microscopes AM1 (see FIG. 19) and AM2 are provided at regular intervals along the width direction of the substrate P so that the alignment marks Ks formed on the substrate P can be detected.
  • the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 detect the alignment mark Ks, the position in the width direction of the substrate P being conveyed while being supported by the rotary drum 25 can be detected with high accuracy.
  • the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 can detect (measure) change information regarding the position change in the width direction of the substrate P, the posture change, the deformation of the substrate P, and the like by detecting the position of the alignment mark Ks.
  • the positional information of the alignment mark Ks detected by the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 in each of the longitudinal direction (conveying direction) and the width direction is sent to the lower-level control device 212.
  • the lower-level control device 212 generates correction information for correcting the pattern formation position based on the acquired position information of the alignment mark Ks, sends it to the exposure head (pattern formation unit) 210, and also in the width direction of the substrate P.
  • the change information of the position and the substrate P is calculated and sent to the lower control device 204.
  • Reference numeral 232 in FIG. 15 indicates a detection region (detection field of view) of each alignment microscope AM1, and the positions of the five detection regions 232 in the transport direction (Z direction in FIG.
  • the position is set so as to stably come into close contact with the outer peripheral surface of the drum 25.
  • the size of the detection region 232 on the substrate P is set according to the size of the alignment mark Ks and the alignment accuracy (position measurement accuracy), but is about 100 to 500 ⁇ m square.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the relative position detection unit 234.
  • the relative position detector 234 is provided between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c, on the end side in the ⁇ Y direction and on the end side in the + Y direction, respectively.
  • the relative position detector 234 detects the relative position change between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c in the YZ plane, and the relative position between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c in the XZ plane. And a second detector 238 for detecting a change in position. Thereby, the relative position detector 234 can detect the relative position and change information between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c in three dimensions (XYZ space).
  • the first detection unit 236 includes a light projecting unit 240a that emits laser light in the + X direction and a light receiving unit 242a that receives the laser light emitted by the light projecting unit 240a.
  • the second detection unit 238 includes a light projecting unit 240b that emits laser light in the + Y direction and a light receiving unit 242b that receives the laser light emitted by the light projecting unit 240b.
  • the light projecting unit 240a of the first detection unit 236 and the light projecting unit 240b of the second detection unit 238 are provided on the surface side (+ X direction side) facing the exposure unit 121c of the position adjustment unit 120a. Further, the light receiving unit 242b of the first detection unit 236 and the light receiving unit 242b of the second detection unit 238 are provided on the surface side ( ⁇ X direction side) facing the position adjustment unit 120a of the exposure unit 121c.
  • the light receiving units 242a and 242b are configured by four-divided sensors. That is, the light receiving units 242a and 242b have four photodiodes (photoelectric conversion elements) 244, and the difference in the amount of light received by each of the four photodiodes 244 (signal level difference) is used. Changes in position in a plane perpendicular to the beam center are detected. Since the laser light incident on the light receiving unit 242a is light traveling in the + X direction, the light receiving unit 242a detects the position and position change of the center of the laser light in the YZ plane perpendicular to the X direction.
  • the light receiving unit 242b detects the position and position change of the center of the laser light in the XZ plane perpendicular to the Y direction.
  • the relative position between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c and the change information regarding the position change can be detected (measured) in three dimensions.
  • the relative rotation error about the X axis between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c is determined by the difference or average of the detection information of the pair of first detection units 236 separated in the Y direction.
  • relative position errors in the Y direction can be measured in real time.
  • the relative rotation error (relative tilt in the XY plane) about the Z axis between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c is caused by the difference between the detection information of the pair of second detection units 238 separated in the Y direction. It can be measured in real time.
  • the illumination mechanism 13a has a laser light source and emits a laser beam (exposure beam) LB used for exposure.
  • This laser beam LB may be ultraviolet light having a peak wavelength in a wavelength band of 370 nm or less.
  • the laser beam LB may be pulsed light emitted at the oscillation frequency Fs.
  • the laser beam LB emitted from the illumination mechanism 13a enters the exposure head 210.
  • the exposure head 210 includes a plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5) on which the laser beams LB from the illumination mechanism 13a are respectively incident. That is, the laser beam LB from the illumination mechanism 13a is guided to the light introducing optical system 250 having a reflection mirror, a beam splitter, etc., and enters the plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5).
  • the exposure head 210 draws a pattern on a part of the substrate P conveyed by the substrate support mechanism 12a and supported by the circumferential surface of the rotary drum 25 by a plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5).
  • the exposure head 210 is a so-called multi-beam type exposure head 210 by having a plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5) having the same configuration.
  • the drawing units DU1, DU3, and DU5 are arranged on the upstream side ( ⁇ X direction side) in the transport direction of the substrate P with respect to the rotation axis AX2 of the rotating drum 25.
  • the drawing units DU2 and DU4 are the rotating shafts of the rotating drum 25. It is arranged on the downstream side (+ X direction side) in the transport direction of the substrate P with respect to AX2.
  • Each drawing unit DU converges the incident laser beam LB on the substrate P to be spot light, and scans the spot light at high speed along a scanning line by a rotating polygon mirror or the like.
  • the scanning lines L of the drawing units DU are set so as to be connected without being separated from each other in the Y direction (width direction of the substrate P).
  • the scanning line L of the drawing unit DU1 is represented by L1
  • the scanning line L of the drawing unit DU2 is represented by L2.
  • the scanning lines L of the drawing units DU3, DU4, and DU5 are represented by L3, L4, and L5.
  • each drawing unit DU shares the scanning area so that the drawing units DU1 to DU5 all cover the entire width of the exposure area A7.
  • the drawing width in the Y direction (the length of the scanning line L) by one drawing unit DU is about 20 to 50 mm
  • three odd-numbered drawing units DU1, DU3, and DU5 and even-numbered drawing By arranging a total of five drawing units DU, two units DU2 and DU4, in the Y direction, the width in the Y direction that can be drawn is increased to about 100 to 250 mm.
  • the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 are provided on the upstream side ( ⁇ X direction side) in the transport direction of the substrate P from the scanning lines L1, L3, and L5, and are closely supported by the circumferential surface of the rotary drum 25.
  • the alignment mark Ks formed on the substrate being conveyed is detected.
  • This drawing unit DU is a known technique as disclosed in International Publication No. 2013/146184 pamphlet (see FIG. 36), but the drawing unit DU will be briefly described with reference to FIG. Since each drawing unit DU (DU1 to DU5) has the same configuration, only the drawing unit DU2 will be described, and description of the other drawing units DU will be omitted.
  • the drawing unit DU2 includes, for example, a condenser lens 252, a drawing optical element (light modulator) 254, an absorber 256, a collimator lens 258, a reflection mirror 260, a cylindrical lens 262, a focus lens 264, A reflection mirror 266, a polygon mirror (light scanning member) 268, a reflection mirror 270, an f- ⁇ lens 272, and a cylindrical lens 274 are included.
  • the laser beam LB incident on the drawing unit DU2 travels from the upper side to the lower side ( ⁇ Z direction) in the vertical direction, and enters the drawing optical element 254 via the condenser lens 252.
  • the condensing lens 252 condenses (converges) the laser beam LB incident on the drawing optical element 254 so as to be a beam waist in the drawing optical element 254.
  • the drawing optical element 254 is transparent to the laser beam LB, and for example, an acousto-optic element (AOM: Acousto-Optic Modulator) is used.
  • the drawing optical element 254 transmits the incident laser beam LB to the absorber 256 side when the drive signal (high frequency signal) from the low order control device 212 is off, and the drive signal (from the low order control device 212 ( When the high-frequency signal is on, the incident laser beam LB is diffracted and directed to the reflection mirror 260.
  • the absorber 256 is an optical trap that absorbs the laser light LB in order to suppress leakage of the laser light LB to the outside. In this manner, the laser beam LB is applied to the reflection mirror 260 by turning on / off the drawing drive signal (ultrasonic frequency) to be applied to the drawing optical element 254 at high speed according to the pattern data (black and white). Switching to or from the absorber 256 is switched. This means that when viewed on the substrate P, the intensity of the laser light LB (spot light SP) reaching the photosensitive surface is rapidly modulated to either a high level or a low level (for example, zero level) according to the pattern data.
  • the collimator lens 258 converts the laser beam LB from the drawing optical element 254 toward the reflection mirror 260 into parallel light.
  • the reflection mirror 260 reflects the incident laser beam LB in the ⁇ X direction and irradiates the reflection mirror 266 via the cylindrical lens 262 and the focus lens 264.
  • the reflection mirror 266 irradiates the polygon mirror 268 with the incident laser beam LB.
  • the polygon mirror (rotating polygonal mirror) 268 rotates to continuously change the reflection angle of the laser beam LB, thereby changing the position of the laser beam LB irradiated on the substrate P in the scanning direction (width direction of the substrate P). Scan to.
  • the polygon mirror 268 rotates at a constant speed (for example, 10,000 rotations / minute) by a rotation drive source (for example, a motor, a speed reduction mechanism, etc.) not shown.
  • a cylindrical lens 262 provided between the reflection mirror 260 and the reflection mirror 266 cooperates with the focus lens 264 to transmit the laser beam LB in the non-scanning direction (Z direction) orthogonal to the scanning direction of the polygon mirror 268. Condensed (converged) on the reflective surface.
  • the cylindrical lens 262 can suppress the influence even when the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the Z direction (inclination from the equilibrium state between the normal line of the XY surface and the reflection surface).
  • the irradiation position of the laser beam LB irradiated on the substrate P is prevented from shifting in the X direction.
  • the laser beam LB reflected by the polygon mirror 268 is reflected in the ⁇ Z direction by the reflection mirror 270 and enters the f- ⁇ lens 272 having an optical axis AXu parallel to the Z axis.
  • the f- ⁇ lens 272 is a telecentric system in which the principal ray of the laser beam LB projected onto the substrate P is always normal to the surface of the substrate P during scanning. Therefore, it is possible to scan at a uniform speed.
  • the laser beam LB emitted from the f- ⁇ lens 272 becomes a substantially circular minute spot beam SP having a diameter of about several ⁇ m on the substrate P through a cylindrical lens 274 whose bus is parallel to the Y direction. Is irradiated.
  • the spot light (scanning spot light) SP is one-dimensionally scanned in one direction along the scanning line L2 extending in the Y direction by the polygon mirror 268.
  • the subordinate control device 212 controls the illumination mechanism 13a, the exposure head 210, and the like to apply a pattern to the substrate P. That is, the lower order control device 212 controls the illumination mechanism 13a to irradiate the laser beam LB, and based on the position of the alignment mark Ks detected by the alignment microscope AM1, the drawing unit DU of each exposure head 210 has a drawing purpose. By controlling the optical element 254, a pattern is drawn and exposed at a predetermined position on the substrate P, that is, in the exposure region A7.
  • the lower level control device 212 may be a part or all of the higher level control device 5, or may be a computer different from the higher level control device 5 controlled by the higher level control device 5.
  • the substrate P is transported to the rotating drum 25 in a state in which the longitudinal direction of the substrate P is orthogonal to the rotation axis AX2 of the rotating drum 25 and the substrate P is not twisted or wrinkled, whereby the substrate P The exposure accuracy of the pattern is improved. Therefore, the rollers (Rs1 to Rs3, NR, 126, AR1, AR2, RT1 to RT3, R5, R6) for carrying the substrate of the exposure apparatus U3 and the rotation shaft of the rotary drum 25 are arranged in parallel with each other along the Y direction. Then, it is desirable to transport the substrate P so that the longitudinal direction of the substrate P is orthogonal to the rotation axes of these rollers and the rotating drum 25.
  • the rotation axes of the rollers (Rs1 to Rs3, NR, 126, AR1, AR2, RT1 to RT3, R5, R6) are slightly offset and the rotation axes of the rollers are not parallel to each other.
  • the relative positions of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c may change due to vibration or the like, and the rotation axis of the roller of the position adjustment unit 120a may not be parallel to the rotation axis of the roller of the exposure unit 121c. .
  • the substrate P is wound in a state where the longitudinal direction of the substrate P is slightly inclined with respect to the rotation axis AX2 of the rotary drum 25. It is supported by the rotary drum 25 in a state of being greatly deformed (in-plane distortion deformation) compared to the line width dimension of the pattern to be drawn.
  • the lower control device 204 is based on the detection results of the first substrate detection unit 202, the second substrate detection unit 208, the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2, and the relative position detection unit 234.
  • the edge position controller EPC3a and the substrate adjustment unit 214 are controlled.
  • the lower-level control device 204 controls the actuator (drive mechanism) 206 of the edge position controller EPC3a based on the position in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202 and the change information of the substrate P.
  • the position of the substrate P in the width direction is adjusted.
  • the lower-level control device 204 calculates the difference between the center position in the Y direction obtained from the edge positions of both ends of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202 and the target position, and the calculated difference is zero.
  • the actuator 206 is feedback controlled so as to be (0), and the substrate P is moved in the Y direction.
  • the position in the width direction of the substrate P transported from the position adjustment unit 120a can be set as the target position, and occurrence of minute twists, wrinkles, etc. on the substrate P can be suppressed.
  • the position in the Y direction of the substrate P wound around the rotary drum 25 can be made constant with high accuracy, and a plurality of alignment marks Ks arranged in the longitudinal direction of the substrate P can be detected by the detection region of each alignment microscope AM1. (Detection field) 232 can continue to be reliably captured.
  • the lower-level control device 204 controls the actuator 206 of the edge position controller EPC3a using change information regarding the relative position and position change between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c detected by the relative position detection unit 234.
  • the position change in the width direction of the substrate P (shift in the width direction of the substrate P accompanying the change in the tilt state) can be corrected at an early stage.
  • the lower-level control device 204 adjusts the inclination angles of the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 of the substrate adjustment unit 214 based on information on the relative position and position change detected by the relative position detection unit 234, so that the substrate P Adjust the position in the width direction.
  • the adjustment of the inclination angles of the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 can be performed by driving an actuator (drive unit) such as the piezo element.
  • the lower-level control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a (actuator 206) and the substrate adjustment unit 214 (actuator such as the piezo element) based on the detected position of the alignment mark Ks.
  • the position of P in the width direction is adjusted.
  • the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed to the rotary drum 25 can be set to the target position with high accuracy and high responsiveness, and the occurrence of minute twists, wrinkles, etc. on the substrate P can be suppressed. it can.
  • the low order control device 204 determines whether the position in the width direction of the substrate P is at the target position based on the position in the width direction of the substrate P immediately before being transported to the rotary drum 25 detected by the second substrate detection unit 208. It is confirmed whether or not the substrate P is twisted (tilted). In detecting the twist (tilt) of the substrate P, the incident angle of the light beam Bm with respect to the substrate P by the detection system described in FIG. 17A is increased, and the substrate P is shifted in the normal direction of the surface (X direction in FIG. 17A). In this case, the fact that the reflected image Bm of the beam Bm is shifted in the Z direction within the imaging region 230a of the imaging device 230 may be used.
  • the second substrate detection unit 208 is also provided corresponding to each of the edge portions Ea and Eb on both sides of the substrate P, the shift amount in the Z direction of the image of the reflected beam Bm within the imaging region 230a is compared. By obtaining the difference value, it is also possible to obtain a minute amount of inclination in the width direction of the substrate P.
  • the lower control device 204 determines the edge position based on the position in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 208 and the change information of the substrate P.
  • the position of the substrate P in the width direction is adjusted by controlling the controller EPC3a (actuator 206) and the substrate adjusting unit 214 (actuator such as the piezo element). Thereby, the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed to the rotary drum 25 can be set as the target position.
  • the second substrate detection unit 208 is disposed at a position immediately before the substrate P is wound around the rotary drum 25, a large change in the width direction of the substrate P suddenly occurs at this position, for example, the alignment microscope AM1.
  • a large misalignment error that causes the alignment mark Ks to deviate from the detection area 232 occurs, it is difficult to accurately position the pattern to be formed in the exposure area A7.
  • An error sequence (retry operation or the like) such as re-detection of the alignment mark Ks by the alignment microscope AM1 is performed while being conveyed in the direction.
  • the exposure unit 121c and the position adjustment unit 120a can be provided in an independent state (a state in which vibration transmission is insulated). For this reason, the exposure unit 121c can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120a by the vibration isolation table 131, and can obtain the same effect as the first embodiment.
  • the low-order control device 204 includes the edge position controller EPC3a and the first substrate detection unit 202, the second substrate detection unit 208, and the edge position controller EPC3a based on the detection results of the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2.
  • the substrate adjustment unit 214 is controlled. Thereby, the exposure accuracy of the pattern on the substrate P by the exposure head 210 can be improved.
  • the low-order control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a and the substrate adjustment unit 214 based on the detection result of the relative position detection unit 234. Thereby, even if the relative position of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c changes, the exposure accuracy of the pattern on the substrate P by the exposure head 210 can be improved.
  • the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c are provided in the exposure apparatus U3.
  • the exposure unit 121c is located immediately after the position adjustment unit 120a as viewed from the transport direction of the substrate P. Any configuration may be used. Therefore, the position adjustment unit 120a may not be provided in the exposure apparatus U3. In this case, the position adjustment unit 120a may be provided on the side of the processing apparatus U (U2) arranged immediately before the exposure apparatus U3 as shown in FIG. Alternatively, when the substrate supply apparatus 2 is provided immediately before the exposure apparatus U3, the function of the position adjustment unit 120a may be provided in the substrate supply apparatus 2.
  • the process immediately before the photopatterning process by the exposure apparatus U3, the exposure units 121, 121c, etc. includes a process of forming (coating) a liquid photosensitive layer on the surface of the substrate P, and a process for forming the photosensitive layer.
  • the process of drying (baking) is a set.
  • a process of transferring the photosensitive layer on the dry film to the surface of the substrate P to be exposed by pressure bonding using a pressure transfer device such as a laminator (photosensitive layer Forming step) and the drying step may be unnecessary.
  • the pre-processing apparatus (first processing unit) that controls the process immediately before the photo-patterning process is a photosensitive layer forming apparatus that forms a photosensitive layer on the surface of the substrate P or a drying (heating) apparatus that dries the substrate P.
  • the function of the position adjustment unit 120a can be provided on the downstream side (substrate unloading portion) of the substrate transport path in the pretreatment apparatus or between the pretreatment apparatus and the optical patterning device.
  • the entire surface of the substrate P or only the portion where the pattern is to be formed is modified in order to improve the adhesion of the ink to the surface of the substrate P.
  • a quality treatment step (such as a step of selectively imparting liquid repellency / lyophilicity) is performed. Since such a surface modification process is also performed by a single or a plurality of pretreatment apparatuses, the downstream side (substrate unloading section) of the substrate conveyance path in the pretreatment apparatus installed immediately before the printing press, or its The function of the position adjustment unit 120a can be provided between the preprocessing device and the printing press.
  • the first substrate detection unit 202 is provided in the position adjustment unit 120a and the second substrate detection unit 208 is provided in the exposure unit 121c.
  • the first substrate detection unit 202 and the second substrate detection unit are provided. Only one of 208 may be provided. Further, both the first substrate detection unit 202 and the second substrate detection unit 208 may not be provided. This is because the position and the like in the width direction of the substrate P can be detected by the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 without the first substrate detection unit 202 and the second substrate detection unit 208.
  • the processing apparatus U3 has been described as an exposure apparatus, but any pattern forming apparatus that applies a pattern to the substrate P may be used.
  • the pattern forming apparatus include an ink jet printer that applies a pattern to the substrate P by applying ink in addition to the exposure apparatus.
  • the exposure head 210 is replaced with a nozzle head portion (pattern forming portion) having a large number of nozzles for drawing a pattern on the substrate P by selectively applying the ink material as droplets.
  • 121a to 121c are replaced with a patterning apparatus having a pattern forming portion.
  • the processing apparatus U3 may be a pattern forming apparatus that applies a pattern to the substrate P.
  • the pattern in a patterning apparatus such as an exposure apparatus or an ink jet printer that forms a fine pattern for an electronic device on a substrate P, the pattern can be precisely positioned and formed on the substrate P. is important. Vibration, which is one of the disturbance factors that lowers the positioning accuracy, is generated by pneumatic or liquid compressors and pumps built in nearby processing equipment, and passes through the factory floor. It is transmitted to a support member such as the rotary drum 25 that supports the exposure head (pattern forming unit) 210 and the substrate P. In order to insulate the vibration transmission path, it is effective to provide an anti-vibration device (such as a vibration isolation table 131) in the patterning device.
  • an anti-vibration device such as a vibration isolation table 131
  • the substrate P is precisely formed even if the floor conditions are not so strict. And can be patterned with high accuracy.
  • the rollers in the patterning device and the processing device (position adjustment) on the upstream side of the patterning device are prevented so that the substrate P passing through the patterning device (exposure units 121, 121a to 121c) does not shift in the width direction.
  • the floor of the unit 120, 120a) is made parallel with the rollers in the unit 120 and the processing of the substrate P is started, the floor is partially dented and tilted due to the influence of the apparatus load or the like with time. There is.
  • the first substrate detection unit 202 (202a, 202b) or the relative position detection unit 234 causes positional displacement or deformation in the width direction when the substrate P is carried into the patterning apparatus (a slight inclination due to twisting). Can be measured and corrected by the substrate adjustment unit 214 (rollers AR1, RT3, AR2).
  • the substrate adjustment unit 214 composed of a plurality of rollers as shown in FIG. 16 (of which at least one roller can be tilted) includes an exposure unit 121c as shown in FIG. Although it is provided on the main body frame 215 on the side, it may be provided on the main body frame 207b in the position adjustment unit 120a. In that case, in the position adjustment unit 120a (first processing apparatus) and the exposure unit 121c (second processing apparatus) which are separated from each other in order to insulate or suppress vibration transmission, the second is provided on the exposure unit 121c side.
  • the substrate detection unit 208 is provided in the vicinity of the guide roller Rs3 or the tension roller RT1, similarly to the second substrate detection unit 124 shown in FIG. Further, the substrate adjustment unit 214 may be provided on the installation surface E as a single unit independently of any of the position adjustment unit 120a (first processing apparatus) and the exposure unit 121c (second processing apparatus).
  • Position adjustment unit 120a or first substrate between exposure units 121, 121c and the like that perform the optical patterning process and a pre-processing apparatus (first processing unit) that manages the process immediately before the optical patterning process
  • first substrate detection unit 202 can detect a change in the position of the substrate P transported from the first processing unit to the second processing unit. Further, when the position adjustment unit 120a or the first substrate detection unit 202 is provided on the downstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P in the first processing unit, the first processing unit 202 changes the first processing unit to the second processing unit.
  • the position change of the substrate P conveyed to the substrate may be detected, the position of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202, and the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 208 or the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2.
  • the position change of the substrate P transported from the first processing unit to the second processing unit may be detected from this position.
  • the relative position detection unit 234 detects the relative position or position change between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c, thereby detecting the position change of the substrate P transported from the first processing unit to the second processing unit. It may be detected.

Landscapes

  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Environmental & Geological Engineering (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Atmospheric Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
  • Container, Conveyance, Adherence, Positioning, Of Wafer (AREA)
  • Investigating Materials By The Use Of Optical Means Adapted For Particular Applications (AREA)
  • Photosensitive Polymer And Photoresist Processing (AREA)

Abstract

 The purpose of the present invention is to suitably perform exposure using an exposure unit by further reducing vibration imparted to the exposure unit. A substrate processing apparatus (U3) is provided with: a shock-absorbing table (131) provided on a placement surface (E); an exposure unit (121), provided on the shock-absorbing table (131), for performing an exposure process on a supplied substrate (P); and a position adjustment unit (120) and a drive unit (122) provided on the placement surface (E) and provided, as processing units for performing a process on the exposure unit (121), in an independent state out of contact with the exposure unit (121).

Description

基板処理装置、デバイス製造システム、デバイス製造方法、および、パターン形成装置Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern forming apparatus
 本発明は、基板上に電子デバイス用のパターンを形成するための基板処理装置、デバイス製造システム、デバイス製造方法、および、パターン形成装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a substrate processing apparatus, a device manufacturing system, a device manufacturing method, and a pattern forming apparatus for forming a pattern for an electronic device on a substrate.
 従来、特開平9-219353号公報に示すように、基板処理装置として、定盤上を移動する移動ステージ上に設けられた基板に対してデバイスパターンの露光を行う露光装置が知られている。この露光装置の定盤は、除振機構を有するマウント部材を介して基台に支持されている。移動ステージは、定盤上に設けられた可動ガイド上をX方向に移動する。可動ガイドは、基台上に設けられた2本のリニアモータにより定盤上をY方向に移動する。2本のリニアモータは、基台のX方向の両側に設けられ、非接触で可動ガイドをY方向に移動させている。つまり、各リニアモータは、可動子と固定子とを有し、固定子は、基台上に固定される一方で、可動子は、可動ガイドのX方向の両側にそれぞれ固定され、可動子と固定子とは非接触状態となっている。前記特開平9-219353号公報の露光装置は、リニアモータの可動子および固定子が非接触状態であることから、外乱による振動が可動ガイドおよび移動ステージを介して定盤上に伝達されることを抑制している。 Conventionally, as disclosed in JP-A-9-219353, an exposure apparatus that exposes a device pattern to a substrate provided on a moving stage that moves on a surface plate is known as a substrate processing apparatus. The surface plate of this exposure apparatus is supported on the base via a mount member having a vibration isolation mechanism. The moving stage moves in the X direction on a movable guide provided on the surface plate. The movable guide is moved in the Y direction on the surface plate by two linear motors provided on the base. The two linear motors are provided on both sides of the base in the X direction, and move the movable guide in the Y direction without contact. That is, each linear motor has a mover and a stator, and the stator is fixed on the base, while the mover is fixed on both sides in the X direction of the movable guide, It is in a non-contact state with the stator. In the exposure apparatus disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-219353, since the mover and the stator of the linear motor are in a non-contact state, vibration due to disturbance is transmitted to the surface plate via the movable guide and the moving stage. Is suppressed.
 前記特開平9-219353号公報の露光装置では、2本のリニアモータにより可動ガイドを定盤上においてY方向に移動させており、同様に、可動ガイドに対する移動ステージの移動もリニアモータを用いて行っている。この場合も、リニアモータは、非接触で移動ステージをX方向に移動させている。しかしながら、定盤上において可動ガイドに対し移動ステージを移動させることから、移動ステージの移動により生じる振動が定盤に伝わる可能性がある。 In the exposure apparatus disclosed in JP-A-9-219353, the movable guide is moved in the Y direction on the surface plate by two linear motors. Similarly, the movement of the movable stage with respect to the movable guide is also performed using the linear motor. Is going. Also in this case, the linear motor moves the moving stage in the X direction without contact. However, since the moving stage is moved with respect to the movable guide on the surface plate, vibration generated by the movement of the moving stage may be transmitted to the surface plate.
 また、前記特開平9-219353号公報の露光装置は、移動ステージ上に基板を保持して露光を行っているが、この構成に限らず、フィルム状の基板が連続した状態で供給され、供給される基板に対してデバイスパターンを走査露光する場合がある。この場合、基板の供給時において、基板が振動する可能性がある。 In addition, the exposure apparatus disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-219353 performs exposure by holding a substrate on a moving stage. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a film-like substrate is supplied in a continuous state. In some cases, a device pattern is scanned and exposed to a substrate to be formed. In this case, the substrate may vibrate when the substrate is supplied.
 本発明の態様は、上記課題に鑑みてなされたものであって、露光ユニットに与えられる振動をより低減し、露光ユニットによる露光を好適に行うことができる基板処理装置、デバイス製造システム、デバイス製造方法、および、パターン形成装置を提供することを目的とする。 An aspect of the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and further reduces the vibration applied to the exposure unit and can suitably perform exposure by the exposure unit, a device manufacturing system, and device manufacturing. It is an object to provide a method and a pattern forming apparatus.
 本発明の第1の態様は、基板処理装置であって、設置面上に設けられた除振台と、前記除振台上に設けられ、供給される基板に対して露光処理を行う露光ユニットと、前記設置面上に設けられるとともに、前記露光ユニットとは非接触となる独立状態で設けられ、前記露光ユニットに対する処理を行う処理ユニットと、を備える。 1st aspect of this invention is a substrate processing apparatus, Comprising: The anti-vibration stand provided on the installation surface, The exposure unit which is provided on the said anti-vibration stand and performs the exposure process with respect to the supplied substrate And a processing unit that is provided on the installation surface, is provided in an independent state that is not in contact with the exposure unit, and performs processing on the exposure unit.
 本発明の第1の態様は、前記基板処理装置であって、前記処理ユニットは、前記露光ユニットに供給される前記基板の幅方向における位置を調整する位置調整ユニットを含み、前記位置調整ユニットは、前記設置面上に設けられた基台と、前記基台上に設けられ、前記基台に対して前記基板の幅方向に前記基板を移動させる幅移動機構と、前記基台上に設けられ、前記幅移動機構による位置調整後の前記基板を、前記露光ユニットへ向けて案内するとともに、前記基台に対する位置が固定された固定ローラと、を有してもよい。 A first aspect of the present invention is the substrate processing apparatus, wherein the processing unit includes a position adjusting unit that adjusts a position in a width direction of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit, and the position adjusting unit includes: A base provided on the installation surface; a width moving mechanism provided on the base for moving the substrate in the width direction of the substrate with respect to the base; and provided on the base. The substrate after the position adjustment by the width moving mechanism may be guided toward the exposure unit, and may have a fixed roller whose position with respect to the base is fixed.
 本発明の第1の態様は、前記基板処理装置であって、前記基台上に固定して設けられ、前記固定ローラに供給される前記基板の幅方向における位置を検出する第1基板検出部と、前記第1基板検出部の検出結果に基づいて前記幅移動機構を制御し、前記固定ローラに供給される前記基板の幅方向における位置を第1目標位置に補正する制御部と、をさらに備えてもよい。 1st aspect of this invention is the said board | substrate processing apparatus, Comprising: The 1st board | substrate detection part which is fixedly provided on the said base, and detects the position in the width direction of the said board | substrate supplied to the said fixed roller. And a control unit that controls the width moving mechanism based on the detection result of the first substrate detection unit, and corrects the position in the width direction of the substrate supplied to the fixed roller to a first target position. You may prepare.
 本発明の第1の態様は、前記基板処理装置であって、前記位置調整ユニットは、前記露光ユニットに対する前記固定ローラの位置を調整するローラ位置調整機構をさらに有し、前記除振台上に固定して設けられ、前記露光ユニットに供給される前記基板の位置を検出する第2基板検出部と、前記第2基板検出部の検出結果に基づいて前記ローラ位置調整機構を制御し、前記露光ユニットに供給される前記基板の位置を第2目標位置に補正する制御部と、をさらに備えてもよい。 A first aspect of the present invention is the substrate processing apparatus, wherein the position adjustment unit further includes a roller position adjustment mechanism that adjusts a position of the fixed roller with respect to the exposure unit, and is provided on the vibration isolation table. A fixed second substrate detection unit configured to detect the position of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit; and the roller position adjustment mechanism based on a detection result of the second substrate detection unit to control the exposure. And a controller that corrects the position of the substrate supplied to the unit to a second target position.
 本発明の第1の態様は、前記基板処理装置であって、前記位置調整ユニットから前記露光ユニットへ供給される前記基板に対して、テンションが付与されるように押圧する押圧機構と、前記除振台上に固定して設けられ、前記露光ユニットに供給される前記基板の位置を検出する第2基板検出部と、前記第2基板検出部の検出結果に基づいて前記押圧機構を制御し、前記基板への押圧量を調整する制御部と、をさらに備えてもよい。 According to a first aspect of the present invention, there is provided the substrate processing apparatus, the pressing mechanism that presses the substrate supplied from the position adjustment unit to the exposure unit so that a tension is applied, and the removal unit. A second substrate detection unit that is fixedly provided on a shaking table and detects the position of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit; and controls the pressing mechanism based on a detection result of the second substrate detection unit; And a controller that adjusts the amount of pressure applied to the substrate.
 本発明の第1の態様は、前記基板処理装置であって、前記処理ユニットは、前記露光ユニットを駆動する駆動ユニットを含み、前記露光ユニットは、照明光が照明されるマスクを保持するマスク保持部材と、前記マスクからの投影光が投射される前記基板を支持する基板支持部材と、を有し、前記駆動ユニットは、前記マスクを走査方向に移動させるために前記マスク保持部材を駆動させるマスク側駆動部と、前記基板を走査方向に移動させるために前記基板支持部材を駆動させる基板側駆動部と、を有してもよい。 A first aspect of the present invention is the substrate processing apparatus, wherein the processing unit includes a drive unit that drives the exposure unit, and the exposure unit holds a mask that is illuminated with illumination light. A mask that drives the mask holding member to move the mask in the scanning direction. The mask has a member and a substrate support member that supports the substrate on which the projection light from the mask is projected. A side driving unit and a substrate side driving unit that drives the substrate support member to move the substrate in the scanning direction may be included.
 本発明の第1の態様は、前記基板処理装置であって、前記露光ユニットは、前記マスク保持部材を支持する第1フレームと、前記基板支持部材を支持する第2フレームと、を有し、前記除振台は、前記設置面と前記第1フレームとの間に設けられた第1除振台と、前記設置面と前記第2フレームとの間に設けられた第2除振台と、を含んでもよい。 A first aspect of the present invention is the substrate processing apparatus, wherein the exposure unit includes a first frame that supports the mask holding member, and a second frame that supports the substrate support member, The vibration isolation table includes: a first vibration isolation table provided between the installation surface and the first frame; a second vibration isolation table provided between the installation surface and the second frame; May be included.
 本発明の第1の態様は、前記基板処理装置であって、前記露光ユニットは、前記マスク保持部材および前記基板支持部材を支持するフレームを有し、前記除振台は、前記設置面と前記フレームとの間に設けられてもよい。 1st aspect of this invention is the said substrate processing apparatus, Comprising: The said exposure unit has a flame | frame which supports the said mask holding member and the said board | substrate support member, The said vibration isolator is the said installation surface, the said You may provide between frames.
 本発明の第1の態様は、前記基板処理装置であって、前記マスク保持部材は、第1軸を中心とした第1の曲率半径となるマスク面を有する前記マスクを保持し、前記マスク側駆動部は、前記マスク保持部材を回転駆動させることで、前記マスクを走査方向に移動させ、前記基板支持部材は、第2軸を中心とした第2の曲率半径となる支持面に沿って、前記基板を支持し、前記基板側駆動部は、前記基板支持部材を回転駆動させることで、前記基板を走査方向に移動させてもよい。 A first aspect of the present invention is the substrate processing apparatus, wherein the mask holding member holds the mask having a mask surface having a first radius of curvature around a first axis, and the mask side The drive unit rotationally drives the mask holding member to move the mask in the scanning direction, and the substrate support member is along a support surface having a second radius of curvature around the second axis. The substrate may be supported, and the substrate-side drive unit may move the substrate in the scanning direction by rotationally driving the substrate support member.
 本発明の第1の態様は、前記基板処理装置であって、前記マスク保持部材は、平面となるマスク面を有する前記マスクを保持し、前記マスク側駆動部は、前記マスク保持部材を直線駆動させることで、前記マスクを走査方向に移動させ、前記基板支持部材は、第2軸を中心とした第2の曲率半径となる支持面に沿って、前記基板を支持し、前記基板側駆動部は、前記基板支持部材を回転駆動させることで、前記基板を走査方向に移動させてもよい。 1st aspect of this invention is the said substrate processing apparatus, Comprising: The said mask holding member hold | maintains the said mask which has a mask surface used as a plane, The said mask side drive part drives the said mask holding member linearly The mask is moved in the scanning direction, and the substrate support member supports the substrate along a support surface having a second radius of curvature around the second axis, and the substrate side drive unit May move the substrate in the scanning direction by rotationally driving the substrate support member.
 本発明の第1の態様は、前記基板処理装置であって、前記マスク保持部材は、第1軸を中心とした第1の曲率半径となるマスク面を有する前記マスクを保持し、前記マスク側駆動部は、前記マスク保持部材を回転駆動させることで、前記マスクを走査方向に移動させ、前記基板支持部材は、前記基板が平面を有するように、前記基板の走査方向における両側を回転可能に支持する一対の支持ローラを有し、前記基板側駆動部は、前記一対の支持ローラを回転駆動させることで、前記基板を走査方向に移動させてもよい。 A first aspect of the present invention is the substrate processing apparatus, wherein the mask holding member holds the mask having a mask surface having a first radius of curvature around a first axis, and the mask side The driving unit rotates the mask holding member to move the mask in the scanning direction, and the substrate support member can rotate both sides of the substrate in the scanning direction so that the substrate has a flat surface. The substrate-side drive unit may move the substrate in the scanning direction by rotationally driving the pair of support rollers.
 本発明の第2の態様は、デバイス製造システムであって、本発明の第1の態様の基板処理装置と、前記基板処理装置に前記基板を供給する基板供給装置と、前記基板処理装置により処理された前記基板を回収する基板回収装置と、を備える。 A second aspect of the present invention is a device manufacturing system, the substrate processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention, a substrate supply apparatus that supplies the substrate to the substrate processing apparatus, and a process performed by the substrate processing apparatus. And a substrate recovery apparatus for recovering the processed substrate.
 本発明の第2の態様は、前記デバイス製造システムであって、前記基板供給装置は、ロール状に前記基板が巻回された供給用ロールが回転可能に支持される第1軸受部と、前記第1軸受部を昇降させる第1昇降機構と、前記供給用ロールから送り出された前記基板が巻き付けられる第1ローラに対する前記基板の進入角度を検出する進入角度検出部と、前記進入角度検出部の検出結果に基づいて前記第1昇降機構を制御し、前記進入角度を目標進入角度に補正する制御部と、を有してもよい。 A second aspect of the present invention is the device manufacturing system, wherein the substrate supply device includes a first bearing portion on which a supply roll around which the substrate is wound in a roll shape is rotatably supported; A first elevating mechanism that elevates and lowers the first bearing unit, an entrance angle detecting unit that detects an entrance angle of the substrate with respect to a first roller around which the substrate fed from the supply roll is wound, and an entrance angle detecting unit And a controller that controls the first lifting mechanism based on a detection result and corrects the approach angle to a target approach angle.
 本発明の第2の態様は、前記デバイス製造システムであって、前記基板回収装置は、前記基板処理装置で処理された処理後の前記基板が巻回される回収用ロールが回転可能に支持される第2軸受部と、前記第2軸受部を昇降させる第2昇降機構と、前記回収用ロールへ送り出される前記基板が巻き付けられる第2ローラに対する前記基板の排出角度を検出する排出角度検出部と、前記排出角度検出部の検出結果に基づいて前記第2昇降機構を制御し、前記排出角度を目標排出角度に補正する制御部と、を有してもよい。 A second aspect of the present invention is the device manufacturing system, wherein the substrate recovery apparatus is rotatably supported by a recovery roll on which the processed substrate processed by the substrate processing apparatus is wound. A second bearing part, a second raising / lowering mechanism for raising and lowering the second bearing part, and a discharge angle detecting part for detecting a discharge angle of the substrate with respect to a second roller around which the substrate sent to the collection roll is wound, And a control unit that controls the second elevating mechanism based on the detection result of the discharge angle detection unit and corrects the discharge angle to a target discharge angle.
 本発明の第3の態様は、デバイス製造方法であって、本発明の第1の態様の基板処理装置を用いて前記基板に露光処理をすることと、露光処理された前記基板を処理することにより、前記マスクのパターンを形成することと、を含む。 A third aspect of the present invention is a device manufacturing method, wherein the substrate processing apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention is used to perform an exposure process on the substrate and to process the exposed substrate. Forming a pattern of the mask.
 本発明の第4の態様は、長尺の可撓性のシート基板を長尺方向に搬送しつつ、該シート基板上の所定位置にパターンを形成するパターン形成装置であって、前記シート基板を所定の搬送経路に沿って長尺方向に搬送するための複数の案内ローラを含む搬送部と、前記搬送経路の一部に設けられ、前記シート基板の表面の前記所定位置に前記パターンを形成するパターン形成部と、を備えるパターニング装置と、前記パターニング装置が設置される基台面と前記パターニング装置との間に設けられる除振装置と、前記パターニング装置とは別体に設けられて前記基台面に設置され、前記パターニング装置の前記搬送部に向けて前記シート基板を送り出すための案内ローラを含むとともに、前記シート基板の長尺方向と直交した幅方向に関して前記シート基板の位置を調整する位置調整装置と、前記搬送経路中の前記パターン形成部に対して上流側で、前記シート基板の前記幅方向の位置変化、姿勢変化、または、前記シート基板の変形に関する変化情報を計測する基板誤差計測部と、前記変化情報に基づいて前記位置調整装置を制御する制御装置と、を備える。 According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a pattern forming apparatus for forming a pattern at a predetermined position on the sheet substrate while conveying the long flexible sheet substrate in the longitudinal direction. A transport unit including a plurality of guide rollers for transporting in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined transport path, and a part of the transport path, and forming the pattern at the predetermined position on the surface of the sheet substrate A patterning device, a vibration isolation device provided between the base surface on which the patterning device is installed and the patterning device, and the patterning device separately provided on the base surface. A guide roller installed and including a guide roller for feeding the sheet substrate toward the conveyance unit of the patterning device, and a width direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the sheet substrate A position adjusting device that adjusts the position of the sheet substrate, and a position change in the width direction, a posture change of the sheet substrate, or a deformation of the sheet substrate on the upstream side of the pattern forming unit in the conveyance path. A substrate error measurement unit that measures change information regarding the control unit, and a control device that controls the position adjustment device based on the change information.
 本発明の第4の態様は、前記パターン形成装置であって、前記基板誤差計測部は、前記シート基板の幅方向のエッジ、若しくは、前記シート基板上に形成されたマークを検出することで、前記変化情報を計測してもよい。 A fourth aspect of the present invention is the pattern forming apparatus, wherein the substrate error measuring unit detects an edge in a width direction of the sheet substrate or a mark formed on the sheet substrate. The change information may be measured.
 本発明の第4の態様は、前記パターン形成装置であって、前記基板誤差計測部は、前記パターニング装置および前記位置調整装置の少なくとも一方に設けられている。 A fourth aspect of the present invention is the pattern forming apparatus, wherein the substrate error measuring unit is provided in at least one of the patterning apparatus and the position adjusting apparatus.
 本発明の第4の態様は、長尺の可撓性のシート基板を長尺方向に搬送しつつ、該シート基板上の所定位置にパターンを形成するパターン形成装置であって、前記シート基板を所定の搬送経路に沿って長尺方向に搬送するための複数の案内ローラを含む搬送部と、前記搬送経路の一部に設けられ、前記シート基板の表面の前記所定位置に前記パターンを形成するパターン形成部と、を備えるパターニング装置と、前記パターニング装置が設置される基台面と前記パターニング装置との間に設けられる除振装置と、前記パターニング装置とは別体に設けられて前記基台面に設置され、前記パターニング装置の前記搬送部に向けて前記シート基板を送り出すための案内ローラを含むとともに、前記シート基板の長尺方向と直交した幅方向に関して前記シート基板の位置を調整する位置調整装置と、前記パターニング装置と前記位置調整装置との相対的な位置変化に関する変化情報を計測する位置誤差計測部と、前記変化情報に基づいて前記位置調整装置を制御する制御装置と、を備える。 According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a pattern forming apparatus for forming a pattern at a predetermined position on the sheet substrate while conveying the long flexible sheet substrate in the longitudinal direction. A transport unit including a plurality of guide rollers for transporting in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined transport path, and a part of the transport path, and forming the pattern at the predetermined position on the surface of the sheet substrate A patterning device, a vibration isolation device provided between the base surface on which the patterning device is installed and the patterning device, and the patterning device separately provided on the base surface. A guide roller installed and including a guide roller for feeding the sheet substrate toward the conveyance unit of the patterning device, and a width direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the sheet substrate A position adjusting device for adjusting the position of the sheet substrate, a position error measuring unit for measuring change information relating to a relative position change between the patterning device and the position adjusting device, and the position adjusting device based on the change information. And a control device for controlling.
 本発明の第4の態様は、前記パターン形成装置であって、前記パターニング装置内に設けられ、前記搬送経路中の前記パターン形成部に対して上流側で、前記長尺方向に所定の張力が掛けられた状態で、前記シート基板の前記搬送経路を折り曲げるように配置された傾斜可能な調整ローラを備え、前記制御装置は、前記変化情報に基づいて前記調整ローラを傾斜させることで、パターン形成部に搬送されるシート基板の幅方向の位置を調整してもよい。 A fourth aspect of the present invention is the pattern forming apparatus, provided in the patterning apparatus, wherein a predetermined tension is applied in the longitudinal direction upstream of the pattern forming unit in the transport path. In the hung state, a tiltable adjustment roller is disposed so as to bend the conveyance path of the sheet substrate, and the control device tilts the adjustment roller based on the change information to form a pattern. You may adjust the position of the width direction of the sheet | seat board | substrate conveyed by a part.
 本発明の第5の態様は、長尺の可撓性のシート基板を長尺方向に搬送しつつ、該シート基板に順次第1の処理、第2の処理を施すデバイス製造システムであって、所定の基台面に設置され、前記シート基板を所定の搬送経路に沿って長尺方向に送るための複数のローラを含み、前記シート基板に前記第1の処理を施す第1処理ユニットと、前記基台面に設置され、前記第1処理ユニットから送られてくる前記シート基板を所定の搬送経路に沿って長尺方向に送るための複数のローラを含み、前記シート基板に前記第2の処理を施す第2処理ユニットと、前記基台面と前記第1処理ユニットとの間の振動伝達、または、前記基台面と前記第2処理ユニットとの間の振動伝達、或いは、前記第1処理ユニットと前記第2処理ユニットとの間の振動伝達を絶縁若しくは抑制する防振装置と、前記第1処理ユニットと前記第2処理ユニットとの相対的な位置変化、または前記第1処理ユニットから前記第2処理ユニットに搬送される前記シート基板の位置変化に関する変化情報を計測する変化計測部と、前記第2処理ユニット内に搬入される前記シート基板の長尺方向と直交した幅方向の位置を前記変化情報に基づいて調整する位置調整装置と、を備える。 A fifth aspect of the present invention is a device manufacturing system that sequentially performs a first process and a second process on a sheet substrate while conveying the long flexible sheet substrate in the longitudinal direction. A first processing unit that is installed on a predetermined base surface and includes a plurality of rollers for feeding the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined conveyance path, and performs the first processing on the sheet substrate; A plurality of rollers installed on a base surface for sending the sheet substrate sent from the first processing unit in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined conveyance path; and performing the second processing on the sheet substrate. Second processing unit to be applied, vibration transmission between the base surface and the first processing unit, vibration transmission between the base surface and the second processing unit, or the first processing unit and the Swing with the second processing unit An anti-vibration device that insulates or suppresses transmission, a relative position change between the first processing unit and the second processing unit, or of the sheet substrate conveyed from the first processing unit to the second processing unit A change measuring unit that measures change information related to a position change, and a position adjustment device that adjusts a position in a width direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the sheet substrate carried into the second processing unit based on the change information; .
 本発明の第5の態様は、前記デバイス製造システムであって、前記第2処理ユニットは、前記シート基板の長尺方向に電子デバイス用のパターンを形成するために、前記シート基板の表面に形成された光感応層に前記パターンに応じた光エネルギーを投射する露光装置、または導電材料、絶縁材料、半導体材料のいずれか1つを含有するインクの塗布によって前記シート基板の表面に前記パターンを描画する印刷装置のいずれか一方を含むパターニング装置であってもよい。 5th aspect of this invention is the said device manufacturing system, Comprising: The said 2nd processing unit is formed in the surface of the said sheet | seat board | substrate in order to form the pattern for electronic devices in the elongate direction of the said sheet | seat board | substrate. The pattern is drawn on the surface of the sheet substrate by applying an exposure device that projects light energy corresponding to the pattern onto the light-sensitive layer or by applying ink containing any one of a conductive material, an insulating material, and a semiconductor material. It may be a patterning apparatus including any one of the printing apparatuses.
 本発明の第5の態様は、前記デバイス製造システムであって、前記第1処理ユニットは、前記パターニング装置によって前記シート基板上に施される処理の前工程に相当する処理を実施する単独または複数の前処理装置で構成され、前記位置調整装置は、前記シート基板の搬送路上で前記パターニング装置の直前に設置される前記前処理装置内、または前記直前の前処理装置と前記パターニング装置との間に設けられてもよい。 A fifth aspect of the present invention is the device manufacturing system, wherein the first processing unit performs one or a plurality of processes corresponding to a pre-process of a process performed on the sheet substrate by the patterning apparatus. The position adjusting device is disposed in the preprocessing device installed immediately before the patterning device on the sheet substrate conveyance path or between the preprocessing device and the patterning device immediately before. May be provided.
 本発明の第5の態様は、前記デバイス製造システムであって、前記位置調整装置は、前記シート基板を長尺方向に折り曲げて案内搬送する複数の回転ローラと、該複数の回転ローラのうちの一部の回転ローラを、回転中心軸の方向に平行移動させる駆動機構と、前記変化計測部で計測される前記変化情報に基づいて前記駆動機構を制御する制御部とを備えてもよい。 A fifth aspect of the present invention is the device manufacturing system, wherein the position adjusting device includes a plurality of rotating rollers that bend and guide the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction, and the plurality of rotating rollers. A drive mechanism that translates some of the rotation rollers in the direction of the rotation center axis and a control unit that controls the drive mechanism based on the change information measured by the change measurement unit may be provided.
 本発明の第5の態様は、前記デバイス製造システムであって、前記位置調整装置は、前記シート基板を長尺方向に折り曲げて案内搬送する複数の回転ローラと、該複数の回転ローラのうちの一部の回転ローラの回転中心軸を傾ける駆動部と、前記変化計測部で計測される前記変化情報に基づいて前記駆動部を制御する制御部とを備えてもよい。 A fifth aspect of the present invention is the device manufacturing system, wherein the position adjusting device includes a plurality of rotating rollers that bend and guide the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction, and the plurality of rotating rollers. You may provide the drive part which inclines the rotation center axis | shaft of some rotation rollers, and the control part which controls the said drive part based on the said change information measured by the said change measurement part.
 本発明の第5の態様は、前記デバイス製造システムであって、前記変化計測部は、前記第1処理ユニットと前記第2処理ユニットとの間の前記シート基板の搬送路に配置されて、前記長尺方向と直交した前記シート基板の幅方向に関する傾斜変化を前記変化情報として検出するセンサーを含んでもよい。 A fifth aspect of the present invention is the device manufacturing system, wherein the change measurement unit is disposed in a conveyance path of the sheet substrate between the first processing unit and the second processing unit, and A sensor that detects a change in inclination in the width direction of the sheet substrate orthogonal to the longitudinal direction as the change information may be included.
 本発明の態様によれば、露光ユニットに与えられる振動をより低減し、露光ユニットによる露光を好適に行うことができる基板処理装置、デバイス製造システム、デバイス製造方法、および、パターン形成装置を提供することができる。 According to the aspects of the present invention, there are provided a substrate processing apparatus, a device manufacturing system, a device manufacturing method, and a pattern forming apparatus that can further reduce the vibration applied to the exposure unit and can suitably perform exposure by the exposure unit. be able to.
図1は、第1の実施の形態のデバイス製造システムの構成を示す図である。FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a device manufacturing system according to the first embodiment. 図2は、第1の実施の形態のデバイス製造システムを簡略化したときの構成を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a configuration when the device manufacturing system according to the first embodiment is simplified. 図3は、第1の実施の形態の露光装置(基板処理装置)の一部の構成を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a view showing a configuration of a part of the exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) according to the first embodiment. 図4は、図3に示した第1の実施の形態の露光装置の一部の構成を示す図である。FIG. 4 is a view showing a part of the arrangement of the exposure apparatus according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 図5は、第1の実施の形態の露光ユニットの全体構成を示す図である。FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of the exposure unit according to the first embodiment. 図6は、図5に示す露光ユニットの照明領域および投影領域の配置を示す図である。FIG. 6 is a view showing the arrangement of illumination areas and projection areas of the exposure unit shown in FIG. 図7は、図5に示す露光ユニットの投影光学系の構成を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a view showing the configuration of the projection optical system of the exposure unit shown in FIG. 図8は、第1の実施の形態のデバイス製造方法を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the device manufacturing method according to the first embodiment. 図9は、第2の実施の形態の露光装置(基板処理装置)の一部の構成を示す図である。FIG. 9 is a view showing a part of the configuration of the exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) according to the second embodiment. 図10は、図9の第2の実施の形態の露光ユニットの全体構成を示す図である。FIG. 10 is a view showing the overall arrangement of the exposure unit according to the second embodiment of FIG. 図11は、第3の実施の形態の露光ユニットの全体構成を示す図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of an exposure unit according to the third embodiment. 図12は、第4の実施の形態による露光装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 12 is a view showing the arrangement of an exposure apparatus according to the fourth embodiment. 図13は、図12に示す露光装置内で搬送される基板を+Z方向側から見たときの図である。FIG. 13 is a view of the substrate transported in the exposure apparatus shown in FIG. 12 when viewed from the + Z direction side. 図14は、図13に示す位置調整ユニット側の最後のローラと露光ユニット側の最初のローラとの間で搬送される基板Pを-Y方向側から見たときの図である。FIG. 14 is a view of the substrate P transported between the last roller on the position adjustment unit side and the first roller on the exposure unit side shown in FIG. 13 when viewed from the −Y direction side. 図15は、図12に示す回転ドラムによって搬送される基板を-X方向側から見たときの図である。FIG. 15 is a view of the substrate transported by the rotating drum shown in FIG. 12 when viewed from the −X direction side. 図16は、図12に示す基板調整部の構成を示す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the substrate adjustment unit illustrated in FIG. 12. 図17Aは、図12に示す第2基板検出部の構成を示す図、図17Bは、第2基板検出部によって基板に照射されたビーム光を示す図、図17Cは、第2基板検出部によって受光されるビーム光を示す図である。FIG. 17A is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the second substrate detection unit illustrated in FIG. 12, FIG. 17B is a diagram illustrating the beam light emitted to the substrate by the second substrate detection unit, and FIG. 17C is a diagram illustrating the second substrate detection unit. It is a figure which shows the light beam received. 図12に示す相対位置検出部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the relative position detection part shown in FIG. 図12に示す露光ヘッドによって基板上で走査されるスポット光の走査ラインおよびアライメント顕微鏡を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the scanning line and alignment microscope of the spot light scanned on a board | substrate by the exposure head shown in FIG. 図12に示す露光ヘッドの描画ユニットの構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the drawing unit of the exposure head shown in FIG.
 本発明の態様に係る基板処理装置、デバイス製造システム、デバイス製造方法、および、パターン形成装置について、好適な実施の形態を掲げ、添付の図面を参照しながら以下、詳細に説明する。なお、本発明の態様は、これらの実施の形態に限定されるものではなく、多様な変更または改良を加えたものも含まれる。つまり、以下に記載した構成要素には、当業者が容易に想定できるもの、実質的に同一のものが含まれ、以下に記載した構成要素は適宜組み合わせることが可能である。また、本発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲で構成要素の種々の省略、置換または変更を行うことができる。 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION A substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern forming apparatus according to an aspect of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings and preferred embodiments. In addition, the aspect of this invention is not limited to these embodiment, What added the various change or improvement is included. That is, the constituent elements described below include those that can be easily assumed by those skilled in the art and substantially the same elements, and the constituent elements described below can be appropriately combined. In addition, various omissions, substitutions, or changes of the components can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.
[第1の実施の形態]
 第1の実施の形態の基板処理装置は、基板に露光処理を施す露光装置であり、露光装置は、露光後の基板に各種処理を施して電子デバイスを製造するデバイス製造システムに組み込まれている。まず、デバイス製造システムについて説明する。
[First Embodiment]
The substrate processing apparatus according to the first embodiment is an exposure apparatus that performs exposure processing on a substrate, and the exposure apparatus is incorporated in a device manufacturing system that performs various processing on a substrate after exposure to manufacture an electronic device. . First, a device manufacturing system will be described.
<デバイス製造システム>
 図1は、第1の実施の形態のデバイス製造システム1の構成を示す図である。図1に示すデバイス製造システム1は、電子デバイス(デバイスと呼ぶ場合もある)としてのフレキシブル・ディスプレイを製造するライン(フレキシブル・ディスプレイ製造ライン)である。フレキシブル・ディスプレイとしては、例えば有機ELディスプレイ等がある。このデバイス製造システム1は、可撓性の基板(シート基板)Pをロール状に巻回した供給用ロールFR1から、該基板Pが送り出され、送り出された基板Pに対して各種処理を連続的に施した後、処理後の基板Pを回収用ロールFR2で巻き取る、いわゆるロール・ツー・ロール(Roll to Roll)方式となっている。第1の実施の形態のデバイス製造システム1では、フィルム状のシートである基板Pが供給用ロールFR1から送り出され、供給用ロールFR1から送り出された基板Pが、順次、n台の処理装置U1、U2、U3、U4、U5、…Unを経て、回収用ロールFR2に巻き取られるまでの例を示している。まず、デバイス製造システム1の処理対象となる基板Pについて説明する。
<Device manufacturing system>
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a device manufacturing system 1 according to the first embodiment. A device manufacturing system 1 shown in FIG. 1 is a line (flexible display manufacturing line) for manufacturing a flexible display as an electronic device (sometimes referred to as a device). Examples of the flexible display include an organic EL display. In the device manufacturing system 1, the substrate P is sent out from a supply roll FR1 obtained by winding a flexible substrate (sheet substrate) P in a roll shape, and various processes are continuously performed on the sent out substrate P. Then, a so-called roll-to-roll system is adopted in which the processed substrate P is wound up by the recovery roll FR2. In the device manufacturing system 1 according to the first embodiment, the substrate P that is a film-like sheet is sent out from the supply roll FR1, and the substrates P sent out from the supply roll FR1 are sequentially supplied to n processing apparatuses U1. , U2, U3, U4, U5,... Un, and the winding roll FR2 is shown as an example. First, the substrate P to be processed by the device manufacturing system 1 will be described.
 基板Pは、例えば、樹脂フィルム、ステンレス鋼等の金属または合金からなる箔(フォイル)等が用いられる。樹脂フィルムの材質としては、例えば、ポリエチレン樹脂、ポリプロピレン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、エチレンビニル共重合体樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニル樹脂、セルロース樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリスチレン樹脂、酢酸ビニル樹脂のうち1または2以上を含んだものを用いてもよい。また、基板Pの厚みや剛性(ヤング率)は、搬送される際に、基板Pに座屈による折れ目や非可逆的なシワが生じないような範囲であればよい。電子デバイスとして、フレキシブルなディスプレイパネル、タッチパネル、カラーフィルター、電磁波防止フィルタ等を作る場合、厚みが25μm~200μm程度のPET(ポリエチレンテレフタレート)やPEN(ポリエチレンナフタレート)等の樹脂シートが使われる。 For the substrate P, for example, a foil (foil) made of a resin or a metal such as stainless steel or an alloy is used. Examples of the resin film material include polyethylene resin, polypropylene resin, polyester resin, ethylene vinyl copolymer resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, cellulose resin, polyamide resin, polyimide resin, polycarbonate resin, polystyrene resin, and vinyl acetate resin. You may use what contained 1 or 2 or more. In addition, the thickness and rigidity (Young's modulus) of the substrate P may be in a range that does not cause folds or irreversible wrinkles due to buckling in the substrate P when it is transported. When making a flexible display panel, touch panel, color filter, electromagnetic wave prevention filter, etc. as an electronic device, a resin sheet such as PET (polyethylene terephthalate) or PEN (polyethylene naphthalate) having a thickness of about 25 μm to 200 μm is used.
 基板Pは、例えば、基板Pに施される各種処理において受ける熱による変形量が実質的に無視できるように、熱膨張係数が顕著に大きくないものを選定することが望ましい。また、ベースとなる樹脂フィルムに、例えば酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、アルミナ、酸化ケイ素略の無機フィラーを混合すると、熱膨張係数を小さくすることもできる。また、基板Pは、フロート法等で製造された厚さ100μm程度の極薄ガラスの単層体であってもよいし、この極薄ガラスに上記の樹脂フィルム、またはアルミや銅等の金属層(箔)等を貼り合わせた積層体であってもよい。 As the substrate P, for example, it is desirable to select a substrate whose thermal expansion coefficient is not remarkably large so that the amount of deformation caused by heat in various processes applied to the substrate P can be substantially ignored. Moreover, when an inorganic filler, such as titanium oxide, zinc oxide, alumina, or silicon oxide, is mixed into the base resin film, the thermal expansion coefficient can be reduced. In addition, the substrate P may be a single layer of ultrathin glass having a thickness of about 100 μm manufactured by a float process or the like, and the resin film or a metal layer such as aluminum or copper is formed on the ultrathin glass. A laminate in which (foil) or the like is bonded may be used.
 ところで、基板Pの可撓性とは、基板Pに自重程度の力を加えてもせん断したり破断したりすることはなく、その基板Pを撓めることが可能な性質をいう。また、自重程度の力によって屈曲する性質も可撓性に含まれる。また、基板Pの材質、大きさ、厚さ、基板P上に成膜される層構造、温度、湿度とともにの環境等に応じて、可撓性の程度は変わる。いずれにしろ、本実施の形態によるデバイス製造システム1内の搬送路に設けられる各種の搬送用ローラ、回転ドラム等の搬送方向転換用の部材に基板Pを正しく巻き付けた場合に、座屈して折り目がついたり、破損(破れや割れが発生)したりせずに、基板Pを滑らかに搬送できれば、可撓性の範囲と言える。 By the way, the flexibility of the substrate P refers to the property that the substrate P can be bent without being sheared or broken even when a force of its own weight is applied to the substrate P. In addition, flexibility includes a property of bending by a force of about its own weight. Further, the degree of flexibility varies depending on the material, size, and thickness of the substrate P, the layer structure formed on the substrate P, the environment along with the temperature and humidity, and the like. In any case, when the substrate P is correctly wound around various conveyance rollers, rotary drums, and other members for conveyance direction provided in the conveyance path in the device manufacturing system 1 according to the present embodiment, the substrate P buckles and folds. If the substrate P can be smoothly transported without being damaged or broken (breaking or cracking), it can be said that it is in the range of flexibility.
 このように構成された基板Pは、ロール状に巻回されることで供給用ロールFR1となり、この供給用ロールFR1が、デバイス製造システム1に装着される。供給用ロールFR1が装着されたデバイス製造システム1は、電子デバイスを製造するための各種の処理を、供給用ロールFR1から送り出される基板Pに対して繰り返し実行する。このため、処理後の基板Pは、複数の電子デバイスが連なった状態となる。つまり、供給用ロールFR1から送り出される基板Pは、多面取り用の基板となっている。なお、基板Pは、予め所定の前処理によって、その表面を改質して活性化したもの、或いは、表面に精密パターニングのための微細な隔壁構造(凹凸構造)を形成したものでもよい。 The substrate P configured in this way becomes a supply roll FR1 by being wound in a roll shape, and this supply roll FR1 is mounted on the device manufacturing system 1. The device manufacturing system 1 to which the supply roll FR1 is mounted repeatedly executes various processes for manufacturing an electronic device on the substrate P sent out from the supply roll FR1. For this reason, the processed substrate P is in a state in which a plurality of electronic devices are connected. That is, the substrate P sent out from the supply roll FR1 is a multi-sided substrate. The substrate P may be activated by modifying the surface in advance by a predetermined pretreatment, or may be formed with a fine partition structure (uneven structure) for precise patterning on the surface.
 処理後の基板Pは、ロール状に巻回されることで回収用ロールFR2として回収される。回収用ロールFR2は、図示しないダイシング装置に装着される。回収用ロールFR2が装着されたダイシング装置は、処理後の基板Pを、電子デバイスごとに分割(ダイシング)することで、複数個の電子デバイスにする。基板Pの寸法は、例えば、幅方向(短尺となる方向)の寸法が10cm~2m程度であり、長さ方向(長尺となる方向)の寸法が10m以上である。なお、基板Pの寸法は、上記した寸法に限定されない。 The treated substrate P is recovered as a recovery roll FR2 by being wound into a roll. The collection roll FR2 is attached to a dicing device (not shown). The dicing apparatus to which the collection roll FR2 is mounted divides the processed substrate P for each electronic device (dicing) to form a plurality of electronic devices. Regarding the dimensions of the substrate P, for example, the dimension in the width direction (short direction) is about 10 cm to 2 m, and the dimension in the length direction (long direction) is 10 m or more. In addition, the dimension of the board | substrate P is not limited to an above-described dimension.
 図1を参照し、引き続きデバイス製造システム1について説明する。図1では、X方向、Y方向およびZ方向が直交する直交座標系となっている。X方向は、水平面内において、基板Pの搬送方向であり、供給用ロールFR1および回収用ロールFR2を結ぶ方向である。Y方向は、水平面内においてX方向に直交する方向であり、基板Pの幅方向である。Y方向は、供給用ロールFR1および回収用ロールFR2の軸方向となっている。Z方向は、X方向とY方向とに直交する方向(鉛直方向)である。 The device manufacturing system 1 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 1, an orthogonal coordinate system in which the X direction, the Y direction, and the Z direction are orthogonal to each other is shown. The X direction is a transport direction of the substrate P in the horizontal plane, and is a direction connecting the supply roll FR1 and the recovery roll FR2. The Y direction is a direction orthogonal to the X direction in the horizontal plane, and is the width direction of the substrate P. The Y direction is the axial direction of the supply roll FR1 and the recovery roll FR2. The Z direction is a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the X direction and the Y direction.
 デバイス製造システム1は、基板Pを供給する基板供給装置2と、基板供給装置2によって供給された基板Pに対して各種処理を施す処理装置U1~Unと、処理装置U1~Unによって処理が施された基板Pを回収する基板回収装置4と、デバイス製造システム1の各装置を制御する上位制御装置(制御部)5とを備える。 The device manufacturing system 1 includes a substrate supply device 2 that supplies a substrate P, processing devices U1 to Un that perform various processes on the substrate P supplied by the substrate supply device 2, and processing is performed by the processing devices U1 to Un. A substrate recovery apparatus 4 that recovers the substrate P and a host controller (control unit) 5 that controls each device of the device manufacturing system 1 are provided.
 基板供給装置2には、供給用ロールFR1が回転可能に装着される。基板供給装置2は、装着された供給用ロールFR1から基板Pを送り出す駆動ローラR1と、基板Pの幅方向(Y方向)における位置を調整するエッジポジションコントローラEPC1とを有する。駆動ローラR1は、基板Pの表裏両面を挟持しながら回転し、基板Pを供給用ロールFR1から回収用ロールFR2へ向かう搬送方向(+X方向)に送り出すことで、基板Pを処理装置U1~Unに供給する。このとき、エッジポジションコントローラEPC1は、基板Pの幅方向の端部のエッジにおける位置が、目標位置に対して±十数μm~数十μm程度の範囲に収まるように、基板Pを幅方向に移動させて、基板Pの幅方向における位置を修正する。 The substrate supply device 2 is rotatably mounted with a supply roll FR1. The substrate supply apparatus 2 includes a driving roller R1 that sends out the substrate P from the mounted supply roll FR1, and an edge position controller EPC1 that adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction (Y direction). The driving roller R1 rotates while sandwiching both front and back surfaces of the substrate P, and sends the substrate P in the transport direction (+ X direction) from the supply roll FR1 to the recovery roll FR2, thereby causing the substrate P to be processed by the processing devices U1 to Un. To supply. At this time, the edge position controller EPC1 moves the substrate P in the width direction so that the position at the edge of the edge in the width direction of the substrate P is within a range of about ± 10 μm to several tens μm with respect to the target position. It is moved to correct the position of the substrate P in the width direction.
 基板回収装置4には、回収用ロールFR2が回転可能に装着される。基板回収装置4は、処理後の基板Pを回収用ロールFR2側に引き寄せる駆動ローラR2と、基板Pの幅方向(Y方向)における位置を調整するエッジポジションコントローラEPC2とを有する。基板回収装置4は、駆動ローラR2により基板Pの表裏両面を挟持しながら回転し、基板Pを搬送方向に引き寄せるとともに、回収用ロールFR2を回転させることで、基板Pを巻き上げる。このとき、エッジポジションコントローラEPC2は、エッジポジションコントローラEPC1と同様に構成され、基板Pの幅方向の端部のエッジが幅方向においてばらつかないように、基板Pの幅方向における位置を修正する。 The substrate collection device 4 is rotatably mounted with a collection roll FR2. The substrate recovery apparatus 4 includes a drive roller R2 that draws the processed substrate P toward the recovery roll FR2, and an edge position controller EPC2 that adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction (Y direction). The substrate recovery device 4 rotates while sandwiching the front and back surfaces of the substrate P by the driving roller R2, pulls the substrate P in the transport direction, and rotates the recovery roll FR2, thereby winding the substrate P. At this time, the edge position controller EPC2 is configured in the same manner as the edge position controller EPC1, and corrects the position in the width direction of the substrate P so that the edge of the end portion in the width direction of the substrate P does not vary in the width direction.
 処理装置U1は、基板供給装置2から供給された基板Pの表面に感光性機能液を塗布する塗布装置である。感光性機能液としては、例えば、フォトレジスト、感光性シランカップリング剤、UV硬化樹脂液、感光性メッキ還元溶液等が用いられる。処理装置U1は、基板Pの搬送方向の上流側から順に、塗布機構Gp1と乾燥機構Gp2とが設けられている。塗布機構Gp1は、基板Pが巻き付けられる圧胴ローラDR1と、圧胴ローラDR1に対向する塗布ローラDR2とを有する。塗布機構Gp1は、供給された基板Pを圧胴ローラDR1に巻き付けた状態で、圧胴ローラDR1および塗布ローラDR2により基板Pを挟持する。そして、塗布機構Gp1は、圧胴ローラDR1および塗布ローラDR2を回転させることで、基板Pを搬送方向に移動させながら、塗布ローラDR2により感光性機能液を塗布する。乾燥機構Gp2は、熱風またはドライエアー等の乾燥用エアーを吹き付け、感光性機能液に含まれる溶質(溶剤または水)を除去し、感光性機能液が塗布された基板Pを乾燥させることで、基板P上に感光性機能層を形成する。 The processing device U1 is a coating device that applies a photosensitive functional liquid to the surface of the substrate P supplied from the substrate supply device 2. As the photosensitive functional liquid, for example, a photoresist, a photosensitive silane coupling agent, a UV curable resin liquid, a photosensitive plating reducing solution, or the like is used. The processing apparatus U1 is provided with a coating mechanism Gp1 and a drying mechanism Gp2 in order from the upstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P. The coating mechanism Gp1 includes a pressure drum DR1 around which the substrate P is wound, and a coating roller DR2 facing the pressure drum DR1. The coating mechanism Gp1 sandwiches the substrate P between the pressure drum roller DR1 and the coating roller DR2 in a state where the supplied substrate P is wound around the pressure drum roller DR1. Then, the application mechanism Gp1 applies the photosensitive functional liquid by the application roller DR2 while rotating the impression cylinder DR1 and the application roller DR2 to move the substrate P in the transport direction. The drying mechanism Gp2 blows drying air such as hot air or dry air, removes the solute (solvent or water) contained in the photosensitive functional liquid, and dries the substrate P coated with the photosensitive functional liquid. A photosensitive functional layer is formed on the substrate P.
 処理装置U2は、基板Pの表面に形成された感光性機能層を安定にすべく、処理装置U1から搬送された基板Pを所定温度(例えば、数10℃~120℃程度)まで加熱する加熱装置である。処理装置U2は、基板Pの搬送方向の上流側から順に、加熱チャンバHA1と冷却チャンバHA2とが設けられている。加熱チャンバHA1は、その内部に複数のローラおよび複数のエア・ターンバーが設けられており、複数のローラおよび複数のエア・ターンバーは、基板Pの搬送経路を構成している。複数のローラは、基板Pの裏面に転接して設けられ、複数のエア・ターンバーは、基板Pの表面側に非接触状態で設けられる。複数のローラおよび複数のエア・ターンバーは、基板Pの搬送経路を長くすべく、蛇行状の搬送経路となる配置になっている。加熱チャンバHA1内を通る基板Pは、蛇行状の搬送経路に沿って搬送されながら所定温度まで加熱される。冷却チャンバHA2は、加熱チャンバHA1で加熱された基板Pの温度が、後工程(処理装置U3)の環境温度と揃うようにすべく、基板Pを環境温度まで冷却する。冷却チャンバHA2は、その内部に複数のローラが設けられ、複数のローラは、加熱チャンバHA1と同様に、基板Pの搬送経路を長くすべく、蛇行状の搬送経路となる配置になっている。冷却チャンバHA2内を通る基板Pは、蛇行状の搬送経路に沿って搬送されながら冷却される。冷却チャンバHA2の搬送方向における下流側には、駆動ローラR3が設けられ、駆動ローラR3は、冷却チャンバHA2を通過した基板Pを挟持しながら回転することで、基板Pを処理装置U3へ向けて供給する。 The processing device U2 heats the substrate P conveyed from the processing device U1 to a predetermined temperature (for example, about several tens to 120 ° C.) in order to stabilize the photosensitive functional layer formed on the surface of the substrate P. Device. The processing apparatus U2 is provided with a heating chamber HA1 and a cooling chamber HA2 in order from the upstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P. The heating chamber HA1 is provided with a plurality of rollers and a plurality of air turn bars therein, and the plurality of rollers and the plurality of air turn bars constitute a transport path for the substrate P. The plurality of rollers are provided in rolling contact with the back surface of the substrate P, and the plurality of air turn bars are provided in a non-contact state on the surface side of the substrate P. The plurality of rollers and the plurality of air turn bars are arranged to form a meandering transport path so as to lengthen the transport path of the substrate P. The substrate P passing through the heating chamber HA1 is heated to a predetermined temperature while being transported along a meandering transport path. The cooling chamber HA2 cools the substrate P to the environmental temperature so that the temperature of the substrate P heated in the heating chamber HA1 matches the environmental temperature of the subsequent process (processing apparatus U3). The cooling chamber HA2 is provided with a plurality of rollers, and the plurality of rollers are arranged in a meandering manner in order to lengthen the conveyance path of the substrate P, similarly to the heating chamber HA1. The substrate P passing through the cooling chamber HA2 is cooled while being transferred along a meandering transfer path. A driving roller R3 is provided on the downstream side in the transport direction of the cooling chamber HA2, and the driving roller R3 rotates while sandwiching the substrate P that has passed through the cooling chamber HA2, thereby moving the substrate P toward the processing apparatus U3. Supply.
 処理装置(基板処理装置)U3は、処理装置U2から供給された、表面に感光性機能層が形成された基板Pに対して、ディスプレイパネル用の回路または配線等のパターンを投影露光する露光装置である。詳細は後述するが、処理装置U3は、透過型のマスクMに照明光束を照明し、照明光束がマスクMにより照明されることで得られる投影光束を、回転ドラム(支持ドラム)25の外周面の一部に巻き付けられる基板Pに投影露光する。処理装置U3は、処理装置U2から供給された基板Pを搬送方向の下流側に送る駆動ローラR4と、基板Pの幅方向(Y方向)における位置を調整するエッジポジションコントローラEPC3とを有する。駆動ローラR4は、基板Pの表裏両面を挟持しながら回転し、基板Pを搬送方向の下流側に送り出すことで、基板Pを露光位置へ向けて供給する。エッジポジションコントローラEPC3は、エッジポジションコントローラEPC1と同様に構成され、露光位置における基板Pの幅方向が目標位置となるように、基板Pの幅方向における位置を修正する。また、処理装置U3は、露光後の基板PにたるみDLを与えた状態で、基板Pを搬送方向の下流側へ送る2組の駆動ローラR5、R6を有する。2組の駆動ローラR5、R6は、基板Pの搬送方向に所定の間隔を空けて配置されている。駆動ローラR5は、搬送される基板Pの上流側を挟持して回転し、駆動ローラR6は、搬送される基板Pの下流側を挟持して回転することで、基板Pを処理装置U4へ向けて供給する。このとき、基板Pは、たるみDLが与えられているため、駆動ローラR6よりも搬送方向の下流側において生ずる搬送速度の変動を吸収でき、搬送速度の変動による基板Pへの露光処理の影響を縁切りすることができる。また、処理装置U3内には、マスクMのマスクパターンの一部分の像と基板Pとを相対的に位置合せ(アライメント)するために、基板Pに予め形成されたアライメントマーク等を検出するアライメント顕微鏡AM1、AM2が設けられている。 The processing apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) U3 is an exposure apparatus that projects and exposes a pattern such as a circuit or wiring for a display panel on the substrate P having a photosensitive functional layer formed on the surface supplied from the processing apparatus U2. It is. Although details will be described later, the processing device U3 illuminates the transmissive mask M with the illumination light beam, and the projection light beam obtained by illuminating the illumination light beam with the mask M is used as the outer peripheral surface of the rotary drum (support drum) 25. Projection exposure is performed on the substrate P wound around a part of the substrate. The processing apparatus U3 includes a driving roller R4 that sends the substrate P supplied from the processing apparatus U2 to the downstream side in the transport direction, and an edge position controller EPC3 that adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction (Y direction). The drive roller R4 rotates while pinching both front and back surfaces of the substrate P, and feeds the substrate P toward the exposure position by sending the substrate P downstream in the transport direction. The edge position controller EPC3 is configured in the same manner as the edge position controller EPC1, and corrects the position in the width direction of the substrate P so that the width direction of the substrate P at the exposure position becomes the target position. Further, the processing apparatus U3 has two sets of drive rollers R5 and R6 that send the substrate P to the downstream side in the transport direction in a state where the slack DL is given to the exposed substrate P. The two sets of drive rollers R5 and R6 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the transport direction of the substrate P. The driving roller R5 rotates while sandwiching the upstream side of the substrate P to be transported, and the driving roller R6 rotates while sandwiching the downstream side of the substrate P to be transported, thereby directing the substrate P toward the processing apparatus U4. And supply. At this time, since the slack DL is given to the substrate P, it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the conveyance speed that occur downstream of the drive roller R6 in the conveyance direction, and the influence of the exposure process on the substrate P due to fluctuations in the conveyance speed. Can be trimmed. Further, in the processing apparatus U3, in order to relatively align (align) the partial image of the mask pattern of the mask M with the substrate P, an alignment microscope that detects an alignment mark or the like formed in advance on the substrate P. AM1 and AM2 are provided.
 処理装置U4は、処理装置U3から搬送された露光後の基板Pに対して、湿式による現像処理、無電解メッキ処理等を行う湿式処理装置である。処理装置U4は、その内部に、鉛直方向(Z方向)に階層化された3つの処理槽BT1、BT2、BT3と、基板Pを搬送する複数のローラとを有する。複数のローラは、基板Pが3つの処理槽BT1、BT2、BT3の内部を通過するように配置される。処理槽BT3の搬送方向における下流側には、駆動ローラR7が設けられ、駆動ローラR7は、処理槽BT3を通過した基板Pを挟持しながら回転することで、基板Pを処理装置U5へ向けて供給する。 The processing apparatus U4 is a wet processing apparatus that performs wet development processing, electroless plating processing, and the like on the exposed substrate P conveyed from the processing apparatus U3. The processing apparatus U4 has three processing tanks BT1, BT2, and BT3 that are hierarchized in the vertical direction (Z direction) and a plurality of rollers that transport the substrate P therein. The plurality of rollers are arranged so that the substrate P passes through the three processing tanks BT1, BT2, and BT3. A driving roller R7 is provided on the downstream side in the transport direction of the processing tank BT3. The driving roller R7 rotates while sandwiching the substrate P that has passed through the processing tank BT3, so that the substrate P is directed toward the processing apparatus U5. Supply.
 図示は省略するが、処理装置U5は、処理装置U4から搬送された基板Pを乾燥させる乾燥装置である。処理装置U5は、処理装置U4において湿式処理された基板Pに付着する水分含有量を、所定の水分含有量に調整する。処理装置U5により乾燥された基板Pは、幾つかの処理装置を経て、処理装置Unに搬送される。そして、処理装置Unで処理された後、基板Pは、基板回収装置4の回収用ロールFR2に巻き上げられる。 Although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the processing apparatus U5 is a drying apparatus which dries the board | substrate P conveyed from the processing apparatus U4. The processing apparatus U5 adjusts the moisture content adhering to the substrate P wet-processed in the processing apparatus U4 to a predetermined moisture content. The substrate P dried by the processing apparatus U5 is transferred to the processing apparatus Un through several processing apparatuses. Then, after being processed by the processing device Un, the substrate P is wound up on the recovery roll FR2 of the substrate recovery device 4.
 上位制御装置5は、基板供給装置2、基板回収装置4および複数の処理装置U1~Unを統括制御する。上位制御装置5は、基板供給装置2および基板回収装置4を制御して、基板Pを基板供給装置2から基板回収装置4へ向けて搬送させる。また、上位制御装置5は、基板Pの搬送に同期させながら、複数の処理装置U1~Unを制御して、基板Pに対する各種処理を実行させる。この上位制御装置5は、コンピュータと、プログラムが記憶された記憶媒体とを含み、該コンピュータが記憶媒体に記憶されたプログラムを実行することで、本第1の実施の形態の上位制御装置5として機能する。 The host control device 5 performs overall control of the substrate supply device 2, the substrate recovery device 4, and the plurality of processing devices U1 to Un. The host control device 5 controls the substrate supply device 2 and the substrate recovery device 4 to transport the substrate P from the substrate supply device 2 toward the substrate recovery device 4. In addition, the host controller 5 controls the plurality of processing apparatuses U1 to Un to execute various processes on the substrate P while synchronizing with the transport of the substrate P. The host controller 5 includes a computer and a storage medium in which a program is stored, and the computer executes the program stored in the storage medium, whereby the host controller 5 of the first embodiment is used. Function.
 なお、第1の実施の形態のデバイス製造システム1では、供給用ロールFR1から送り出された基板Pが、順次、n台の処理装置U1~Unを経て、回収用ロールFR2に巻き取られるまでの例を示したが、この構成に限らない。例えば、デバイス製造システム1は、供給用ロールFR1から送り出された基板Pが、1台の処理装置を経て、回収用ロールFR2に巻き取られる構成であってもよい。このとき、基板Pに対して異なる処理を行う場合は、基板供給装置2および基板回収装置4を用いて、異なる処理装置に再び基板Pを供給することになる。 In the device manufacturing system 1 according to the first embodiment, the substrate P sent out from the supply roll FR1 is sequentially wound through the n processing apparatuses U1 to Un to the collection roll FR2. Although an example is shown, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the device manufacturing system 1 may be configured such that the substrate P sent out from the supply roll FR1 is wound around the collection roll FR2 via one processing apparatus. At this time, when different processing is performed on the substrate P, the substrate P is supplied again to different processing devices using the substrate supply device 2 and the substrate recovery device 4.
<簡略化したデバイス製造システム>
 続いて、本発明の特徴部分を容易に把握するために、図1のデバイス製造システム1を簡略化したデバイス製造システム1について、図2を参照しながら説明する。図2は、第1の実施の形態のデバイス製造システム1を簡略化したときの構成を示す図である。図2に示すように、簡略化したデバイス製造システム1は、基板供給装置2と、露光装置としての処理装置U3(以下、露光装置という)と、基板回収装置4と、上位制御装置5とを有する。なお、図2では、X方向、Y方向、および、Z方向が直交する直交座標系となっており、図1と同様の直交座標系となっている。また、簡略化したデバイス製造システム1において、基板供給装置2は、エッジポジションコントローラEPC1を省いた構成となっている。これは、露光装置U3において、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3が設けられているからである。まず、図2を参照し、基板供給装置2について説明する。
<Simplified device manufacturing system>
Next, a device manufacturing system 1 that is a simplified version of the device manufacturing system 1 of FIG. 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a configuration when the device manufacturing system 1 according to the first embodiment is simplified. As shown in FIG. 2, the simplified device manufacturing system 1 includes a substrate supply device 2, a processing device U3 (hereinafter referred to as an exposure device) as an exposure device, a substrate recovery device 4, and a host control device 5. Have. 2 is an orthogonal coordinate system in which the X direction, the Y direction, and the Z direction are orthogonal to each other, and is an orthogonal coordinate system similar to that in FIG. In the simplified device manufacturing system 1, the substrate supply apparatus 2 has a configuration in which the edge position controller EPC1 is omitted. This is because the exposure apparatus U3 is provided with an edge position controller EPC3. First, the substrate supply apparatus 2 will be described with reference to FIG.
<基板供給装置>
 基板供給装置2は、供給用ロールFR1が装着される第1軸受部111と、第1軸受部111を昇降させる第1昇降機構112とを有する。また、基板供給装置2は、進入角度検出部114を有しており、進入角度検出部114は、上位制御装置5に接続されている。ここで、第1の実施の形態において、上位制御装置5は、基板供給装置2の制御装置(制御部)として機能する。なお、基板供給装置2の制御装置として、基板供給装置2を制御する下位制御装置を設け、下位制御装置が基板供給装置2を制御する構成にしてもよい。
<Substrate supply device>
The substrate supply device 2 includes a first bearing portion 111 on which the supply roll FR1 is mounted, and a first lifting mechanism 112 that moves the first bearing portion 111 up and down. Further, the substrate supply device 2 has an approach angle detection unit 114, and the approach angle detection unit 114 is connected to the host control device 5. Here, in the first embodiment, the host control device 5 functions as a control device (control unit) of the substrate supply device 2. In addition, as a control device of the substrate supply device 2, a lower control device that controls the substrate supply device 2 may be provided, and the lower control device may control the substrate supply device 2.
 第1軸受部111は、供給用ロールFR1を回転可能に軸支している。第1軸受部111に軸支された供給用ロールFR1は、基板Pが露光装置U3へ向けて供給される(送り出される)と、基板Pが送り出された分、供給用ロールFR1の巻径が小さくなっていく。このため、供給用ロールFR1から基板Pを送り出す位置は、基板Pが送り出された送出量に応じて変化することになる。 The first bearing portion 111 rotatably supports the supply roll FR1. The supply roll FR1 pivotally supported by the first bearing portion 111 has a winding diameter of the supply roll FR1 corresponding to the amount of the substrate P fed out when the substrate P is fed (sent out) toward the exposure apparatus U3. It gets smaller. For this reason, the position at which the substrate P is sent out from the supply roll FR1 changes in accordance with the feed amount at which the substrate P is sent out.
 第1昇降機構112は、設置面Eと第1軸受部111との間に設けられている。第1昇降機構112は、第1軸受部111を供給用ロールFR1ごとZ方向(鉛直方向)に移動させる。第1昇降機構112は、上位制御装置5に接続されており、上位制御装置5は、第1昇降機構112により第1軸受部111をZ方向に移動させることで、供給用ロールFR1から基板Pを送り出す位置を所定の位置にすることができる。 The first elevating mechanism 112 is provided between the installation surface E and the first bearing portion 111. The first elevating mechanism 112 moves the first bearing portion 111 in the Z direction (vertical direction) together with the supply roll FR1. The first elevating mechanism 112 is connected to the host controller 5, and the host controller 5 moves the first bearing portion 111 in the Z direction by the first elevating mechanism 112 to remove the substrate P from the supply roll FR <b> 1. Can be set to a predetermined position.
 進入角度検出部114は、後述する露光装置U3の搬送ローラ127に進入する基板Pの進入角度θ1を検出する。進入角度検出部114は、搬送ローラ127周りに設けられている。ここで、進入角度θ1は、XZ面内において、搬送ローラ127の中心軸を通る鉛直方向に延びる直線(Z軸と平行)と、搬送ローラ127の上流側の基板Pとがなす角度である。進入角度検出部114は、接続された上位制御装置5に検出結果を出力する。 The entrance angle detection unit 114 detects the entrance angle θ1 of the substrate P entering the transport roller 127 of the exposure apparatus U3 described later. The approach angle detection unit 114 is provided around the transport roller 127. Here, the approach angle θ1 is an angle formed by a straight line extending in the vertical direction passing through the central axis of the transport roller 127 (parallel to the Z axis) and the substrate P upstream of the transport roller 127 in the XZ plane. The approach angle detection unit 114 outputs the detection result to the connected host control device 5.
 上位制御装置5は、進入角度検出部114の検出結果に基づいて第1昇降機構112を制御する。具体的に、上位制御装置5は、進入角度θ1が予め規定された目標進入角度となるように、第1昇降機構112を制御する。つまり、供給用ロールFR1からの基板Pの送出量が多くなると、供給用ロールFR1の巻径が小さくなることで、目標進入角度に対する進入角度θ1は大きくなる。このため、上位制御装置5は、第1昇降機構112をZ方向の下方側に移動させる(降下させる)ことで、進入角度θ1を小さくし、進入角度θ1を目標進入角度となるように補正する。このように、上位制御装置5は、進入角度検出部114の検出結果に基づいて、進入角度θ1が目標進入角度となるように、第1昇降機構112をフィードバック制御する。このため、基板供給装置2は、搬送ローラ127に対し、常に目標進入角度で基板Pを供給できることから、進入角度θ1の変化によって基板Pに与えられる影響を低減できる。なお、フィードバック制御としては、P制御、PI制御、PID制御等、いずれの制御であってもよい。 The host control device 5 controls the first elevating mechanism 112 based on the detection result of the approach angle detection unit 114. Specifically, the host controller 5 controls the first elevating mechanism 112 so that the approach angle θ1 becomes a predetermined target approach angle. That is, when the delivery amount of the substrate P from the supply roll FR1 increases, the winding diameter of the supply roll FR1 decreases, so that the entry angle θ1 with respect to the target entry angle increases. For this reason, the host controller 5 moves the first elevating mechanism 112 downward (lowers) in the Z direction, thereby reducing the approach angle θ1 and correcting the approach angle θ1 to be the target approach angle. . Thus, the host controller 5 performs feedback control on the first elevating mechanism 112 based on the detection result of the approach angle detection unit 114 so that the approach angle θ1 becomes the target approach angle. For this reason, since the board | substrate supply apparatus 2 can always supply the board | substrate P with the target approach angle with respect to the conveyance roller 127, it can reduce the influence given to the board | substrate P by the change of approach angle (theta) 1. The feedback control may be any control such as P control, PI control, and PID control.
<露光装置(基板処理装置)>
 次に、図2に示す露光装置U3について、図3も参照して説明する。露光装置U3は、位置調整ユニット120と、露光ユニット121と、駆動ユニット122(図3参照)と、押圧機構130と、除振台(防振装置)131とを含んでいる。除振台131は、設置面E上に設けられており、設置面Eからの振動(所謂、床振動)が露光ユニット121本体に伝わるのを低減する。位置調整ユニット120は、設置面E上に設けられており、図1に示す上記のエッジポジションコントローラEPC3を含んで構成されている。位置調整ユニット120は、X方向において基板供給装置2に隣接して設けられている。露光ユニット121は、除振台131上に設けられており、X方向において位置調整ユニット120を挟んで基板供給装置2の反対側に設けられている。駆動ユニット122(図3参照)は、設置面E上に設けられており、Y方向において露光ユニット121に隣接して設けられている。つまり、位置調整ユニット120、露光ユニット121および駆動ユニット122は、設置面Eにおいて異なる位置に設けられている。また、露光ユニット121と、位置調整ユニット120および駆動ユニット122(図3参照)とは、機械的に非結合状態(非接触な独立状態)となっている。
<Exposure device (substrate processing device)>
Next, the exposure apparatus U3 shown in FIG. 2 will be described with reference to FIG. The exposure apparatus U3 includes a position adjustment unit 120, an exposure unit 121, a drive unit 122 (see FIG. 3), a pressing mechanism 130, and a vibration isolation table (anti-vibration apparatus) 131. The vibration isolation table 131 is provided on the installation surface E, and reduces the transmission of vibration (so-called floor vibration) from the installation surface E to the exposure unit 121 main body. The position adjustment unit 120 is provided on the installation surface E, and includes the edge position controller EPC3 shown in FIG. The position adjustment unit 120 is provided adjacent to the substrate supply apparatus 2 in the X direction. The exposure unit 121 is provided on the vibration isolation table 131 and is provided on the opposite side of the substrate supply apparatus 2 with the position adjustment unit 120 in the X direction. The drive unit 122 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the installation surface E, and is provided adjacent to the exposure unit 121 in the Y direction. That is, the position adjustment unit 120, the exposure unit 121, and the drive unit 122 are provided at different positions on the installation surface E. Further, the exposure unit 121, the position adjustment unit 120, and the drive unit 122 (see FIG. 3) are in a mechanically non-coupled state (a non-contact independent state).
 以上から、位置調整ユニット120および駆動ユニット122は、設置面E上に設けられる一方で、露光ユニット121は、除振台131を介して設置面E上に設けられる。このため、露光ユニット121は、位置調整ユニット120および駆動ユニット122とは異なる振動モードとなる。換言すれば、露光ユニット121は、位置調整ユニット120および駆動ユニット122から、振動伝搬上で縁切りされた状態(振動が相互に伝搬し難い状態、すなわち振動が有効に絶縁される状態)で設けられる。 From the above, the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 are provided on the installation surface E, while the exposure unit 121 is provided on the installation surface E via the vibration isolation table 131. For this reason, the exposure unit 121 is in a different vibration mode from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122. In other words, the exposure unit 121 is provided in a state where the vibration is propagated from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 (a state in which vibrations are difficult to propagate to each other, that is, a state in which the vibrations are effectively insulated). .
 また、露光装置U3は、基板Pの位置を検出する第1基板検出部123および第2基板検出部124を有している。第1基板検出部123および第2基板検出部124は、上位制御装置5に接続されている。なお、露光装置U3においても、基板供給装置2と同様に、上位制御装置5は、露光装置U3の制御装置(制御部)として機能する。なお、露光装置U3の制御装置として、露光装置U3を制御する下位制御装置を設け、下位制御装置が露光装置U3を制御する構成にしてもよい。 Further, the exposure apparatus U3 includes a first substrate detection unit 123 and a second substrate detection unit 124 that detect the position of the substrate P. The first substrate detection unit 123 and the second substrate detection unit 124 are connected to the host control device 5. In the exposure apparatus U3 as well, as in the substrate supply apparatus 2, the host control apparatus 5 functions as a control apparatus (control unit) of the exposure apparatus U3. In addition, as a control apparatus of the exposure apparatus U3, a low-order control apparatus that controls the exposure apparatus U3 may be provided, and the low-order control apparatus may control the exposure apparatus U3.
<位置調整ユニット>
 図2に示すように、位置調整ユニット120は、基台125と、上記のエッジポジションコントローラEPC3(幅移動機構)と、固定ローラ126とを有する。基台125は、設置面E上に設けられ、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3および固定ローラ126を支持する。基台125は、除振機能を有する除振台としてもよい。この基台125には、基台125の位置をY方向またはZ軸回りの回転方向に調整する基台位置調整機構128が設けられている。基台位置調整機構128は、上位制御装置5に接続され、上位制御装置5は、基台位置調整機構128を制御することで、基台125上に設置されたエッジポジションコントローラEPC3および固定ローラ126の位置をともに調整できる。つまり、基台位置調整機構128は、露光ユニット121に対して固定ローラ126の位置をY方向に調整するローラ位置調整機構として機能する。
<Position adjustment unit>
As shown in FIG. 2, the position adjustment unit 120 includes a base 125, the edge position controller EPC <b> 3 (width movement mechanism), and a fixed roller 126. The base 125 is provided on the installation surface E and supports the edge position controller EPC3 and the fixed roller 126. The base 125 may be a vibration isolation table having a vibration isolation function. The base 125 is provided with a base position adjustment mechanism 128 that adjusts the position of the base 125 in the Y direction or the rotational direction around the Z axis. The base position adjustment mechanism 128 is connected to the host control device 5, and the host control device 5 controls the base position adjustment mechanism 128, whereby the edge position controller EPC 3 and the fixed roller 126 installed on the base 125. Can be adjusted together. That is, the base position adjustment mechanism 128 functions as a roller position adjustment mechanism that adjusts the position of the fixed roller 126 in the Y direction with respect to the exposure unit 121.
 エッジポジションコントローラEPC3は、基台125上を基板Pの幅方向(Y方向)に移動可能となっている。エッジポジションコントローラEPC3は、基板Pが搬送される搬送方向の最上流側に設けられた搬送ローラ127を含む複数のローラを有している。搬送ローラ127は、基板供給装置2から供給された基板Pを、位置調整ユニット120の内部に案内する。エッジポジションコントローラEPC3は、上位制御装置5に接続され、第1基板検出部123の検出結果に基づいて上位制御装置5に制御される。 The edge position controller EPC3 is movable on the base 125 in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P. The edge position controller EPC3 has a plurality of rollers including a transport roller 127 provided on the most upstream side in the transport direction in which the substrate P is transported. The transport roller 127 guides the substrate P supplied from the substrate supply device 2 into the position adjustment unit 120. The edge position controller EPC3 is connected to the host controller 5 and controlled by the host controller 5 based on the detection result of the first substrate detection unit 123.
 固定ローラ126は、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3で幅方向に位置調整された基板Pを露光ユニット121へ向けて案内する。固定ローラ126は、回転可能となっており、基台125に対する位置が固定されている。このため、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3によって基板Pを幅方向に移動させることで、固定ローラ126に進入する基板Pの幅方向における位置を調整できる。 The fixed roller 126 guides the substrate P, whose position has been adjusted in the width direction by the edge position controller EPC3, toward the exposure unit 121. The fixed roller 126 is rotatable and its position with respect to the base 125 is fixed. Therefore, the position of the substrate P entering the fixed roller 126 in the width direction can be adjusted by moving the substrate P in the width direction by the edge position controller EPC3.
 第1基板検出部123は、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3から固定ローラ126に搬送される基板Pの幅方向における位置を検出する。第1基板検出部123は、基台125上に固定されている。このため、第1基板検出部123は、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3および固定ローラ126と同じ振動モードとなる。第1基板検出部123は、固定ローラ126に転接する基板Pの端部のエッジの位置を検出する。第1基板検出部123は、接続された上位制御装置5に検出結果を出力する。 The first substrate detection unit 123 detects the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed from the edge position controller EPC3 to the fixed roller 126. The first substrate detection unit 123 is fixed on the base 125. Therefore, the first substrate detection unit 123 is in the same vibration mode as the edge position controller EPC3 and the fixed roller 126. The first substrate detection unit 123 detects the position of the edge of the end portion of the substrate P that is in rolling contact with the fixed roller 126. The first substrate detection unit 123 outputs the detection result to the connected host control device 5.
 第2基板検出部124は、位置調整ユニット120から露光ユニット121に供給される基板Pの位置を検出する。第2基板検出部124は、露光ユニット121が設置される除振台131上に固定されている。このため、第2基板検出部124は、露光ユニット121と同じ振動モードとなる。第2基板検出部124は、露光ユニット121の基板Pが導入される導入側に設けられている。具体的に、第2基板検出部124は、露光ユニット121に設けられた搬送方向の最上流側のガイドローラ28の上流側における位置に、ガイドローラ28に隣接して設けられている。第2基板検出部124は、露光ユニット121に供給される基板Pの幅方向(Y方向)および鉛直方向(Z方向)における位置を検出する。第2基板検出部124は、接続された上位制御装置5に検出結果を出力する。 The second substrate detection unit 124 detects the position of the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121. The second substrate detection unit 124 is fixed on a vibration isolation table 131 on which the exposure unit 121 is installed. For this reason, the second substrate detection unit 124 is in the same vibration mode as the exposure unit 121. The second substrate detection unit 124 is provided on the introduction side where the substrate P of the exposure unit 121 is introduced. Specifically, the second substrate detection unit 124 is provided adjacent to the guide roller 28 at a position on the upstream side of the most upstream guide roller 28 in the transport direction provided in the exposure unit 121. The second substrate detector 124 detects the position of the substrate P supplied to the exposure unit 121 in the width direction (Y direction) and the vertical direction (Z direction). The second substrate detection unit 124 outputs the detection result to the connected host controller 5.
 上位制御装置5は、第1基板検出部123の検出結果に基づいてエッジポジションコントローラEPC3を制御する。具体的に、上位制御装置5は、第1基板検出部123により検出された固定ローラ126に転接(進入)する基板Pの両端部のエッジ(Y方向の両エッジ)の位置から求まるY方向の中心位置と、予め規定された第1目標位置(目標中心位置)との差分を算出する。そして、上位制御装置5は、該差分がゼロとなるようにエッジポジションコントローラEPC3をフィードバック制御して、基板Pを幅方向に移動させ、固定ローラ126に対する基板Pの幅方向における中心位置を第1目標中心位置に補正する。このため、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3は、固定ローラ126に対する基板Pの幅方向における位置を第1目標位置に維持できることから、固定ローラ126に対する基板Pの幅方向における位置ズレを低減できる。なお、この場合も、フィードバック制御としては、P制御、PI制御、PID制御等、いずれの制御であってもよい。 The host control device 5 controls the edge position controller EPC3 based on the detection result of the first substrate detection unit 123. Specifically, the host controller 5 determines the Y direction from the positions of the edges (both edges in the Y direction) of both ends of the substrate P that is in contact with (rolls into) the fixed roller 126 detected by the first substrate detection unit 123. And the difference between the first target position (target center position) defined in advance. Then, the host controller 5 feedback-controls the edge position controller EPC3 so that the difference becomes zero, moves the substrate P in the width direction, and sets the center position in the width direction of the substrate P with respect to the fixed roller 126 as the first position. Correct to the target center position. For this reason, the edge position controller EPC3 can maintain the position in the width direction of the substrate P with respect to the fixed roller 126 at the first target position, so that the positional deviation in the width direction of the substrate P with respect to the fixed roller 126 can be reduced. Also in this case, the feedback control may be any control such as P control, PI control, PID control and the like.
 また、上位制御装置5は、第2基板検出部124の検出結果に基づいて基台位置調整機構128を制御する。具体的に、上位制御装置5は、第2基板検出部124により検出された基板Pの幅方向の両端の位置から求まる中心位置と、予め規定された第2目標中心位置との差分を算出する。そして、上位制御装置5は、該差分がゼロとなるように基台位置調整機構128をフィードバック制御して、基台位置調整機構128により基台125の位置を調整することで、ガイドローラ28に対する固定ローラ126のY方向の位置を調整する。このとき、上位制御装置5は、基板Pに捩れおよび幅方向の位置ズレが生じないように、固定ローラ126の位置を調整する。例えば、上位制御装置5は、ガイドローラ28の軸方向に対して固定ローラ126の軸方向が平行となるように位置を調整する。そして、上位制御装置5は、基台位置調整機構128により固定ローラ126の位置をY方向またはZ軸回りの回転方向に調整することで、露光ユニット121に供給される基板Pの幅方向の中心位置を第2目標中心位置に維持できることから、基板Pの捩れおよび幅方向の位置ズレを低減できる。なお、この場合も、フィードバック制御としては、P制御、PI制御、PID制御等、いずれの制御であってもよい。 Further, the host controller 5 controls the base position adjustment mechanism 128 based on the detection result of the second substrate detection unit 124. Specifically, the host controller 5 calculates the difference between the center position obtained from the positions of both ends in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 124 and the second target center position defined in advance. . Then, the host controller 5 feedback-controls the base position adjustment mechanism 128 so that the difference becomes zero, and adjusts the position of the base 125 by the base position adjustment mechanism 128, thereby The position of the fixed roller 126 in the Y direction is adjusted. At this time, the host controller 5 adjusts the position of the fixed roller 126 so that the substrate P is not twisted and not displaced in the width direction. For example, the host controller 5 adjusts the position so that the axial direction of the fixed roller 126 is parallel to the axial direction of the guide roller 28. Then, the host controller 5 adjusts the position of the fixed roller 126 in the Y direction or the rotation direction around the Z axis by the base position adjustment mechanism 128, thereby the center in the width direction of the substrate P supplied to the exposure unit 121. Since the position can be maintained at the second target center position, the twist of the substrate P and the positional deviation in the width direction can be reduced. Also in this case, the feedback control may be any control such as P control, PI control, PID control and the like.
 このように、位置調整ユニット120は、固定ローラ126に供給される基板Pの幅方向における位置を第1目標位置に補正でき、露光ユニット121のガイドローラ28に供給される基板Pの位置を第2目標位置に補正することができる。 Thus, the position adjustment unit 120 can correct the position in the width direction of the substrate P supplied to the fixed roller 126 to the first target position, and the position of the substrate P supplied to the guide roller 28 of the exposure unit 121 is the first position. Two target positions can be corrected.
 なお、第1の実施の形態では、位置調整ユニット120から露光ユニット121に供給される基板Pの位置を補正したが、この構成に限らず、例えば、基板供給装置2から位置調整ユニット120に供給される基板Pの位置を補正してもよい。この場合、搬送ローラ127の搬送方向における上流側に基板検出部を設けるとともに、供給用ロールFR1の位置を調整するロール位置調整機構を設ける。そして、上位制御装置5が、基板検出部の検出結果に基づいてロール位置調整機構を制御することで、供給用ロールFR1を調整してもよい。同様に、露光ユニット121から基板回収装置4に供給される基板Pの位置を補正してもよい。 In the first embodiment, the position of the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121 is corrected. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the substrate P is supplied from the substrate supply device 2 to the position adjustment unit 120. The position of the substrate P to be processed may be corrected. In this case, a substrate detection unit is provided on the upstream side in the conveyance direction of the conveyance roller 127, and a roll position adjustment mechanism for adjusting the position of the supply roll FR1 is provided. And the high-order control apparatus 5 may adjust supply roll FR1 by controlling a roll position adjustment mechanism based on the detection result of a board | substrate detection part. Similarly, the position of the substrate P supplied from the exposure unit 121 to the substrate recovery apparatus 4 may be corrected.
<露光ユニット>
 次に、第1の実施の形態の露光装置U3の露光ユニット121の構成について、図2から図7を参照して説明する。図3は、第1の実施の形態の露光装置(基板処理装置)U3の一部の構成を示す図であり、図4は、図3中の基板支持機構12の駆動部の構成を示す図である。図5は、第1の実施の形態の露光ユニット121の全体構成を示す図である。図6は、図5に示す露光ユニット121の照明領域IRおよび投影領域PAの配置を示す図である。図7は、図5に示す露光ユニット121の投影光学系PLの構成を示す図である。
<Exposure unit>
Next, the configuration of the exposure unit 121 of the exposure apparatus U3 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a view showing a part of the configuration of the exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) U3 according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 4 is a view showing the structure of the drive unit of the substrate support mechanism 12 in FIG. It is. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of the exposure unit 121 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a view showing the arrangement of the illumination area IR and the projection area PA of the exposure unit 121 shown in FIG. FIG. 7 is a view showing the configuration of the projection optical system PL of the exposure unit 121 shown in FIG.
 図2から図5に示す露光ユニット121は、いわゆる走査露光装置であり、基板支持機構(基板搬送機構)12を構成する複数のガイドローラ28と回転可能な円筒状の回転ドラム25とによって、基板Pを搬送方向(走査方向)に搬送しながら、平面状のマスクMに形成されたマスクパターンの像を、基板Pの表面に投影露光する。なお、図3および図4は、露光ユニット121を-X側から見た図であり、図5および図7は、X方向、Y方向およびZ方向が直交する直交座標系となっており、図1と同様の直交座標系となっている。 The exposure unit 121 shown in FIGS. 2 to 5 is a so-called scanning exposure apparatus, and includes a plurality of guide rollers 28 constituting a substrate support mechanism (substrate transport mechanism) 12 and a rotatable cylindrical rotating drum 25. While carrying P in the carrying direction (scanning direction), the mask pattern image formed on the planar mask M is projected and exposed onto the surface of the substrate P. 3 and 4 are views of the exposure unit 121 as viewed from the −X side, and FIGS. 5 and 7 are orthogonal coordinate systems in which the X, Y, and Z directions are orthogonal. 1 is the same orthogonal coordinate system.
 まず、露光ユニット121に用いられるマスクMについて説明する。マスクMは、例えば平坦性のよいガラス板の一方の面(マスク面P1)にクロムとともにの遮光層でマスクパターンを形成した透過型の平面マスクとして作成され、後述するマスクステージ21上に保持された状態で使用される。マスクMは、マスクパターンが形成されていないパターン非形成領域を有し、パターン非形成領域においてマスクステージ21上に取付けられている。マスクMは、マスクステージ21に対してリリース可能である。 First, the mask M used in the exposure unit 121 will be described. The mask M is created as a transmission type planar mask in which a mask pattern is formed with a light shielding layer together with chromium on one surface (mask surface P1) of a flat glass plate, for example, and is held on a mask stage 21 described later. Used in the state. The mask M has a pattern non-formation region in which no mask pattern is formed, and is attached on the mask stage 21 in the pattern non-formation region. The mask M can be released with respect to the mask stage 21.
 なお、マスクMは、1個の表示デバイスに対応するパネル用パターンの全体または一部が形成されていてもよいし、複数個の表示デバイスに対応するパネル用パターンが形成された多面取りであってもよい。また、マスクMには、パネル用パターンがマスクMの走査方向(X方向)に繰り返し複数個形成されていてもよいし、小型のパネル用パターンが走査方向に直交する方向(Y方向)に繰り返し複数形成されていてもよい。さらに、マスクMは、第1の表示デバイスのパネル用パターンと、第1の表示デバイスとサイズ等が異なる第2の表示デバイスのパネル用パターンとが形成されていてもよい。 Note that the mask M may be formed with the whole or a part of the panel pattern corresponding to one display device, or may be a multi-surface pattern in which panel patterns corresponding to a plurality of display devices are formed. May be. Further, a plurality of panel patterns may be repeatedly formed on the mask M in the scanning direction (X direction) of the mask M, or small panel patterns may be repeatedly formed in a direction orthogonal to the scanning direction (Y direction). A plurality may be formed. Further, the mask M may be formed with a panel pattern for the first display device and a panel pattern for the second display device having a size different from that of the first display device.
 図3、図5に示すように、除振台131上に設置された露光ユニット121は、上記したアライメント顕微鏡AM1、AM2の他に、装置フレーム132と、マスクステージ21を支持するマスク保持機構11と、基板支持機構12と、投影光学系PLと、下位制御装置(制御部)16とを有する。この露光ユニット121は、照明機構13からの照明光束EL1の照射を受けて、マスク保持機構11に保持されたマスクMのマスクパターンから発生する透過光(結像光束)を、基板支持機構12の回転ドラム25に支持された基板Pに投射し、マスクパターンの一部分の投影像を基板Pの表面に結像する。 As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, the exposure unit 121 installed on the vibration isolation table 131 includes a mask holding mechanism 11 that supports the apparatus frame 132 and the mask stage 21 in addition to the alignment microscopes AM <b> 1 and AM <b> 2 described above. And a substrate support mechanism 12, a projection optical system PL, and a low-order control device (control unit) 16. The exposure unit 121 receives the illumination light beam EL1 from the illumination mechanism 13 and transmits the transmitted light (imaging light beam) generated from the mask pattern of the mask M held by the mask holding mechanism 11 to the substrate support mechanism 12. Projection is performed on the substrate P supported by the rotary drum 25, and a projection image of a part of the mask pattern is formed on the surface of the substrate P.
 下位制御装置16は、露光装置U3の各部を制御し、各部に処理を実行させる。下位制御装置16は、デバイス製造システム1の上位制御装置5の一部または全部であってもよい。また、下位制御装置16は、上位制御装置5に制御され、上位制御装置5とは別の装置であってもよい。下位制御装置16は、例えば、コンピュータを含む。 The lower-level control device 16 controls each part of the exposure apparatus U3 and causes each part to execute processing. The lower level control device 16 may be a part or all of the higher level control device 5 of the device manufacturing system 1. Further, the lower level control device 16 may be a device controlled by the higher level control device 5 and different from the higher level control device 5. The lower control device 16 includes, for example, a computer.
 除振台131は、設置面E上に設けられ、装置フレーム132を支持する。具体的に、図3に示すように、除振台131は、Y方向において外側に設けられた第1除振台131aと、第1除振台131aの内側に設けられた第2除振台131bとを含んでいる。 The vibration isolation table 131 is provided on the installation surface E and supports the device frame 132. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the vibration isolation table 131 includes a first vibration isolation table 131a provided outside in the Y direction and a second vibration isolation table provided inside the first vibration isolation table 131a. 131b.
 装置フレーム132は、第1除振台131aおよび第2除振台131b上に設けられ、マスク保持機構11、基板支持機構12、照明機構13および投影光学系PLを支持する。装置フレーム132は、マスク保持機構11、照明機構13および投影光学系PLを支持する第1フレーム132aと、基板支持機構12を支持する第2フレーム132bとを有している。第1フレーム132aおよび第2フレーム132bは、それぞれ独立して設けられ、第1フレーム132aが第2フレーム132bを覆うように配置されている。第1フレーム132aは、第1除振台131a上に設けられ、第2フレーム132bは、第2除振台131b上に設けられる。 The apparatus frame 132 is provided on the first vibration isolation table 131a and the second vibration isolation table 131b, and supports the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate support mechanism 12, the illumination mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL. The apparatus frame 132 includes a first frame 132 a that supports the mask holding mechanism 11, the illumination mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL, and a second frame 132 b that supports the substrate support mechanism 12. The first frame 132a and the second frame 132b are provided independently, and are arranged so that the first frame 132a covers the second frame 132b. The first frame 132a is provided on the first vibration isolation table 131a, and the second frame 132b is provided on the second vibration isolation table 131b.
 第1フレーム132aは、第1除振台131a上に設けられた第1下方フレーム135と、第1下方フレーム135のZ方向の上方に設けられた第1上方フレーム136と、第1上方フレーム136に立設するアーム部137とで構成されている。第1下方フレーム135は、第1除振台131a上に立設する脚部135aと、脚部135aに支持される上面部135bとを有し、上面部135bに保持部材143を介して投影光学系PLが支持される。保持部材143はXY面内でみると、上面部135b上の3ヶ所に配置される金属ボール等による座金部材145で、キネマチックに支持される。脚部135aは、その所定の部位に、後述する回転ドラム25の回転軸AX2がY方向に挿通されるように配置される。 The first frame 132a includes a first lower frame 135 provided on the first vibration isolation base 131a, a first upper frame 136 provided above the first lower frame 135 in the Z direction, and a first upper frame 136. And an arm portion 137 standing upright. The first lower frame 135 has a leg portion 135a standing on the first vibration isolation base 131a and an upper surface portion 135b supported by the leg portion 135a, and the projection optical system via the holding member 143 on the upper surface portion 135b. System PL is supported. When viewed in the XY plane, the holding member 143 is kinematically supported by washer members 145 made of metal balls or the like disposed at three locations on the upper surface portion 135b. The leg portion 135a is arranged at a predetermined portion so that a rotation axis AX2 of the rotary drum 25 described later is inserted in the Y direction.
 第1上方フレーム136も、第1下方フレーム135と同様に、上面部135b上に立設する脚部136aと、脚部136aに支持される上面部136bとを有し、上面部136bにマスク保持機構11(マスクステージ21)が支持される。アーム部137は、上面部136b上に立設し、マスク保持機構11の上方に照明機構13が位置するように、照明機構13を支持する。 Similarly to the first lower frame 135, the first upper frame 136 also has a leg portion 136a standing on the upper surface portion 135b and an upper surface portion 136b supported by the leg portion 136a, and holds the mask on the upper surface portion 136b. The mechanism 11 (mask stage 21) is supported. The arm part 137 stands on the upper surface part 136 b and supports the illumination mechanism 13 so that the illumination mechanism 13 is positioned above the mask holding mechanism 11.
 第2フレーム132bは、第2除振台131b上に設けられた下面部139と、下面部139上にY方向に離れて立設する一対の軸受部140とで構成されている。一対の軸受部140には、回転ドラム25の回転中心となる回転軸AX2を軸支するエアベアリング141が設けられる。 The second frame 132b is composed of a lower surface portion 139 provided on the second vibration isolation table 131b and a pair of bearing portions 140 standing upright on the lower surface portion 139 in the Y direction. The pair of bearing portions 140 is provided with an air bearing 141 that pivotally supports the rotation axis AX2 that is the rotation center of the rotary drum 25.
 マスク保持機構11は、マスクMを保持するマスクステージ(マスク保持部材)21と、マスクステージ21を移動させるための図示しない移動機構(リニアガイド、エアベアリング等)と、移動機構に動力を伝達するための伝達部材23とを有している。マスクステージ21は、マスクMのパターン形成領域を囲むような枠状に構成され、駆動ユニット122に設けられたマスク側駆動部(モータ等の駆動源)22により第1上方フレーム136の上面部136bにおいて、走査方向となるX方向に移動する。伝達部材23から伝達される駆動力は、移動機構によりマスクステージ21の直線駆動に供される。 The mask holding mechanism 11 transmits power to a mask stage (mask holding member) 21 for holding the mask M, a moving mechanism (linear guide, air bearing, etc.) (not shown) for moving the mask stage 21, and a moving mechanism. And a transmission member 23 for the purpose. The mask stage 21 is configured in a frame shape surrounding a pattern formation region of the mask M, and an upper surface portion 136b of the first upper frame 136 by a mask side drive portion (drive source such as a motor) 22 provided in the drive unit 122. In the X direction which is the scanning direction. The driving force transmitted from the transmission member 23 is used for linear driving of the mask stage 21 by the moving mechanism.
 本実施の形態では、マスクステージ21が走査露光のためにX方向に直線運動することから、マスク側駆動部(駆動源)22は、支柱フレーム146にX方向に延設するように固定されるリニアモータの磁石トラック(固定子)を含み、伝達部材23は、その磁石トラックと一定のギャップで対向するリニアモータのコイルユニット(可動子)を含む。なお、図3において、投影光学系PLを装置フレーム132側に支持する保持部材143には、回転ドラム25の外周面(または基板Pの表面)のうち、投影光学系PLによる露光位置に対応した表面の高さの変化を計測する変位センサーSG1と、マスクステージ21の下側からマスクMのZ方向の位置変化を計測する変位センサーSG2とが設けられている。 In the present embodiment, since the mask stage 21 linearly moves in the X direction for scanning exposure, the mask side drive unit (drive source) 22 is fixed to the column frame 146 so as to extend in the X direction. The linear motor includes a magnet track (stator) of the linear motor, and the transmission member 23 includes a linear motor coil unit (movable element) facing the magnet track with a certain gap. In FIG. 3, the holding member 143 that supports the projection optical system PL on the apparatus frame 132 side corresponds to the exposure position by the projection optical system PL on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum 25 (or the surface of the substrate P). A displacement sensor SG1 for measuring a change in the height of the surface and a displacement sensor SG2 for measuring a change in the position of the mask M in the Z direction from the lower side of the mask stage 21 are provided.
 一方、図2、図3に示すように、基板Pを略半周に渡って巻き付けて支持する回転ドラム25は、図3に示す駆動ユニット122に設けられた基板側駆動部(回転モータ等の駆動源)26により回転する。図5にも示すように、回転ドラム25は、Y方向に延びる回転軸AX2を中心とする曲率半径Rfaとなる外周面(円周面)を有する円筒形状に形成されている。ここで、回転軸AX2の中心線を含み、YZ面と平行な面を中心面CLとする(図5参照)。回転ドラム25の円周面の一部は、所定のテンションで基板Pを支持する支持面P2となっている。つまり、回転ドラム25は、その支持面P2に基板Pを一定のテンションで巻き付けることで、基板Pを安定した円筒曲面状に支持する。 On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the rotating drum 25 that supports the substrate P by winding it around a substantially half circumference is provided with a substrate-side drive unit (drive of a rotary motor or the like) provided in the drive unit 122 shown in FIG. It is rotated by the source 26. As shown also in FIG. 5, the rotary drum 25 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer peripheral surface (circumferential surface) having a curvature radius Rfa centered on the rotation axis AX2 extending in the Y direction. Here, a plane including the center line of the rotation axis AX2 and parallel to the YZ plane is defined as a center plane CL (see FIG. 5). A part of the circumferential surface of the rotary drum 25 is a support surface P2 that supports the substrate P with a predetermined tension. That is, the rotary drum 25 supports the substrate P in a stable cylindrical curved surface by winding the substrate P around the support surface P2 with a constant tension.
 回転軸AX2を両側の軸受部140で軸支する各エアベアリング141は、回転軸AX2を非接触の状態で回転自在に軸支する。なお、本実施の形態では、回転ドラム25の両端で回転軸AX2をエアベアリング141で支持するが、高精度に加工されたボールやニードルを使った通常のベアリングであってもよい。図2および図5に示すように、複数のガイドローラ28は、回転ドラム25を挟んで、基板Pの搬送方向の上流側および下流側にそれぞれ設けられている。例えばガイドローラ28は4つ設けられ、搬送方向の上流側に2つ、搬送方向の下流側に2つそれぞれ配置されている。 Each air bearing 141 that supports the rotary shaft AX2 with the bearing portions 140 on both sides rotatably supports the rotary shaft AX2 in a non-contact state. In the present embodiment, the rotary shaft AX2 is supported by the air bearing 141 at both ends of the rotary drum 25. However, a normal bearing using a ball or needle processed with high accuracy may be used. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, the plurality of guide rollers 28 are respectively provided on the upstream side and the downstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P with the rotary drum 25 interposed therebetween. For example, four guide rollers 28 are provided, two on the upstream side in the transport direction and two on the downstream side in the transport direction.
 したがって、基板支持機構12は、位置調整ユニット120から搬送された基板Pを、2つのガイドローラ28により回転ドラム25に案内する。基板支持機構12は、基板側駆動部26により回転軸AX2を介して回転ドラム25を回転させることで、回転ドラム25に導入した基板Pを、回転ドラム25の支持面P2で支持しながら、ガイドローラ28へ向けて搬送する。基板支持機構12は、ガイドローラ28に搬送された基板Pを、基板回収装置4へ向けて案内する。 Therefore, the substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P transported from the position adjustment unit 120 to the rotary drum 25 by the two guide rollers 28. The substrate support mechanism 12 rotates the rotating drum 25 through the rotation axis AX2 by the substrate side driving unit 26, thereby supporting the substrate P introduced into the rotating drum 25 while supporting the substrate P on the support surface P2 of the rotating drum 25. It is conveyed toward the roller 28. The substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P conveyed to the guide roller 28 toward the substrate recovery device 4.
 ここで、基板側駆動部26の構成の一例を、図4を参照して説明する。図4において、基板Pが巻き付けられる回転ドラム25の少なくとも一端側には、回転ドラム25の外周表面25aの半径Rfaと略同一径の円板状のスケール板25cが回転軸AX2と同軸に固設されている。このスケール板25cの外周面には周方向に一定ピッチで回折格子が形成され、その回折格子をエンコーダ計測用の読取りヘッドEHが光学的に検出することによって、回転ドラム25の回転角度、或いは回転ドラム25の表面25aの周方向の移動量が計測される。読取りヘッドEHによって計測される回転ドラム25の回転角度情報等は、回転ドラム25を回転させるモータのサーボ制御のフィードバック信号としても使われる。なお、図4において、変位センサーSG1は、基板Pの表面の高さ位置の変位(径方向変位)を計測するように配置したが、基板Pで覆われない回転ドラム25の端部側の領域25bの表面の高さ位置の変位(径方向変位)を計測するように配置してもよい。 Here, an example of the configuration of the substrate side drive unit 26 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 4, a disk-like scale plate 25c having substantially the same diameter as the radius Rfa of the outer peripheral surface 25a of the rotary drum 25 is fixed coaxially with the rotation axis AX2 on at least one end side of the rotary drum 25 around which the substrate P is wound. Has been. A diffraction grating is formed at a constant pitch in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the scale plate 25c, and the rotation angle or rotation of the rotary drum 25 is detected by optically detecting the diffraction grating by the read head EH for encoder measurement. The amount of movement of the surface 25a of the drum 25 in the circumferential direction is measured. The rotation angle information of the rotary drum 25 measured by the read head EH is also used as a feedback signal for servo control of the motor that rotates the rotary drum 25. In FIG. 4, the displacement sensor SG <b> 1 is arranged so as to measure the displacement (radial displacement) of the height position of the surface of the substrate P, but the region on the end side of the rotary drum 25 that is not covered with the substrate P. You may arrange | position so that the displacement (radial direction displacement) of the height position of the surface of 25b may be measured.
 エアベアリング141で軸支される回転軸AX2の端部側には、回転軸AX2回りのトルクを発生する回転モータの磁石ユニットMUrが環状に配列された回転子RTと、回転軸AX2に軸方向の推力を与えるボイスコイルモータ用の磁石ユニットMUsとが設けられる。図3中の支柱フレーム146に固定される固定子側には、回転子RTの周囲の磁石ユニットMUrと対向するように配置されたコイルユニットCUrと、磁石ユニットMUsを取り巻くように巻かれたコイルユニットCUsとが設けられている。このような構成により、回転軸AX2と一体化された回転ドラム25(およびスケール板25c)を、回転子RTに付与されるトルクによって滑らかに回転させることができる。 On the end side of the rotary shaft AX2 supported by the air bearing 141, a rotor RT in which a magnet unit MUr of a rotary motor that generates torque around the rotary shaft AX2 is annularly arranged and an axial direction on the rotary shaft AX2 And a magnet unit MUs for a voice coil motor that gives a thrust of. On the stator side fixed to the support frame 146 in FIG. 3, a coil unit CUr disposed so as to face the magnet unit MUr around the rotor RT, and a coil wound so as to surround the magnet unit MUs. Units CUs are provided. With such a configuration, the rotating drum 25 (and the scale plate 25c) integrated with the rotating shaft AX2 can be smoothly rotated by the torque applied to the rotor RT.
 また、ボイスコイルモータ(MUs、CUs)は、回転ドラム25が回転中であっても、回転軸AX2の方向(Y方向)の推力を発生するので、回転ドラム25(およびスケール板25c)をY方向に微動させることができる。これにより、走査露光中における基板PのY方向の微小な位置ずれを逐次補正することができる。 Further, since the voice coil motor (MUs, CUs) generates thrust in the direction of the rotation axis AX2 (Y direction) even when the rotary drum 25 is rotating, the rotary drum 25 (and the scale plate 25c) is moved to Y. Can be finely moved in the direction. Thereby, a minute positional shift in the Y direction of the substrate P during scanning exposure can be sequentially corrected.
 なお、図4の構成では、回転軸AX2の端面TpのY方向の変位を計測する変位センサーDT1、またはスケール板25cの端面のY方向の変位を計測する変位センサーDT2が設けられ、走査露光中の回転ドラム25のY方向の位置変化をリアルタイムに逐次計測することができる。したがって、それらの変位センサーDT1、DT2からの計測信号に基づいて、ボイスコイルモータ(MUs、CUs)をサーボ制御するようにすれば、回転ドラム25のY方向の位置を精密に位置決めすることができる。 4 is provided with a displacement sensor DT1 for measuring the displacement in the Y direction of the end surface Tp of the rotation axis AX2, or a displacement sensor DT2 for measuring the displacement in the Y direction of the end surface of the scale plate 25c. The change in the position of the rotary drum 25 in the Y direction can be sequentially measured in real time. Therefore, if the voice coil motors (MUs, CUs) are servo-controlled based on the measurement signals from the displacement sensors DT1, DT2, the position of the rotary drum 25 in the Y direction can be accurately determined. .
 ここで、図6に示すように、第1の実施の形態の露光装置U3は、いわゆるマルチレンズ方式を想定した露光装置である。なお、図6には、マスクステージ21に保持されたマスクM上の照明領域IR(IR1~IR6)を-Z側から見た平面図(図6の左図)と、回転ドラム25に支持された基板P上の投影領域PA(PA1~PA6)を+Z側から見た平面図(図6の右図)とが図示されている。図6中の符号Xsは、マスクステージ21および回転ドラム25の走査方向(回転方向)を示す。マルチレンズ方式の露光装置U3は、マスクM上の複数(第1の実施の形態では例えば6つ)の照明領域IR1~IR6に照明光束EL1をそれぞれ照明し、各照明光束EL1が各照明領域IR1~IR6に照明されることで得られる複数の投影光束EL2を、基板P上の複数(第1の実施の形態では例えば6つ)の投影領域PA1~PA6に投影露光する。 Here, as shown in FIG. 6, the exposure apparatus U3 of the first embodiment is an exposure apparatus assuming a so-called multi-lens system. 6 is a plan view of the illumination area IR (IR1 to IR6) on the mask M held by the mask stage 21 as viewed from the −Z side (left figure in FIG. 6), and is supported by the rotary drum 25. A plan view (right view of FIG. 6) of the projection area PA (PA1 to PA6) on the substrate P viewed from the + Z side is shown. A symbol Xs in FIG. 6 indicates the scanning direction (rotating direction) of the mask stage 21 and the rotating drum 25. The multi-lens type exposure apparatus U3 illuminates the illumination light beam EL1 on a plurality of (for example, six in the first embodiment) illumination regions IR1 to IR6 on the mask M, and each illumination light beam EL1 corresponds to each illumination region IR1. A plurality of projection light beams EL2 obtained by irradiating with IR6 are projected and exposed to a plurality of projection areas PA1 to PA6 (for example, six in the first embodiment) on the substrate P.
 まず、照明機構13により照明される複数の照明領域IR1~IR6について説明する。図6に示すように、複数の照明領域IR1~IR6は、中心面CLを挟んで基板Pの走査方向に2列に配置され、走査方向の上流側のマスクM上に照明領域IR1、IR3、およびIR5が配置され、走査方向の下流側のマスクM上に照明領域IR2、IR4、および、IR6が配置される。各照明領域IR1~IR6は、マスクMの幅方向(Y方向)に延びる平行な短辺および長辺を有する細長い台形状の領域となっている。このとき、台形状の各照明領域IR1~IR6は、その短辺が中心面CL側に位置し、その長辺が外側に位置する領域となっている。奇数番の照明領域IR1、IR3、および、IR5は、Y方向に所定の間隔を空けて配置されている。また、偶数番の照明領域IR2、IR4、および、IR6は、Y方向に所定の間隔を空けて配置されている。このとき、照明領域IR2は、Y方向において、照明領域IR1と照明領域IR3との間に配置される。同様に、照明領域IR3は、Y方向において、照明領域IR2と照明領域IR4との間に配置される。照明領域IR4は、Y方向において、照明領域IR3と照明領域IR5との間に配置される。照明領域IR5は、Y方向において、照明領域IR4と照明領域IR6との間に配置される。各照明領域IR1~IR6は、マスクMの走査方向からみて、隣り合う台形状の照明領域の斜辺部の三角部が重なるように(オーバーラップするように)配置されている。なお、第1の実施の形態において、各照明領域IR1~IR6は、台形状の領域としたが、長方形状の領域でもあってよい。 First, the plurality of illumination areas IR1 to IR6 illuminated by the illumination mechanism 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the plurality of illumination regions IR1 to IR6 are arranged in two rows in the scanning direction of the substrate P across the center plane CL, and the illumination regions IR1, IR3,. And IR5 are arranged, and illumination regions IR2, IR4, and IR6 are arranged on the mask M on the downstream side in the scanning direction. Each of the illumination regions IR1 to IR6 is an elongated trapezoidal region having parallel short sides and long sides extending in the width direction (Y direction) of the mask M. At this time, each of the trapezoidal illumination areas IR1 to IR6 is an area where the short side is located on the center plane CL side and the long side is located outside. The odd-numbered illumination areas IR1, IR3, and IR5 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the Y direction. The even-numbered illumination areas IR2, IR4, and IR6 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the Y direction. At this time, the illumination area IR2 is arranged between the illumination area IR1 and the illumination area IR3 in the Y direction. Similarly, the illumination area IR3 is arranged between the illumination area IR2 and the illumination area IR4 in the Y direction. The illumination area IR4 is arranged between the illumination area IR3 and the illumination area IR5 in the Y direction. The illumination area IR5 is arranged between the illumination area IR4 and the illumination area IR6 in the Y direction. The illumination areas IR1 to IR6 are arranged so that the triangular portions of the hypotenuses of adjacent trapezoidal illumination areas overlap each other when viewed from the scanning direction of the mask M. In the first embodiment, each of the illumination areas IR1 to IR6 is a trapezoidal area, but may be a rectangular area.
 また、マスクMは、マスクパターンが形成されるパターン形成領域A3と、マスクパターンが形成されないパターン非形成領域A4とを有する。パターン非形成領域A4は、照明光束EL1を吸収する低反射領域であり、パターン形成領域A3を枠状に囲んで配置されている。照明領域IR1~IR6は、パターン形成領域A3のY方向の全幅をカバーするように、配置されている。 The mask M has a pattern formation area A3 where a mask pattern is formed and a pattern non-formation area A4 where a mask pattern is not formed. The pattern non-formation region A4 is a low reflection region that absorbs the illumination light beam EL1, and is arranged so as to surround the pattern formation region A3 in a frame shape. The illumination areas IR1 to IR6 are arranged so as to cover the entire width of the pattern formation area A3 in the Y direction.
 照明機構13は、マスクMに照明される照明光束EL1を出射する。照明機構13は、光源装置および照明光学系ILを備える。光源装置は、例えば水銀ランプ等のランプ光源、レーザーダイオード、または、発光ダイオード(LED)等の固体光源を含む。光源装置が射出する照明光は、例えばランプ光源から射出される輝線(g線、h線、i線)、KrFエキシマレーザ光(波長248nm)等の遠紫外光(DUV光)、ArFエキシマレーザ光(波長193nm)等である。光源装置から射出された照明光は、照度分布が均一化されて、例えば光ファイバー等の導光部材を介して照明光学系ILに導かれる。 The illumination mechanism 13 emits an illumination light beam EL1 that is illuminated by the mask M. The illumination mechanism 13 includes a light source device and an illumination optical system IL. The light source device includes, for example, a lamp light source such as a mercury lamp, a solid-state light source such as a laser diode or a light emitting diode (LED). Illumination light emitted from the light source device includes, for example, bright lines (g-line, h-line, i-line) emitted from a lamp light source, far-ultraviolet light (DUV light) such as KrF excimer laser light (wavelength 248 nm), and ArF excimer laser light. (Wavelength 193 nm). The illumination light emitted from the light source device has a uniform illuminance distribution and is guided to the illumination optical system IL via a light guide member such as an optical fiber.
 照明光学系ILは、複数の照明領域IR1~IR6に応じて複数(第1の実施の形態では例えば6つ)の照明モジュールIL1~IL6が設けられている。複数の照明モジュールIL1~IL6には、光源装置からの照明光束EL1がそれぞれ入射する。各照明モジュールIL1~IL6は、光源装置から入射された照明光束EL1を、各照明領域IR1~IR6にそれぞれ導く。つまり、照明モジュールIL1は、照明光束EL1を照明領域IR1に導き、同様に、照明モジュールIL2~IL6は、照明光束EL1を照明領域IR2~IR6に導く。複数の照明モジュールIL1~IL6は、中心面CLを挟んでマスクMの走査方向に2列に配置される。照明モジュールIL1、IL3、および、IL5は、中心面CLに対して、照明領域IR1、IR3、および、IR5が配置される側(図5の左側)に配置される。照明モジュールIL1、IL3、および、IL5は、Y方向に所定の間隔を空けて配置される。また、照明モジュールIL2、IL4、および、IL6は、中心面CLに対して、照明領域IR2、IR4、および、IR6が配置される側(図5の右側)に配置される。照明モジュールIL2、IL4、および、IL6は、Y方向に所定の間隔を空けて配置される。このとき、照明モジュールIL2は、Y方向において、照明モジュールIL1と照明モジュールIL3との間に配置される。同様に、照明モジュールIL3は、Y方向において、照明モジュールIL2と照明モジュールIL4との間に配置される。照明モジュールIL4は、Y方向において、照明モジュールIL3と照明モジュールIL5との間に配置される。照明モジュールIL5は、Y方向において、照明モジュールIL4と照明モジュールIL6との間に配置される。また、照明モジュールIL1、IL3、および、IL5と、照明モジュールIL2、IL4、および、IL6とは、Y方向からみて中心面CLを中心に対称に配置されている。 The illumination optical system IL is provided with a plurality (for example, six in the first embodiment) of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 corresponding to the plurality of illumination regions IR1 to IR6. The illumination light beam EL1 from the light source device is incident on each of the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6. Each of the illumination modules IL1 to IL6 guides the illumination light beam EL1 incident from the light source device to each of the illumination regions IR1 to IR6. That is, the illumination module IL1 guides the illumination light beam EL1 to the illumination region IR1, and similarly, the illumination modules IL2 to IL6 guide the illumination light beam EL1 to the illumination regions IR2 to IR6. The plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 are arranged in two rows in the scanning direction of the mask M across the center plane CL. The illumination modules IL1, IL3, and IL5 are arranged on the side (left side in FIG. 5) where the illumination regions IR1, IR3, and IR5 are arranged with respect to the center plane CL. The illumination modules IL1, IL3, and IL5 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the Y direction. The illumination modules IL2, IL4, and IL6 are arranged on the side (right side in FIG. 5) where the illumination regions IR2, IR4, and IR6 are arranged with respect to the center plane CL. The illumination modules IL2, IL4, and IL6 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the Y direction. At this time, the illumination module IL2 is disposed between the illumination module IL1 and the illumination module IL3 in the Y direction. Similarly, the illumination module IL3 is disposed between the illumination module IL2 and the illumination module IL4 in the Y direction. The illumination module IL4 is disposed between the illumination module IL3 and the illumination module IL5 in the Y direction. The illumination module IL5 is disposed between the illumination module IL4 and the illumination module IL6 in the Y direction. The illumination modules IL1, IL3, and IL5 and the illumination modules IL2, IL4, and IL6 are symmetrically arranged with respect to the center plane CL as viewed from the Y direction.
 複数の照明モジュールIL1~IL6のそれぞれは、例えばインテグレータ光学系、ロッドレンズ、フライアイレンズ等の複数の光学部材を含み、均一な照度分布の照明光束EL1によって各照明領域IR1~IR6を照明する。第1の実施の形態において、複数の照明モジュールIL1~IL6は、マスクMのZ方向における上方側に配置されている。複数の照明モジュールIL1~IL6のそれぞれは、マスクMの上方側からマスクMに形成されたマスクパターンの各照明領域IRを照明する。 Each of the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 includes a plurality of optical members such as an integrator optical system, a rod lens, and a fly-eye lens, and illuminates each of the illumination regions IR1 to IR6 with an illumination light beam EL1 having a uniform illuminance distribution. In the first embodiment, the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 are arranged above the mask M in the Z direction. Each of the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6 illuminates each illumination region IR of the mask pattern formed on the mask M from above the mask M.
 次に、投影光学系PLにより投影露光される複数の投影領域PA1~PA6について説明する。図6に示すように、基板P上の複数の投影領域PA1~PA6は、マスクM上の複数の照明領域IR1~IR6と対応させて配置されている。つまり、基板P上の複数の投影領域PA1~PA6は、中心面CLを挟んで搬送方向に2列に配置され、搬送方向(走査方向)の上流側の基板P上に投影領域PA1、PA3、および、PA5が配置され、搬送方向の下流側の基板P上に投影領域PA2、PA4、および、PA6が配置される。各投影領域PA1~PA6は、基板Pの幅方向(Y方向)に延びる短辺および長辺を有する細長い台形状の領域となっている。このとき、台形状の各投影領域PA1~PA6は、その短辺が中心面CL側に位置し、その長辺が外側に位置する領域となっている。投影領域PA1、PA3、および、PA5は、幅方向に所定の間隔を空けて配置されている。また、投影領域PA2、PA4、および、PA6は、幅方向に所定の間隔を空けて配置されている。このとき、投影領域PA2は、回転軸AX2の軸方向において、投影領域PA1と投影領域PA3との間に配置される。同様に、投影領域PA3は、回転軸AX2の軸方向において、投影領域PA2と投影領域PA4との間に配置される。投影領域PA4は、回転軸AX2の軸方向において、投影領域PA3と投影領域PA5との間に配置される。投影領域PA5は、回転軸AX2の軸方向において、投影領域PA4と投影領域PA6との間に配置される。各投影領域PA1~PA6は、各照明領域IR1~IR6と同様に、基板Pの搬送方向からみて、隣り合う台形状の投影領域PAの斜辺部の三角部が重なるように(オーバーラップするように)配置されている。このとき、投影領域PAは、隣り合う投影領域PAの重複する領域での露光量が、重複しない領域での露光量と実質的に同じになるような形状になっている。そして、投影領域PA1~PA6は、基板P上に露光される露光領域A7のY方向の全幅をカバーするように、配置されている。 Next, a plurality of projection areas PA1 to PA6 that are projected and exposed by the projection optical system PL will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the plurality of projection areas PA1 to PA6 on the substrate P are arranged in correspondence with the plurality of illumination areas IR1 to IR6 on the mask M. That is, the plurality of projection areas PA1 to PA6 on the substrate P are arranged in two rows in the transport direction across the center plane CL, and the projection areas PA1, PA3, PA3, PA3 are arranged on the upstream substrate P in the transport direction (scanning direction). PA5 is arranged, and projection areas PA2, PA4, and PA6 are arranged on the substrate P on the downstream side in the transport direction. Each of the projection areas PA1 to PA6 is an elongated trapezoidal area having a short side and a long side extending in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P. At this time, each of the trapezoidal projection areas PA1 to PA6 is an area where the short side is located on the center plane CL side and the long side is located outside. The projection areas PA1, PA3, and PA5 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the width direction. Further, the projection areas PA2, PA4, and PA6 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the width direction. At this time, the projection area PA2 is arranged between the projection area PA1 and the projection area PA3 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. Similarly, the projection area PA3 is disposed between the projection area PA2 and the projection area PA4 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. The projection area PA4 is disposed between the projection area PA3 and the projection area PA5 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. The projection area PA5 is disposed between the projection area PA4 and the projection area PA6 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. As in the illumination areas IR1 to IR6, the projection areas PA1 to PA6 are overlapped so that the triangular portions of the oblique sides of the adjacent trapezoidal projection areas PA overlap each other when viewed from the transport direction of the substrate P. ) Is arranged. At this time, the projection area PA has such a shape that the exposure amount in the area where the adjacent projection areas PA overlap is substantially the same as the exposure amount in the non-overlapping area. The projection areas PA1 to PA6 are arranged so as to cover the entire width in the Y direction of the exposure area A7 exposed on the substrate P.
 ここで、図5において、XZ面内で見たとき、マスクM上の照明領域IR1(およびIR3、IR5)の中心点から照明領域IR2(およびIR4、IR6)の中心点までの長さは、支持面P2に倣った基板P上の投影領域PA1(およびPA3、PA5)の中心点から投影領域PA2(およびPA4、PA6)の中心点までの周長と、実質的に等しく設定されている。 Here, in FIG. 5, when viewed in the XZ plane, the length from the center point of the illumination area IR1 (and IR3, IR5) on the mask M to the center point of the illumination area IR2 (and IR4, IR6) is The circumferential length from the center point of the projection area PA1 (and PA3, PA5) on the substrate P following the support surface P2 to the center point of the projection area PA2 (and PA4, PA6) is set to be substantially equal.
 また、図5に示すように、投影光学系PLは、複数の投影領域PA1~PA6に応じて複数(第1の実施の形態では例えば6つ)の投影モジュールPL1~PL6が設けられている。複数の投影モジュールPL1~PL6には、複数の照明領域IR1~IR6からの複数の投影光束EL2がそれぞれ入射する。各投影モジュールPL1~PL6は、マスクMからの各投影光束EL2を、各投影領域PA1~PA6にそれぞれ導く。つまり、投影モジュールPL1は、照明領域IR1からの投影光束EL2を投影領域PA1に導き、同様に、投影モジュールPL2~PL6は、照明領域IR2~IR6からの各投影光束EL2を投影領域PA2~PA6に導く。複数の投影モジュールPL1~PL6は、中心面CLを挟んでマスクMの走査方向に2列に配置される。投影モジュールPL1、PL3、および、PL5は、中心面CLに対して、投影領域PA1、PA3、および、PA5が配置される側(図5の左側)に配置される。投影モジュールPL1、PL3、および、PL5は、Y方向に所定の間隔を空けて配置される。また、投影モジュールPL2、PL4、および、PL6は、中心面CLに対して、投影領域PA2、PA4、および、PA6が配置される側(図5の右側)に配置される。投影モジュールPL2、PL4、および、PL6は、Y方向に所定の間隔を空けて配置される。このとき、投影モジュールPL2は、回転軸AX2の軸方向において、投影モジュールPL1と投影モジュールPL3との間に配置される。同様に、投影モジュールPL3は、回転軸AX2の軸方向において、投影モジュールPL2と投影モジュールPL4との間に配置される。投影モジュールPL4は、回転軸AX2の軸方向において、投影モジュールPL3と投影モジュールPL5との間に配置される。投影モジュールPL5は、回転軸AX2の軸方向において、投影モジュールPL4と投影モジュールPL6との間に配置される。また、投影モジュールPL1、PL3、および、PL5と、投影モジュールPL2、PL4、および、PL6とは、Y方向からみて中心面CLを中心に対称に配置されている。 Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the projection optical system PL is provided with a plurality (for example, six in the first embodiment) of projection modules PL1 to PL6 corresponding to the plurality of projection areas PA1 to PA6. A plurality of projection light beams EL2 from the plurality of illumination regions IR1 to IR6 are incident on the plurality of projection modules PL1 to PL6, respectively. Each projection module PL1 to PL6 guides each projection light beam EL2 from the mask M to each projection area PA1 to PA6. That is, the projection module PL1 guides the projection light beam EL2 from the illumination region IR1 to the projection region PA1, and similarly, the projection modules PL2 to PL6 each project the projection light beam EL2 from the illumination regions IR2 to IR6 to the projection regions PA2 to PA6. Lead. The plurality of projection modules PL1 to PL6 are arranged in two rows in the scanning direction of the mask M across the center plane CL. Projection modules PL1, PL3, and PL5 are arranged on the side (left side in FIG. 5) on which projection areas PA1, PA3, and PA5 are arranged with respect to center plane CL. Projection modules PL1, PL3, and PL5 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the Y direction. Further, the projection modules PL2, PL4, and PL6 are arranged on the side where the projection areas PA2, PA4, and PA6 are arranged (right side in FIG. 5) with respect to the center plane CL. Projection modules PL2, PL4, and PL6 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the Y direction. At this time, the projection module PL2 is disposed between the projection module PL1 and the projection module PL3 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. Similarly, the projection module PL3 is disposed between the projection module PL2 and the projection module PL4 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. The projection module PL4 is disposed between the projection module PL3 and the projection module PL5 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. The projection module PL5 is disposed between the projection module PL4 and the projection module PL6 in the axial direction of the rotation axis AX2. Further, the projection modules PL1, PL3, and PL5 and the projection modules PL2, PL4, and PL6 are arranged symmetrically about the center plane CL as viewed from the Y direction.
 複数の投影モジュールPL1~PL6は、複数の照明モジュールIL1~IL6に対応して設けられている。つまり、投影モジュールPL1は、照明モジュールIL1によって照明される照明領域IR1のマスクパターンの像を、基板P上の投影領域PA1に投影する。同様に、投影モジュールPL2~PL6は、照明モジュールIL2~IL6によって照明される照明領域IR2~IR6のマスクパターンの像を、基板P上の投影領域PA2~PA6に投影する。 The plurality of projection modules PL1 to PL6 are provided corresponding to the plurality of illumination modules IL1 to IL6. That is, the projection module PL1 projects an image of the mask pattern of the illumination area IR1 illuminated by the illumination module IL1 onto the projection area PA1 on the substrate P. Similarly, the projection modules PL2 to PL6 project the mask pattern images of the illumination areas IR2 to IR6 illuminated by the illumination modules IL2 to IL6 onto the projection areas PA2 to PA6 on the substrate P.
 次に、図7を参照して、各投影モジュールPL1~PL6について説明する。なお、各投影モジュールPL1~PL6は、同様の構成となっているため、投影モジュールPL1を例に説明する。 Next, the projection modules PL1 to PL6 will be described with reference to FIG. Since each of the projection modules PL1 to PL6 has the same configuration, the projection module PL1 will be described as an example.
 投影モジュールPL1は、マスクM上の照明領域IR(照明領域IR1)におけるマスクパターンの像を、基板P上の投影領域PAに投影する。図7に示すように、投影モジュールPL1は、照明領域IRにおけるマスクパターンの像を中間像面P7に結像する第1光学系61と、第1光学系61により結像した中間像の少なくとも一部を基板Pの投影領域PAに再結像する第2光学系62と、中間像が形成される中間像面P7に配置された投影視野絞り63とを備える。また、投影モジュールPL1は、フォーカス補正光学部材64と、像シフト用光学部材65と、倍率補正用光学部材66と、ローテーション補正機構67とを備える。 The projection module PL1 projects an image of the mask pattern in the illumination area IR (illumination area IR1) on the mask M onto the projection area PA on the substrate P. As shown in FIG. 7, the projection module PL1 includes a first optical system 61 that forms an image of the mask pattern in the illumination region IR on the intermediate image plane P7, and at least one of the intermediate images formed by the first optical system 61. A second optical system 62 that re-images the image on the projection area PA of the substrate P, and a projection field stop 63 disposed on the intermediate image plane P7 on which the intermediate image is formed. The projection module PL1 includes a focus correction optical member 64, an image shift optical member 65, a magnification correction optical member 66, and a rotation correction mechanism 67.
 第1光学系61および第2光学系62は、例えばダイソン系を変形したテレセントリックな反射屈折光学系である。第1光学系61は、その光軸(以下、第2光軸BX2という)が中心面CLに対して実質的に直交する。第1光学系61は、第1偏向部材70と、第1レンズ群71と、第1凹面鏡72とを備える。第1偏向部材70は、第1反射面P3と第2反射面P4とを有する三角プリズムである。第1反射面P3は、マスクMからの投影光束EL2を反射させ、反射させた投影光束EL2を第1レンズ群71を通って第1凹面鏡72に入射させる面となっている。第2反射面P4は、第1凹面鏡72で反射された投影光束EL2が第1レンズ群71を通って入射し、入射した投影光束EL2を投影視野絞り63へ向けて反射する面となっている。第1レンズ群71は、各種レンズを含み、各種レンズの光軸は、第2光軸BX2上に配置されている。第1凹面鏡72は、フライアイレンズにより生成された多数の点光源が、フライアイレンズから照明視野絞りを介して第1凹面鏡72に至る各種レンズによって結像する瞳面に配置されている。 The first optical system 61 and the second optical system 62 are, for example, telecentric catadioptric optical systems obtained by modifying a Dyson system. The first optical system 61 has its optical axis (hereinafter referred to as the second optical axis BX2) substantially orthogonal to the center plane CL. The first optical system 61 includes a first deflecting member 70, a first lens group 71, and a first concave mirror 72. The first deflecting member 70 is a triangular prism having a first reflecting surface P3 and a second reflecting surface P4. The first reflecting surface P3 is a surface that reflects the projection light beam EL2 from the mask M and causes the reflected projection light beam EL2 to enter the first concave mirror 72 through the first lens group 71. The second reflecting surface P4 is a surface on which the projection light beam EL2 reflected by the first concave mirror 72 enters through the first lens group 71 and reflects the incident projection light beam EL2 toward the projection field stop 63. . The first lens group 71 includes various lenses, and the optical axes of the various lenses are disposed on the second optical axis BX2. The first concave mirror 72 is arranged on a pupil plane on which a large number of point light sources generated by the fly-eye lens are imaged by various lenses from the fly-eye lens to the first concave mirror 72 via the illumination field stop.
 マスクMからの投影光束EL2は、フォーカス補正光学部材64および像シフト用光学部材65を通過し、第1偏向部材70の第1反射面P3で反射され、第1レンズ群71の上半分の視野領域を通って第1凹面鏡72に入射する。第1凹面鏡72に入射した投影光束EL2は、第1凹面鏡72で反射され、第1レンズ群71の下半分の視野領域を通って第1偏向部材70の第2反射面P4に入射する。第2反射面P4に入射した投影光束EL2は、第2反射面P4で反射され、投影視野絞り63に入射する。 The projection light beam EL2 from the mask M passes through the focus correction optical member 64 and the image shift optical member 65, is reflected by the first reflecting surface P3 of the first deflecting member 70, and is the upper half field of view of the first lens group 71. The light enters the first concave mirror 72 through the region. The projection light beam EL2 incident on the first concave mirror 72 is reflected by the first concave mirror 72, passes through the lower half field of view of the first lens group 71, and enters the second reflective surface P4 of the first deflecting member 70. The projection light beam EL2 incident on the second reflecting surface P4 is reflected by the second reflecting surface P4 and enters the projection field stop 63.
 投影視野絞り63は、投影領域PAの形状を規定する開口を有する。すなわち、投影視野絞り63の開口の形状が投影領域PAの形状を規定することになる。 The projection field stop 63 has an opening that defines the shape of the projection area PA. That is, the shape of the opening of the projection field stop 63 defines the shape of the projection area PA.
 第2光学系62は、第1光学系61と同様の構成であり、中間像面P7を挟んで第1光学系61と対称に設けられている。第2光学系62は、その光軸(以下、第3光軸BX3という)が中心面CLに対して実質的に直交し、第2光軸BX2と平行になっている。第2光学系62は、第2偏向部材80と、第2レンズ群81と、第2凹面鏡82とを備える。第2偏向部材80は、第3反射面P5と第4反射面P6とを有する。第3反射面P5は、投影視野絞り63からの投影光束EL2を反射させ、反射させた投影光束EL2を第2レンズ群81を通って第2凹面鏡82に入射させる面となっている。第4反射面P6は、第2凹面鏡82で反射された投影光束EL2が第2レンズ群81を通って入射し、入射した投影光束EL2を投影領域PAへ向けて反射する面となっている。第2レンズ群81は、各種レンズを含み、各種レンズの光軸は、第3光軸BX3上に配置されている。第2凹面鏡82は、第1凹面鏡72において結像した多数の点光源像が、第1凹面鏡72から投影視野絞り63を介して第2凹面鏡82に至る各種レンズによって結像する瞳面に配置されている。 The second optical system 62 has the same configuration as that of the first optical system 61, and is provided symmetrically with the first optical system 61 with the intermediate image plane P7 interposed therebetween. The second optical system 62 has an optical axis (hereinafter referred to as a third optical axis BX3) that is substantially perpendicular to the center plane CL and parallel to the second optical axis BX2. The second optical system 62 includes a second deflecting member 80, a second lens group 81, and a second concave mirror 82. The second deflecting member 80 has a third reflecting surface P5 and a fourth reflecting surface P6. The third reflecting surface P5 is a surface that reflects the projection light beam EL2 from the projection field stop 63 and causes the reflected projection light beam EL2 to enter the second concave mirror 82 through the second lens group 81. The fourth reflecting surface P6 is a surface on which the projection light beam EL2 reflected by the second concave mirror 82 enters through the second lens group 81 and reflects the incident projection light beam EL2 toward the projection area PA. The second lens group 81 includes various lenses, and the optical axes of the various lenses are disposed on the third optical axis BX3. The second concave mirror 82 is arranged on a pupil plane on which a large number of point light source images formed by the first concave mirror 72 are imaged by various lenses from the first concave mirror 72 through the projection field stop 63 to the second concave mirror 82. ing.
 投影視野絞り63からの投影光束EL2は、第2偏向部材80の第3反射面P5で反射され、第2レンズ群81の上半分の視野領域を通って第2凹面鏡82に入射する。第2凹面鏡82に入射した投影光束EL2は、第2凹面鏡82で反射され、第2レンズ群81の下半分の視野領域を通って第2偏向部材80の第4反射面P6に入射する。第4反射面P6に入射した投影光束EL2は、第4反射面P6で反射され、倍率補正用光学部材66を通過し、投影領域PAに投射される。これにより、照明領域IRにおけるマスクパターンの像は、投影領域PAに等倍(×1)で投影される。 The projection light beam EL2 from the projection field stop 63 is reflected by the third reflecting surface P5 of the second deflecting member 80, and enters the second concave mirror 82 through the upper half field region of the second lens group 81. The projection light beam EL <b> 2 that has entered the second concave mirror 82 is reflected by the second concave mirror 82, passes through the lower half field of view of the second lens group 81, and enters the fourth reflecting surface P <b> 6 of the second deflecting member 80. The projection light beam EL2 incident on the fourth reflection surface P6 is reflected by the fourth reflection surface P6, passes through the magnification correction optical member 66, and is projected onto the projection area PA. Thereby, the image of the mask pattern in the illumination area IR is projected to the projection area PA at the same magnification (× 1).
 フォーカス補正光学部材64は、マスクMと第1光学系61との間に配置されている。フォーカス補正光学部材64は、基板P上に投影されるマスクパターンの像のフォーカス状態を調整する。フォーカス補正光学部材64は、例えば、2枚のクサビ状のプリズムを逆向き(図7ではX方向について逆向き)にして、全体として透明な平行平板になるように重ね合わせたものである。この1対のプリズムを互いに対向する面間の間隔を変えずに斜面方向にスライドさせることにより、平行平板としての厚みを可変にする。これによって第1光学系61の実効的な光路長を微調整し、中間像面P7および投影領域PAに形成されるマスクパターンの像のピント状態が微調整される。 The focus correction optical member 64 is disposed between the mask M and the first optical system 61. The focus correction optical member 64 adjusts the focus state of the mask pattern image projected onto the substrate P. For example, the focus correction optical member 64 is formed by superposing two wedge-shaped prisms in opposite directions (in the opposite direction in the X direction in FIG. 7) so as to form a transparent parallel plate as a whole. By sliding the pair of prisms in the direction of the slope without changing the distance between the faces facing each other, the thickness of the parallel plate is made variable. As a result, the effective optical path length of the first optical system 61 is finely adjusted, and the focus state of the mask pattern image formed on the intermediate image plane P7 and the projection area PA is finely adjusted.
 像シフト用光学部材65は、マスクMと第1光学系61との間に配置されている。像シフト用光学部材65は、基板P上に投影されるマスクパターンの像を像面内において移動可能に調整する。像シフト用光学部材65は、図6のXZ面内で傾斜可能な透明な平行平板ガラスと、図7のYZ面内で傾斜可能な透明な平行平板ガラスとで構成される。その2枚の平行平板ガラスの各傾斜量を調整することで、中間像面P7および投影領域PAに形成されるマスクパターンの像をX方向やY方向に微少シフトさせることができる。 The image shift optical member 65 is disposed between the mask M and the first optical system 61. The image shift optical member 65 adjusts the image of the mask pattern projected onto the substrate P so as to be movable in the image plane. The image shifting optical member 65 is composed of a transparent parallel flat glass that can be tilted in the XZ plane of FIG. 6 and a transparent parallel flat glass that can be tilted in the YZ plane of FIG. By adjusting the respective tilt amounts of the two parallel flat glass plates, the image of the mask pattern formed on the intermediate image plane P7 and the projection area PA can be slightly shifted in the X direction and the Y direction.
 倍率補正用光学部材66は、第2偏向部材80と基板Pとの間に配置されている。倍率補正用光学部材66は、例えば、凹レンズ、凸レンズ、凹レンズの3枚を所定間隔で同軸に配置し、前後の凹レンズは固定して、間の凸レンズを光軸(主光線)方向に移動させるように構成したものである。これによって、投影領域PAに形成されるマスクパターンの像は、テレセントリックな結像状態を維持しつつ、等方的に微少量だけ拡大または縮小される。なお、倍率補正用光学部材66を構成する3枚のレンズ群の光軸は、投影光束EL2の主光線と平行になるようにXZ面内では傾けられている。 The magnification correcting optical member 66 is disposed between the second deflection member 80 and the substrate P. In the magnification correcting optical member 66, for example, a concave lens, a convex lens, and a concave lens are arranged coaxially at predetermined intervals, the front and rear concave lenses are fixed, and the convex lens between them is moved in the optical axis (principal ray) direction. It is configured. As a result, the mask pattern image formed in the projection area PA is isotropically enlarged or reduced by a small amount while maintaining a telecentric imaging state. The optical axes of the three lens groups constituting the magnification correcting optical member 66 are inclined in the XZ plane so as to be parallel to the principal ray of the projection light beam EL2.
 ローテーション補正機構67は、例えば、アクチュエータ(図示略)によって、第1偏向部材70を第2光軸BX2と垂直な軸周りに微少回転させるものである。このローテーション補正機構67は、第1偏向部材70を回転させることによって、中間像面P7に形成されるマスクパターンの像を、その面P7内で微少回転させることができる。 The rotation correction mechanism 67 is a mechanism that slightly rotates the first deflecting member 70 around an axis perpendicular to the second optical axis BX2 by an actuator (not shown), for example. The rotation correction mechanism 67 can slightly rotate the image of the mask pattern formed on the intermediate image plane P7 by rotating the first deflection member 70 within the plane P7.
 このように構成された投影モジュールPL1~PL6において、マスクMからの投影光束EL2は、照明領域IRからマスク面P1の法線方向に出射し、第1光学系61に入射する。第1光学系61に入射した投影光束EL2は、フォーカス補正光学部材64および像シフト用光学部材65を透過して、第1光学系61の第1偏向部材70の第1反射面(平面鏡)P3で反射され、第1レンズ群71を通って第1凹面鏡72で反射される。第1凹面鏡72で反射された投影光束EL2は、再び第1レンズ群71を通って第1偏向部材70の第2反射面(平面鏡)P4で反射されて、投影視野絞り63に入射する。投影視野絞り63を通った投影光束EL2は、第2光学系62の第2偏向部材80の第3反射面(平面鏡)P5で反射され、第2レンズ群81を通って第2凹面鏡82で反射される。第2凹面鏡82で反射された投影光束EL2は、再び第2レンズ群81を通って第2偏向部材80の第4反射面(平面鏡)P6で反射されて、倍率補正用光学部材66に入射する。倍率補正用光学部材66から出射した投影光束EL2は、基板P上の投影領域PAに入射し、照明領域IR内に現れるマスクパターンの像が投影領域PAに等倍(×1)で投影される。 In the thus configured projection modules PL1 to PL6, the projection light beam EL2 from the mask M exits from the illumination area IR in the normal direction of the mask surface P1 and enters the first optical system 61. The projection light beam EL2 incident on the first optical system 61 is transmitted through the focus correction optical member 64 and the image shift optical member 65, and the first reflection surface (plane mirror) P3 of the first deflection member 70 of the first optical system 61. And is reflected by the first concave mirror 72 through the first lens group 71. The projection light beam EL2 reflected by the first concave mirror 72 passes through the first lens group 71 again, is reflected by the second reflecting surface (plane mirror) P4 of the first deflecting member 70, and enters the projection field stop 63. The projection light beam EL2 that has passed through the projection field stop 63 is reflected by the third reflecting surface (planar mirror) P5 of the second deflecting member 80 of the second optical system 62, and then reflected by the second concave mirror 82 through the second lens group 81. Is done. The projection light beam EL2 reflected by the second concave mirror 82 passes through the second lens group 81 again, is reflected by the fourth reflecting surface (plane mirror) P6 of the second deflecting member 80, and enters the magnification correcting optical member 66. . The projection light beam EL2 emitted from the magnification correcting optical member 66 is incident on the projection area PA on the substrate P, and an image of the mask pattern appearing in the illumination area IR is projected to the projection area PA at the same magnification (× 1). .
<駆動ユニットの制御>
 次に、図3を参照して、駆動ユニット122の制御について説明する。駆動ユニット122は、設置面E上に設置される支柱フレーム146に取り付けられたマスク側駆動部22と、基板側駆動部26とを含んで構成されている。
<Control of drive unit>
Next, control of the drive unit 122 will be described with reference to FIG. The drive unit 122 includes a mask side drive unit 22 attached to a support frame 146 installed on the installation surface E, and a substrate side drive unit 26.
 先に説明した通り、マスク側駆動部22は、支柱フレーム146にX方向に延設するように固定されるリニアモータの磁石トラック(固定子)と、マスクステージ21に結合される伝達部材23に固定されて、その磁石トラックと一定のギャップで対向するリニアモータのコイルユニット(可動子)とで構成される。また、基板側駆動部26は、先の図4に示したように、支柱フレーム146側に固定子として固定されたコイルユニットCUrと、回転ドラム25の回転軸AX2側の回転子RTに可動子として固定された磁石ユニットMUrとで構成される回転モータと、支柱フレーム146側から回転ドラム25に回転軸AX2の方向(Y方向)への推力を付与するボイスコイルモータ(MUs、CUs)とを含む。このように、マスク側駆動部22および基板側駆動部26は、非接触で伝達部材23および回転軸AX2に直接的に動力を伝達可能な構成(ダイレクトドライブ方式)であるが、上記の構成に限らない。例えば、基板側駆動部26は、電動モータと磁気歯車とを有し、電動モータを支柱フレーム146側に固定し、電動モータの出力軸と回転軸AX2との間に磁気歯車を介設してもよい。 As described above, the mask side drive unit 22 is connected to the linear motor magnet track (stator) fixed to the column frame 146 so as to extend in the X direction, and the transmission member 23 coupled to the mask stage 21. It is composed of a linear motor coil unit (movable element) that is fixed and faces the magnet track with a certain gap. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the board side drive unit 26 includes a coil unit CUr fixed as a stator on the column frame 146 side, and a mover on the rotor RT on the rotation axis AX2 side of the rotary drum 25. And a voice coil motor (MUs, CUs) that applies thrust in the direction of the rotation axis AX2 (Y direction) to the rotary drum 25 from the support frame 146 side. Including. As described above, the mask side drive unit 22 and the substrate side drive unit 26 have a configuration capable of transmitting power directly to the transmission member 23 and the rotation shaft AX2 in a non-contact manner (direct drive method). Not exclusively. For example, the board-side drive unit 26 includes an electric motor and a magnetic gear, and the electric motor is fixed to the support frame 146 side, and a magnetic gear is interposed between the output shaft of the electric motor and the rotation shaft AX2. Also good.
 以上のような駆動ユニット122の構成において、図5に示した下位制御装置16は、マスクステージ21と回転ドラム25とを同期させて移動させる。このため、マスクMのマスク面P1に形成されたマスクパターンの像が、回転ドラム25の支持面P2(図4中の25a)に巻き付けられた基板Pの表面(円周面に倣って湾曲した面)に連続的に繰り返し投影露光される。第1の実施の形態の露光装置U3では、マスクMの+X方向への同期移動で走査露光を行った後、-X方向の初期位置にマスクMを戻す動作(巻戻し)が必要となる。そのため、回転ドラム25を一定速度で連続回転させて基板Pを等速で送り続ける場合、マスクMの巻戻し動作の間、基板P上にはパターン露光が行われず、基板Pの搬送方向に関してパネル用パターンが飛び飛びに(離間して)形成されることになる。しかしながら、実用上、走査露光時の基板Pの速度(ここでは周速)とマスクMの速度は50mm/s~100mm/sと想定されていることから、マスクMの巻戻しの際にマスクステージ21を、例えば500mm/sの最高速で駆動すれば、基板P上に形成されるパネル用パターン間の搬送方向に関する余白を狭くすることができる。 In the configuration of the drive unit 122 as described above, the lower-level control device 16 shown in FIG. 5 moves the mask stage 21 and the rotary drum 25 in synchronization. For this reason, the image of the mask pattern formed on the mask surface P1 of the mask M is curved following the surface (circumferential surface) of the substrate P wound around the support surface P2 (25a in FIG. 4) of the rotary drum 25. Surface) is continuously and repeatedly exposed to projection. In the exposure apparatus U3 of the first embodiment, after performing scanning exposure by synchronous movement of the mask M in the + X direction, an operation (rewinding) of returning the mask M to the initial position in the −X direction is required. Therefore, when the rotating drum 25 is continuously rotated at a constant speed and the substrate P is continuously fed at a constant speed, the pattern exposure is not performed on the substrate P during the rewinding operation of the mask M, and the panel P is transported in the transport direction of the substrate P. The working pattern is formed in a jump (separated) manner. However, since the speed of the substrate P (peripheral speed here) and the speed of the mask M during scanning exposure are assumed to be 50 mm / s to 100 mm / s in practice, the mask stage is used when the mask M is rewound. If 21 is driven at a maximum speed of, for example, 500 mm / s, the margin in the transport direction between panel patterns formed on the substrate P can be reduced.
 本実施の形態においては、マスクステージ21のX方向の移動位置や速度をレーザ干渉計またはリニアエンコーダによって精密に計測し、回転ドラム25の外周面の移動位置や速度を図4中のスケール板25cの読取りヘッドEHによって精密に計測することによって、マスクMと基板Pとの走査露光方向に関する位置的な同期や速度同期を正確に確保することができる。 In the present embodiment, the movement position and speed of the mask stage 21 in the X direction are precisely measured by a laser interferometer or a linear encoder, and the movement position and speed of the outer peripheral surface of the rotary drum 25 are determined by the scale plate 25c in FIG. By accurately measuring with the read head EH, positional synchronization and speed synchronization in the scanning exposure direction between the mask M and the substrate P can be ensured accurately.
<押圧機構>
 次に、図2を参照し、押圧機構130について説明する。押圧機構130は、位置調整ユニット120と露光ユニット121との間に設けられている。押圧機構130は、位置調整ユニット120から露光ユニット121に供給される基板Pにテンションが付与されるように押圧する。押圧機構130は、押圧部材151と、押圧部材151を昇降させる昇降機構152とを有している。押圧部材151は、基板Pに対して、接触または非接触の状態で基板Pを押圧する。押圧部材151としては、例えば、基板Pと非接触な状態を作るためのエア噴出し口および吸込み口を有するエア・ターンバー、または基板Pに対して接触する摩擦ローラ等が用いられる。昇降機構152は、押圧部材151を、基板Pの一方の面(裏面)から他方の面(表面)に押し付ける方向、つまりZ方向に昇降させる。昇降機構152は、上位制御装置5に接続され、第2基板検出部124の検出結果に基づいて上位制御装置5に制御される。
<Pressing mechanism>
Next, the pressing mechanism 130 will be described with reference to FIG. The pressing mechanism 130 is provided between the position adjustment unit 120 and the exposure unit 121. The pressing mechanism 130 presses the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121 so that tension is applied. The pressing mechanism 130 includes a pressing member 151 and an elevating mechanism 152 that moves the pressing member 151 up and down. The pressing member 151 presses the substrate P against the substrate P in a contact or non-contact state. As the pressing member 151, for example, an air turn bar having an air ejection port and a suction port for making a non-contact state with the substrate P, or a friction roller in contact with the substrate P is used. The elevating mechanism 152 elevates and lowers the pressing member 151 in a direction in which the pressing member 151 is pressed from one surface (back surface) of the substrate P to the other surface (front surface), that is, in the Z direction. The elevating mechanism 152 is connected to the host controller 5 and controlled by the host controller 5 based on the detection result of the second substrate detector 124.
 上位制御装置5は、第2基板検出部124の検出結果に基づいて押圧機構130を制御する。具体的に、上位制御装置5は、第2基板検出部124により検出された基板Pの位置から、基板Pの単位時間(例えば数ミリ秒)当たりの位置の変位量を算出する。上位制御装置5は、算出した変位量に応じて、押圧部材151のZ方向における移動量を調整する。つまり、上位制御装置5は、算出した変位量が大きければ、基板Pの振動が大きいとして昇降機構152を制御して、押圧部材151をZ方向に上昇させる。上位制御装置5は、押圧部材151をZ方向に上昇させることで、基板Pにテンションを付与し、基板Pの振動が押圧部材151によって制振される。 The host control device 5 controls the pressing mechanism 130 based on the detection result of the second substrate detection unit 124. Specifically, the host control device 5 calculates the displacement amount of the position per unit time (for example, several milliseconds) of the substrate P from the position of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 124. The host controller 5 adjusts the amount of movement of the pressing member 151 in the Z direction according to the calculated amount of displacement. That is, if the calculated displacement amount is large, the host controller 5 controls the lifting mechanism 152 to raise the pressing member 151 in the Z direction, assuming that the vibration of the substrate P is large. The host control device 5 raises the pressing member 151 in the Z direction to apply tension to the substrate P, and the vibration of the substrate P is suppressed by the pressing member 151.
<基板回収装置>
 次に、再び図2を参照し、基板回収装置4について説明する。基板回収装置4は、位置調整ユニット160と、回収用ロールFR2が装着される第2軸受部161と、第2軸受部161を昇降させる第2昇降機構162とを有する。また、基板回収装置4は、排出角度検出部164と、第3基板検出部165とを有しており、排出角度検出部164および第3基板検出部165は、上位制御装置5に接続されている。ここで、第1の実施の形態において、上位制御装置5は、基板供給装置2と同様に、基板回収装置4の制御装置(制御部)として機能する。なお、基板回収装置4の制御装置として、基板回収装置4を制御する下位制御装置を設け、下位制御装置が基板回収装置4を制御する構成にしてもよい。
<Substrate recovery device>
Next, the substrate recovery apparatus 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 2 again. The substrate collection apparatus 4 includes a position adjustment unit 160, a second bearing portion 161 on which the collection roll FR2 is mounted, and a second lifting mechanism 162 that raises and lowers the second bearing portion 161. The substrate recovery apparatus 4 includes a discharge angle detection unit 164 and a third substrate detection unit 165, and the discharge angle detection unit 164 and the third substrate detection unit 165 are connected to the host control device 5. Yes. Here, in the first embodiment, the host control device 5 functions as a control device (control unit) of the substrate recovery device 4, similarly to the substrate supply device 2. In addition, as a control device of the substrate recovery apparatus 4, a low-order control device that controls the substrate recovery apparatus 4 may be provided, and the low-order control device may control the substrate recovery apparatus 4.
 位置調整ユニット160は、図1に示す上記のエッジポジションコントローラEPC2を含んで構成されている。なお、位置調整ユニット160は、露光装置U3の位置調整ユニット120の構成と略同様であり、基台170と、エッジポジションコントローラEPC2とを有する。基台170は、設置面E上に設けられ、エッジポジションコントローラEPC2を支持する。基台170は、除振機能を有する除振台としてもよい。 The position adjustment unit 160 includes the edge position controller EPC2 shown in FIG. The position adjustment unit 160 has substantially the same configuration as the position adjustment unit 120 of the exposure apparatus U3, and includes a base 170 and an edge position controller EPC2. The base 170 is provided on the installation surface E and supports the edge position controller EPC2. The base 170 may be a vibration isolation table having a vibration isolation function.
 エッジポジションコントローラEPC2は、基台170上を基板Pの幅方向(Y方向)に移動可能となっている。エッジポジションコントローラEPC2は、基板Pの搬送方向の最下流側に設けられた搬送ローラ167を含む複数のローラを有している。搬送ローラ167は、位置調整ユニット160から排出される基板Pを回収用ロールFR2に案内する。エッジポジションコントローラEPC2は、上位制御装置5に接続され、第3基板検出部165の検出結果に基づいて上位制御装置5に制御される。 The edge position controller EPC2 is movable on the base 170 in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P. The edge position controller EPC2 has a plurality of rollers including a transport roller 167 provided on the most downstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P. The transport roller 167 guides the substrate P discharged from the position adjustment unit 160 to the collection roll FR2. The edge position controller EPC2 is connected to the host controller 5 and controlled by the host controller 5 based on the detection result of the third substrate detector 165.
 第3基板検出部165は、エッジポジションコントローラEPC2から回収用ロールFR2に回収される基板Pの幅方向における位置を検出する。第3基板検出部165は、第2昇降機構162上に固定されている。このため、第3基板検出部165は、回収用ロールFR2と同じ振動モードとなる。第3基板検出部165は、回収用ロールFR2に回収される基板Pの端部のエッジの位置を検出する。第3基板検出部165は、接続された上位制御装置5に検出結果を出力する。 The third substrate detection unit 165 detects the position in the width direction of the substrate P recovered from the edge position controller EPC2 to the recovery roll FR2. The third substrate detection unit 165 is fixed on the second lifting mechanism 162. For this reason, the 3rd board | substrate detection part 165 becomes the same vibration mode as collection | recovery roll FR2. The third substrate detection unit 165 detects the position of the edge of the end portion of the substrate P recovered by the recovery roll FR2. The third substrate detection unit 165 outputs the detection result to the connected higher order control device 5.
 上位制御装置5は、第3基板検出部165の検出結果に基づいてエッジポジションコントローラEPC2を制御する。具体的に、上位制御装置5は、第3基板検出部165により検出された回収用ロールFR2に回収される基板Pの端部のエッジの位置と、予め規定された第3目標位置との差分を算出する。そして、上位制御装置5は、該差分がゼロとなるようにエッジポジションコントローラEPC2をフィードバック制御して、基板Pを幅方向に移動させ、回収用ロールFR2に対する基板Pの幅方向における位置を第3目標位置とする。このため、エッジポジションコントローラEPC2は、回収用ロールFR2に対する基板Pの幅方向における位置を第3目標位置に維持できる。よって、回収用ロールFR2に対する基板Pの幅方向における位置を一定にできることから、回収用ロールFR2の軸方向における端面を揃えることができる。なお、この場合も、フィードバック制御としては、P制御、PI制御、PID制御等、いずれの制御であってもよい。 The host controller 5 controls the edge position controller EPC2 based on the detection result of the third substrate detector 165. Specifically, the host controller 5 determines the difference between the position of the edge of the end of the substrate P recovered by the recovery roll FR2 detected by the third substrate detection unit 165 and the predetermined third target position. Is calculated. Then, the host controller 5 feedback-controls the edge position controller EPC2 so that the difference becomes zero, moves the substrate P in the width direction, and sets the position in the width direction of the substrate P with respect to the collection roll FR2 to the third position. The target position. Therefore, the edge position controller EPC2 can maintain the position in the width direction of the substrate P with respect to the collection roll FR2 at the third target position. Therefore, since the position in the width direction of the substrate P with respect to the collection roll FR2 can be made constant, the end faces in the axial direction of the collection roll FR2 can be aligned. Also in this case, the feedback control may be any control such as P control, PI control, PID control and the like.
 第2軸受部161は、回収用ロールFR2を回転可能に軸支している。第2軸受部161に軸支された回収用ロールFR2は、基板Pが回収されると、基板Pが回収された分、回収用ロールFR2の巻径が大きくなっていく。このため、回収用ロールFR2において基板Pが回収される位置は、基板Pの回収量に応じて変化することになる。 The second bearing portion 161 rotatably supports the collection roll FR2. When the substrate P is collected, the collection roll FR2 pivotally supported by the second bearing portion 161 has a winding diameter of the collection roll FR2 corresponding to the collection of the substrate P. For this reason, the position where the substrate P is recovered in the recovery roll FR2 changes according to the recovery amount of the substrate P.
 第2昇降機構162は、設置面Eと第2軸受部161との間に設けられている。第2昇降機構162は、第2軸受部161を回収用ロールFR2ごとZ方向(鉛直方向)に移動させる。第2昇降機構162は、上位制御装置5に接続されており、上位制御装置5は、第2昇降機構162により第2軸受部161をZ方向に移動させることで、回収用ロールFR2によって基板Pが回収される位置を所定の位置にすることができる。 The second elevating mechanism 162 is provided between the installation surface E and the second bearing portion 161. The second elevating mechanism 162 moves the second bearing portion 161 together with the recovery roll FR2 in the Z direction (vertical direction). The second elevating mechanism 162 is connected to the host controller 5, and the host controller 5 moves the second bearing portion 161 in the Z direction by the second elevator mechanism 162, so that the substrate P is collected by the collection roll FR <b> 2. The position where the water is collected can be set to a predetermined position.
 排出角度検出部164は、エッジポジションコントローラEPC2の搬送ローラ167から排出される基板Pの排出角度θ2を検出する。排出角度検出部164は、搬送ローラ167周りに設けられている。ここで、排出角度θ2は、XZ面内において、搬送ローラ167の中心軸を通る鉛直方向に延びる直線と、搬送ローラ167の下流側の基板Pとがなす角度である。排出角度検出部164は、接続された上位制御装置5に検出結果を出力する。 The discharge angle detector 164 detects the discharge angle θ2 of the substrate P discharged from the transport roller 167 of the edge position controller EPC2. The discharge angle detection unit 164 is provided around the transport roller 167. Here, the discharge angle θ2 is an angle formed by a straight line extending in the vertical direction passing through the central axis of the transport roller 167 and the substrate P on the downstream side of the transport roller 167 in the XZ plane. The discharge angle detection unit 164 outputs a detection result to the connected host control device 5.
 上位制御装置5は、排出角度検出部164の検出結果に基づいて第2昇降機構162を制御する。具体的に、上位制御装置5は、排出角度θ2が予め規定された目標排出角度となるように、第2昇降機構162を制御する。つまり、回収用ロールFR2への基板Pの回収量が多くなると、回収用ロールFR2の巻径が大きくなることで、目標排出角度に対する排出角度θ2は小さくなる。このため、上位制御装置5は、第2昇降機構162をZ方向の上方側に移動させる(上昇させる)ことで、排出角度θ2を大きくし、排出角度θ2を目標排出角度となるように補正する。このように、上位制御装置5は、排出角度検出部164の検出結果に基づいて、排出角度θ2が目標排出角度となるように、第2昇降機構162をフィードバック制御する。このため、基板回収装置4は、常に目標排出角度で搬送ローラ167から基板Pを排出できることから、排出角度θ2の変化によって基板Pに与えられる影響を低減できる。なお、この場合も、フィードバック制御としては、P制御、PI制御、PID制御等、いずれの制御であってもよい。 The host control device 5 controls the second elevating mechanism 162 based on the detection result of the discharge angle detecting unit 164. Specifically, the host controller 5 controls the second elevating mechanism 162 such that the discharge angle θ2 becomes a predetermined target discharge angle. That is, when the collection amount of the substrate P to the collection roll FR2 increases, the winding diameter of the collection roll FR2 increases, and the discharge angle θ2 with respect to the target discharge angle decreases. Therefore, the host controller 5 moves the second lifting mechanism 162 upward (in the Z direction) to increase the discharge angle θ2 and correct the discharge angle θ2 to be the target discharge angle. . Thus, the host controller 5 feedback-controls the second elevating mechanism 162 based on the detection result of the discharge angle detection unit 164 so that the discharge angle θ2 becomes the target discharge angle. For this reason, since the board | substrate collection | recovery apparatus 4 can always discharge | emit the board | substrate P from the conveyance roller 167 with a target discharge | emission angle, it can reduce the influence given to the board | substrate P by the change of discharge | emission angle (theta) 2. Also in this case, the feedback control may be any control such as P control, PI control, PID control and the like.
<デバイス製造方法>
 次に、図8を参照して、デバイス製造方法について説明する。図8は、第1の実施の形態のデバイス製造方法を示すフローチャートである。
<Device manufacturing method>
Next, a device manufacturing method will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the device manufacturing method according to the first embodiment.
 図8に示すデバイス製造方法では、まず、例えば有機EL等の自発光素子による表示パネルの機能・性能設計を行い、必要な回路パターンや配線パターンをCAD等で設計する(ステップS201)。次いで、CAD等で設計された各種レイヤー毎のパターンに基づいて、必要なレイヤー分のマスクMを製作する(ステップS202)。また、表示パネルの基材となる可撓性の基板P(樹脂フィルム、金属箔膜、プラスチック等)が巻かれた供給用ロールFR1を準備しておく(ステップS203)。なお、このステップS203にて用意しておくロール状の基板Pは、必要に応じてその表面を改質したもの、下地層(例えばインプリント方式による微小凹凸)を事前形成したもの、光感応性の機能膜や透明膜(絶縁材料)を予めラミネートしたものでもよい。 In the device manufacturing method shown in FIG. 8, first, for example, the function / performance design of a display panel using a self-luminous element such as an organic EL is performed, and necessary circuit patterns and wiring patterns are designed by CAD or the like (step S201). Next, a mask M for a necessary layer is manufactured based on the pattern for each layer designed by CAD or the like (step S202). In addition, a supply roll FR1 around which a flexible substrate P (resin film, metal foil film, plastic, or the like) serving as a display panel base material is wound is prepared (step S203). The roll-shaped substrate P prepared in step S203 has a surface modified as necessary, a pre-formed base layer (for example, micro unevenness by an imprint method), and light sensitivity. These functional films and transparent films (insulating materials) may be laminated in advance.
 次いで、基板P上に表示パネルデバイスを構成する電極や配線、絶縁膜、TFT(薄膜半導体)等によって構成されるバックプレーン層を形成するとともに、そのバックプレーンに積層されるように、有機EL等の自発光素子による発光層(表示画素部)が形成される(ステップS204)。このステップS204には、先の各実施の形態で説明した露光装置U3を用いて、フォトレジスト層を露光する従来のフォトリソグラフィ工程も含まれるが、フォトレジストの代わりに感光性シランカップリング剤を塗布した基板Pをパターン露光して表面に親撥水性によるパターンを形成する露光工程、光感応性の触媒層をパターン露光し無電解メッキ法によって金属膜のパターン(配線、電極等)を形成する湿式工程、或いは、銀ナノ粒子等の導電材料を含有した導電性インク、絶縁材料を含有したインク、または半導体材料(ペンタセン、半導体ナノロッド等)を含有するインク等によってパターンを描画する印刷工程、等による処理も含まれる。 Next, a backplane layer composed of electrodes, wiring, insulating film, TFT (thin film semiconductor), etc. constituting the display panel device is formed on the substrate P, and an organic EL or the like is laminated on the backplane. A light emitting layer (display pixel portion) is formed by the self light emitting element (step S204). This step S204 includes a conventional photolithography process in which the photoresist layer is exposed using the exposure apparatus U3 described in each of the previous embodiments, but a photosensitive silane coupling agent is used instead of the photoresist. An exposure process for pattern-exposing the coated substrate P to form a pattern based on hydrophilicity and water repellency on the surface, and pattern exposure of the photosensitive catalyst layer to form a metal film pattern (wiring, electrode, etc.) by electroless plating A wet process, or a printing process in which a pattern is drawn by a conductive ink containing a conductive material such as silver nanoparticles, an ink containing an insulating material, or an ink containing a semiconductor material (pentacene, semiconductor nanorod, etc.), etc. Processing by is also included.
 次いで、ロール方式で長尺の基板P上に連続的に製造される表示パネルデバイス毎に、基板Pをダイシングしたり、各表示パネルデバイスの表面に、保護フィルム(対環境バリア層)やカラーフィルターシート等を貼り合せたりして、デバイスを組み立てる(ステップS205)。次いで、表示パネルデバイスが正常に機能するか、所望の性能や特性を満たしているかの検査工程が行われる(ステップS206)。以上のようにして、表示パネル(フレキシブル・ディスプレイ)を製造することができる。 Next, the substrate P is diced for each display panel device continuously manufactured on the long substrate P by a roll method, or a protective film (environmental barrier layer) or a color filter is formed on the surface of each display panel device. A device is assembled by pasting sheets or the like (step S205). Next, an inspection process is performed to determine whether the display panel device functions normally or satisfies desired performance and characteristics (step S206). As described above, a display panel (flexible display) can be manufactured.
 以上、第1の実施の形態は、設置面Eに除振台131を介して露光ユニット121を設置するとともに、露光ユニット121と、位置調整ユニット120および駆動ユニット122とをそれぞれ独立状態で設けることができる。つまり、第1の実施の形態は、除振台131により、露光ユニット121と、位置調整ユニット120および駆動ユニット122とを縁切り、すなわち異なる振動モードにすることができる。このため、露光ユニット121は、除振台131により、位置調整ユニット120および駆動ユニット122からの振動を低減できる。 As described above, in the first embodiment, the exposure unit 121 is installed on the installation surface E via the vibration isolation table 131, and the exposure unit 121, the position adjustment unit 120, and the drive unit 122 are provided in an independent state. Can do. That is, in the first embodiment, the exposure unit 121, the position adjustment unit 120, and the drive unit 122 can be separated by the vibration isolation table 131, that is, can be in different vibration modes. Therefore, the exposure unit 121 can reduce vibration from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 by the vibration isolation table 131.
 また、第1の実施の形態は、固定ローラ126に対する基板Pの幅方向における位置を第1目標位置に維持することができる。このため、基板Pは、固定ローラ126に対して同じ位置に供給されることから、固定ローラ126から供給される基板Pの幅方向における位置を一定にすることができる。これにより、第1の実施の形態は、固定ローラ126から送り出される基板Pの幅方向における位置を一定にできるため、基板Pの幅方向における位置の変動によって基板Pに与えられる振動等の影響を低減することができる。 In the first embodiment, the position of the substrate P in the width direction with respect to the fixed roller 126 can be maintained at the first target position. For this reason, since the board | substrate P is supplied to the same position with respect to the fixed roller 126, the position in the width direction of the board | substrate P supplied from the fixed roller 126 can be made constant. Thereby, the first embodiment can make the position in the width direction of the substrate P sent out from the fixed roller 126 constant, so that the influence of vibrations and the like given to the substrate P due to the variation in the position in the width direction of the substrate P is affected. Can be reduced.
 また、第1の実施の形態は、搬送ローラ127に対する基板Pの位置を第2目標位置に維持することができる。このため、第1の実施の形態は、露光ユニット121に供給される基板Pの位置を一定にすることができる。これにより、第1の実施の形態は、搬送ローラ127に供給される基板Pの位置を一定にできるため、基板Pの位置の変動によって基板Pに与えられる振動等の影響を低減することができる。 Further, in the first embodiment, the position of the substrate P with respect to the transport roller 127 can be maintained at the second target position. For this reason, in the first embodiment, the position of the substrate P supplied to the exposure unit 121 can be made constant. Thereby, since the position of the board | substrate P supplied to the conveyance roller 127 can be made constant in 1st Embodiment, the influence of the vibration etc. which are given to the board | substrate P by the fluctuation | variation of the position of the board | substrate P can be reduced. .
 また、第1の実施の形態は、押圧機構130により基板Pを押圧することで、位置調整ユニット120から露光ユニット121に供給される基板Pの振動をより低減することができる。 In the first embodiment, the vibration of the substrate P supplied from the position adjustment unit 120 to the exposure unit 121 can be further reduced by pressing the substrate P by the pressing mechanism 130.
 また、第1の実施の形態は、装置フレーム132を、第1フレーム132aと第2フレーム132bとに分離し、第1フレーム132aにおいてマスクステージ21を支持し、第2フレーム132bにおいて回転ドラム25を支持することができる。このため、第1フレーム132aと第2フレーム132bとをそれぞれ独立状態で設けることができる。つまり、第1フレーム132aと第2フレーム132bとを縁切り、すなわち異なる振動モードにすることができる。このため、第1フレーム132aおよび第2フレーム132bの相互の振動の伝達を低減できる。 In the first embodiment, the apparatus frame 132 is divided into a first frame 132a and a second frame 132b, the mask stage 21 is supported on the first frame 132a, and the rotary drum 25 is mounted on the second frame 132b. Can be supported. For this reason, the 1st frame 132a and the 2nd frame 132b can be provided in an independent state, respectively. That is, the first frame 132a and the second frame 132b can be cut off, that is, different vibration modes can be set. For this reason, the transmission of the mutual vibration of the 1st frame 132a and the 2nd frame 132b can be reduced.
 また、第1の実施の形態は、供給用ロールFR1から露光装置U3の位置調整ユニット120の搬送ローラ127に供給される基板Pの、搬送ローラ127に対する進入角度θ1を一定にできる。このため、進入角度θ1の変位による基板Pへの影響を低減することができる。 Further, in the first embodiment, the entrance angle θ1 of the substrate P supplied from the supply roll FR1 to the transport roller 127 of the position adjustment unit 120 of the exposure apparatus U3 with respect to the transport roller 127 can be made constant. For this reason, the influence on the board | substrate P by the displacement of approach angle (theta) 1 can be reduced.
 また、第1の実施の形態は、基板回収装置4の位置調整ユニット160の搬送ローラ167から回収用ロールFR2に供給される基板Pの、搬送ローラ167に対する排出角度θ2を一定にできる。このため、排出角度θ2の変位による基板Pへの影響(回収用ロールFR2への基板Pの巻きムラ等)を低減することができる。 In the first embodiment, the discharge angle θ2 of the substrate P supplied from the transport roller 167 of the position adjustment unit 160 of the substrate recovery apparatus 4 to the recovery roll FR2 with respect to the transport roller 167 can be made constant. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the influence on the substrate P due to the displacement of the discharge angle θ2 (such as uneven winding of the substrate P on the collection roll FR2).
[第2の実施の形態]
 次に、図9を参照して、第2の実施の形態の露光装置U3について説明する。なお、第2の実施の形態では、重複する記載を避けるべく、第1の実施の形態と異なる部分についてのみ説明し、第1の実施の形態と同様の構成要素については、第1の実施の形態と同じ符号を付して説明する。図9は、第2の実施の形態の露光装置(基板処理装置)U3の一部の構成を示す図である。第1の実施の形態の露光装置U3の露光ユニット121は、装置フレーム132が第1フレーム132aと第2フレーム132bとに分離されていたが、第2の実施の形態の露光装置U3の露光ユニット121aは、単体の装置フレーム180となっている。
[Second Embodiment]
Next, an exposure apparatus U3 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment, only parts that are different from the first embodiment will be described in order to avoid overlapping descriptions, and the same components as those in the first embodiment will be described. Description will be made with the same reference numerals as the form. FIG. 9 is a view showing a part of the configuration of an exposure apparatus (substrate processing apparatus) U3 according to the second embodiment. In the exposure unit 121 of the exposure apparatus U3 of the first embodiment, the apparatus frame 132 is separated into the first frame 132a and the second frame 132b, but the exposure unit of the exposure apparatus U3 of the second embodiment. 121a is a single device frame 180.
 第2の実施の形態の露光ユニット121aにおいて、装置フレーム180は、除振台131上に設けられ、透過型の円筒マスクMAを保持するマスク保持機構11、基板支持機構12、照明機構13および投影光学系PLを支持する。装置フレーム180は、除振台131上に設けられた下面部181と、下面部181上に立設する一対の軸受部182と、一対の軸受部182上に支持される中間部183と、中間部183上に立設する脚部184と、脚部184に支持される上面部185と、上面部185に立設するアーム部186とで構成されている。 In the exposure unit 121a of the second embodiment, the apparatus frame 180 is provided on the vibration isolation table 131, and holds the transmissive cylindrical mask MA, the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate support mechanism 12, the illumination mechanism 13, and the projection. Supports the optical system PL. The apparatus frame 180 includes a lower surface portion 181 provided on the vibration isolation table 131, a pair of bearing portions 182 standing on the lower surface portion 181, an intermediate portion 183 supported on the pair of bearing portions 182, A leg portion 184 standing on the portion 183, an upper surface portion 185 supported by the leg portion 184, and an arm portion 186 standing on the upper surface portion 185.
 一対の軸受部182には、基板支持機構12の回転ドラム25の回転軸AX2を軸支するエアベアリング141がそれぞれ設けられている。各エアベアリング141は、回転軸AX2を非接触の状態で回転自在に軸支する。中間部183には、保持部材143を介して投影光学系PLが設置される。保持部材143と中間部183との間の3ヶ所には、座金部材145が介設されている。保持部材143は、3ヶ所の座金部材145により、中間部183上にキネマチックに支持されている。上面部185には、マスク保持機構11(中空の円筒体)を支持するとともに、円筒マスクMAを回転中心線AX1の回りに回転駆動するための駆動ローラ(キャプスタンローラ)94が設けられている。照明機構13は、マスク保持機構11の内部に配置され、図6中の左図に示すような配列で円筒マスクMA上の照明領域IR(IR1~IR6)を内側から照明する。 Each of the pair of bearing portions 182 is provided with an air bearing 141 that pivotally supports the rotation axis AX2 of the rotary drum 25 of the substrate support mechanism 12. Each air bearing 141 rotatably supports the rotary shaft AX2 in a non-contact state. In the intermediate portion 183, the projection optical system PL is installed via the holding member 143. Washers 145 are interposed at three locations between the holding member 143 and the intermediate portion 183. The holding member 143 is kinematically supported on the intermediate portion 183 by three washer members 145. The upper surface portion 185 is provided with a driving roller (capstan roller) 94 for supporting the mask holding mechanism 11 (hollow cylindrical body) and for rotationally driving the cylindrical mask MA around the rotation center line AX1. . The illumination mechanism 13 is arranged inside the mask holding mechanism 11 and illuminates the illumination area IR (IR1 to IR6) on the cylindrical mask MA from the inside in an arrangement as shown in the left diagram of FIG.
 さらに、上面部185には、駆動ローラ94の回転軸を回転可能に軸支するためのベアリング187が設けられ、駆動ローラ94を回転駆動するマスク側駆動部22は、先の図4に示した基板側駆動部26と同様に構成される。不図示ではあるが、円筒体状のマスク保持機構11の回転中心線AX1方向の両端部には、先の図4と同様のエンコーダ計測用のスケール(回折格子)またはスケール板25cが設けられ、それと対向するように配置された読取りヘッドEHによって、円筒マスクMAの周方向の位置が精密に計測される。 Further, the upper surface portion 185 is provided with a bearing 187 for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft of the drive roller 94, and the mask side drive portion 22 for rotationally driving the drive roller 94 is shown in FIG. The configuration is the same as that of the substrate side drive unit 26. Although not shown, encoder measuring scales (diffraction gratings) or scale plates 25c similar to those in FIG. 4 are provided at both ends of the cylindrical mask holding mechanism 11 in the direction of the rotation center line AX1. The position in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical mask MA is precisely measured by the read head EH arranged so as to oppose it.
 以上、第2の実施の形態では、単体の装置フレーム180で、マスク保持機構11、基板支持機構12、照明機構13および投影光学系PLを支持することができる。このため、第2の実施の形態は、マスク保持機構11、基板支持機構12、照明機構13および投影光学系PLの位置関係を固定できることから、これらの位置関係を大幅に調整することなく、容易に設置することが可能となる。 As described above, in the second embodiment, the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate support mechanism 12, the illumination mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL can be supported by a single device frame 180. For this reason, since the positional relationship among the mask holding mechanism 11, the substrate support mechanism 12, the illumination mechanism 13, and the projection optical system PL can be fixed in the second embodiment, the positional relationship can be easily adjusted without significant adjustment. It becomes possible to install in.
 次に、図10を参照して、図9に示した第2の実施の形態の露光装置U3(露光ユニット121a)について、さらに詳細を説明する。図10の露光ユニット121aにおいて、マスク保持機構11は、透過型のマスクMAを円筒状に保持するマスク保持ドラム21aと、マスク保持ドラム21aを支持するガイドローラ93と、マスク保持ドラム21aを中心線AX1の回りに駆動する駆動ローラ94と、マスク側駆動部22と、を備える。 Next, the exposure apparatus U3 (exposure unit 121a) of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 9 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. In the exposure unit 121a of FIG. 10, the mask holding mechanism 11 has a mask holding drum 21a for holding the transmission type mask MA in a cylindrical shape, a guide roller 93 for supporting the mask holding drum 21a, and the mask holding drum 21a as a center line. A driving roller 94 that drives around AX1 and a mask side driving unit 22 are provided.
 マスク保持ドラム21aは、マスクMA上の照明領域IRが配置されるマスク面P1を形成する。本実施の形態において、マスク面P1は、線分(母線)をこの線分に平行な軸(円筒形状の中心軸)周りに回転した面(以下、円筒面という)を含む。円筒面は、例えば、円筒の外周面、円柱の外周面等である。マスク保持ドラム21aは、例えばガラスや石英等で構成され、一定の肉厚を有する円筒状であり、その外周面(円筒面)がマスク面P1を形成する。すなわち、本実施の形態において、マスクMA上の照明領域IRは、第1軸AX1から一定半径Rmを持つ円筒面状に湾曲している。マスク保持ドラム21aのうち、マスク保持ドラム21aの径方向から見てマスクMAのマスクパターンと重なる部分、例えばマスク保持ドラム21aのY方向の両端側以外の中央部分は、照明光束EL1に対して透光性を有する。 The mask holding drum 21a forms a mask surface P1 on which the illumination area IR on the mask MA is arranged. In the present embodiment, the mask surface P1 includes a surface (hereinafter referred to as a cylindrical surface) obtained by rotating a line segment (bus line) around an axis (cylindrical center axis) parallel to the line segment. The cylindrical surface is, for example, an outer peripheral surface of a cylinder, an outer peripheral surface of a column, or the like. The mask holding drum 21a is made of, for example, glass or quartz and has a cylindrical shape having a certain thickness, and the outer peripheral surface (cylindrical surface) forms the mask surface P1. That is, in the present embodiment, the illumination region IR on the mask MA is curved in a cylindrical surface shape having a constant radius Rm from the first axis AX1. Of the mask holding drum 21a, a portion that overlaps the mask pattern of the mask MA when viewed from the radial direction of the mask holding drum 21a, for example, a central portion other than both ends in the Y direction of the mask holding drum 21a is transparent to the illumination light beam EL1. Has light properties.
 マスクMAは、例えば平坦性のよい短冊状の極薄ガラス板(例えば厚さ100~500μm)の一方の面にクロム等の遮光層でパターンを形成した透過型の平面状シートマスクとして作成され、それをマスク保持ドラム21aの外周面に倣って湾曲させ、この外周面に巻き付けた(貼り付けた)状態で使用される。マスクMAは、パターンが形成されていないパターン非形成領域A4を有し、パターン非形成領域A4においてマスク保持ドラム21aに取付けられている。マスクMAは、マスク保持ドラム21aに対してリリース可能である。マスクMAは、透明円筒母材によるマスク保持ドラム21aに巻き付ける代わりに、透明円筒母材によるマスク保持ドラム21aの外周面に直接クロム等の遮光層によるマスクパターンを描画形成して一体化してもよい。この場合も、マスク保持ドラム21aがマスクMAの支持部材として機能する。 The mask MA is created as a transmission type planar sheet mask in which a pattern is formed with a light-shielding layer such as chromium on one surface of a strip-like ultrathin glass plate (for example, a thickness of 100 to 500 μm) with good flatness, It is used in a state in which it is curved along the outer peripheral surface of the mask holding drum 21a and wound (attached) around this outer peripheral surface. The mask MA has a pattern non-formation region A4 where no pattern is formed, and is attached to the mask holding drum 21a in the pattern non-formation region A4. The mask MA can be released to the mask holding drum 21a. Instead of wrapping around the mask holding drum 21a made of a transparent cylindrical base material, the mask MA may be integrated by drawing a mask pattern made of a light shielding layer such as chromium directly on the outer peripheral surface of the mask holding drum 21a made of a transparent cylindrical base material. . Also in this case, the mask holding drum 21a functions as a support member for the mask MA.
 ガイドローラ93および駆動ローラ94は、マスク保持ドラム21aの中心軸に対して平行なY方向に延びている。ガイドローラ93および駆動ローラ94は、中心軸と平行な軸周りに回転可能に設けられている。ガイドローラ93および駆動ローラ94は、それぞれ、軸方向の端部の外径が他の部分の外形よりも大きくなっており、この端部がマスク保持ドラム21aに外接している。このように、ガイドローラ93および駆動ローラ94は、マスク保持ドラム21aに保持されているマスクMAに接触しないように、設けられている。駆動ローラ94は、マスク側駆動部22と接続されている。駆動ローラ94は、マスク側駆動部22からの動力をマスク保持ドラム21aに伝えることによって、マスク保持ドラム21aを中心軸AX1周りに回転させる。 The guide roller 93 and the driving roller 94 extend in the Y direction parallel to the central axis of the mask holding drum 21a. The guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 are provided to be rotatable around an axis parallel to the central axis. Each of the guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 has an outer diameter at the end portion in the axial direction larger than the outer shape of the other portion, and this end portion circumscribes the mask holding drum 21a. Thus, the guide roller 93 and the drive roller 94 are provided so as not to contact the mask MA held on the mask holding drum 21a. The drive roller 94 is connected to the mask side drive unit 22. The driving roller 94 rotates the mask holding drum 21a around the central axis AX1 by transmitting the power from the mask side driving unit 22 to the mask holding drum 21a.
 なお、マスク保持機構11は、1つのガイドローラ93を備えているが数は限定されず、2以上でもよい。同様にマスク保持機構11は、1つの駆動ローラ94を備えているが数は限定されず、2以上でもよい。ガイドローラ93と駆動ローラ94のうち少なくとも1つは、マスク保持ドラム21aの内側に配置されており、マスク保持ドラム21aと内接していてもよい。また、マスク保持ドラム21aのうち、マスク保持ドラム21aの径方向から見てマスクMAのマスクパターンと重ならない部分(Y方向の両端側)は、照明光束EL1に対して透光性を有していてもよいし、透光性を有していなくてもよい。また、ガイドローラ93および駆動ローラ94の一方または双方は、例えば円錐台状であって、その中心軸(回転軸)が中心軸AX1に対して非平行であってもよい。 The mask holding mechanism 11 includes one guide roller 93, but the number is not limited and may be two or more. Similarly, the mask holding mechanism 11 includes one drive roller 94, but the number is not limited and may be two or more. At least one of the guide roller 93 and the driving roller 94 is disposed inside the mask holding drum 21a and may be inscribed in the mask holding drum 21a. In addition, portions of the mask holding drum 21a that do not overlap with the mask pattern of the mask MA as viewed from the radial direction of the mask holding drum 21a (both ends in the Y direction) are translucent to the illumination light beam EL1. It does not have to be translucent. Further, one or both of the guide roller 93 and the driving roller 94 may have a truncated cone shape, for example, and the central axis (rotating axis) thereof may be non-parallel to the central axis AX1.
 照明機構13は、第1の実施の形態と同様に構成され、照明機構13の複数の照明モジュールILa1~ILa6は、マスク保持ドラム21aの内側に配置されている。複数の照明モジュールILa1~ILa6のそれぞれは、光源から射出された照明光束EL1を案内し、案内された照明光束EL1をマスク保持ドラム21aの内部からマスクMAに照射する。照明機構13は、マスク保持機構11に保持されたマスクMAの照明領域IRを、照明光束EL1によって均一な明るさで照明する。なお、光源は、マスク保持ドラム21aの内側に配置されていてもよいし、マスク保持ドラム21aの外側に配置されていてもよい。また、光源は、露光装置U3と別の装置(外部装置)であってもよい。 The illumination mechanism 13 is configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the plurality of illumination modules ILa1 to ILa6 of the illumination mechanism 13 are arranged inside the mask holding drum 21a. Each of the plurality of illumination modules ILa1 to ILa6 guides the illumination light beam EL1 emitted from the light source, and irradiates the mask MA with the guided illumination light beam EL1 from the inside of the mask holding drum 21a. The illumination mechanism 13 illuminates the illumination area IR of the mask MA held by the mask holding mechanism 11 with uniform brightness using the illumination light beam EL1. The light source may be arranged inside the mask holding drum 21a or may be arranged outside the mask holding drum 21a. The light source may be a device (external device) different from the exposure device U3.
 このように、第2の実施の形態は、露光ユニット121aのマスクMAが、円筒状の透過型のマスクであっても、露光ユニット121aと、位置調整ユニット120および駆動ユニット122とをそれぞれ独立状態(振動の伝達が絶縁される状態)で設けることができる。このため、露光ユニット121aは、除振台131により、位置調整ユニット120および駆動ユニット122からの振動を低減でき、上記第1の実施の形態と同様の効果を得ることができる。 As described above, in the second embodiment, even if the mask MA of the exposure unit 121a is a cylindrical transmissive mask, the exposure unit 121a, the position adjustment unit 120, and the drive unit 122 are independent from each other. It can be provided in a state where transmission of vibration is insulated. For this reason, the exposure unit 121a can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 by the vibration isolation table 131, and can obtain the same effect as the first embodiment.
[第3の実施の形態]
 次に、図11を参照して、第3の実施の形態の露光装置U3について説明する。なお、第3の実施の形態でも、重複する記載を避けるべく、第1の実施の形態や第2の実施の形態と異なる部分についてのみ説明し、第1の実施の形態や第2の実施の形態と同様の構成要素については、第1または第2の実施の形態と同じ符号を付して説明する。図11は、第3の実施の形態による露光ユニット121bの全体構成を示し、円筒状の反射型のマスクMBを用いるとともに、基板Pを平面状に支持する構成となっている。
[Third Embodiment]
Next, an exposure apparatus U3 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, only parts different from the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described in order to avoid overlapping descriptions, and the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described. Constituent elements similar to those of the embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals as those of the first or second embodiment. FIG. 11 shows the overall configuration of the exposure unit 121b according to the third embodiment, which uses a cylindrical reflective mask MB and supports the substrate P in a planar shape.
 まず、第3の実施の形態の露光装置U3に用いられるマスクMBについて説明する。マスクMBは、例えば金属製の円筒体を用いた反射型のマスクとなっている。マスクMBは、Y方向に延びる第1軸AX1を中心とする曲率半径Rmとなる外周面(円周面)を有する円筒体に形成され、径方向に一定の肉厚を有している。マスクMBの円周面は、所定のマスクパターンが形成されたマスク面P1となっている。マスク面P1は、所定方向に光束を高い効率で反射する高反射部と、所定方向に光束を反射しないまたは低い効率で反射する反射抑制部とを含み、マスクパターンは、高反射部および反射抑制部により形成されている。このようなマスクMBは、金属製の円筒体であることから、安価に作成することができる。 First, the mask MB used in the exposure apparatus U3 of the third embodiment will be described. The mask MB is a reflective mask using, for example, a metal cylinder. The mask MB is formed in a cylindrical body having an outer peripheral surface (circumferential surface) having a curvature radius Rm with the first axis AX1 extending in the Y direction as the center, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction. The circumferential surface of the mask MB is a mask surface P1 on which a predetermined mask pattern is formed. The mask surface P1 includes a high reflection part that reflects the light beam in a predetermined direction with high efficiency and a reflection suppression part that does not reflect the light beam in the predetermined direction or reflects with low efficiency, and the mask pattern includes the high reflection part and the reflection suppression. It is formed by the part. Since such a mask MB is a metal cylinder, it can be produced at low cost.
 なお、マスクMBは、第1軸AX1を中心とする曲率半径Rmとなる円周面を有していればよく、円筒体の形状に限定されない。例えば、マスクMBは、円周面を有する円弧状の板材であってもよい。また、マスクMBは薄板状であってもよく、薄板状のマスクMBを湾曲させて、円周面を有するようにしてもよい。 The mask MB only needs to have a circumferential surface having a radius of curvature Rm with the first axis AX1 as the center, and is not limited to a cylindrical shape. For example, the mask MB may be an arc-shaped plate material having a circumferential surface. The mask MB may be a thin plate shape, or the thin plate mask MB may be curved so as to have a circumferential surface.
 マスク保持機構11は、マスクMBを保持するマスク保持ドラム21bを有している。マスク保持ドラム21bは、マスクMの第1軸AX1が回転中心となるようにマスクMBを保持する。マスク側駆動部22は、下位制御装置16に接続され、第1軸AX1を回転中心にマスク保持ドラム21bを回転させる。 The mask holding mechanism 11 has a mask holding drum 21b that holds the mask MB. The mask holding drum 21b holds the mask MB so that the first axis AX1 of the mask M is the center of rotation. The mask side drive unit 22 is connected to the low order control device 16 and rotates the mask holding drum 21b around the first axis AX1.
 なお、マスク保持機構11は、円筒体のマスクMをマスク保持ドラム21bで保持したが、この構成に限らない。マスク保持機構11は、マスク保持ドラム21bの外周面に倣って薄板状のマスクMBを巻き付けて保持してもよい。また、マスク保持機構11は、円弧状の板材となるマスクMBをマスク保持ドラム21bの外周面において保持してもよい。 Although the mask holding mechanism 11 holds the cylindrical mask M with the mask holding drum 21b, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The mask holding mechanism 11 may wind and hold the thin plate-like mask MB along the outer peripheral surface of the mask holding drum 21b. The mask holding mechanism 11 may hold the mask MB, which is an arc-shaped plate material, on the outer peripheral surface of the mask holding drum 21b.
 基板支持機構12は、基板Pが掛け渡された一対の駆動ローラ196と、基板Pを平面状に支持するエアステージ197と、複数のガイドローラ28とを有している。一対の駆動ローラ196は、基板側駆動部26により回転し、基板Pを走査方向に移動させる。エアステージ197は、一対の駆動ローラ196の間に設けられ、一対の駆動ローラ196の間に一定のテンションを持って掛け渡された基板Pの裏面側に設けられ、非接触状態または低摩擦状態で基板Pを平面状に支持する。複数のガイドローラ28は、一対の駆動ローラ196を挟んで、基板Pの搬送方向の上流側および下流側にそれぞれ設けられている。例えばガイドローラ28は4つ設けられ、搬送方向の上流側に2つ、搬送方向の下流側に2つそれぞれ配置されている。 The substrate support mechanism 12 includes a pair of drive rollers 196 over which the substrate P is stretched, an air stage 197 that supports the substrate P in a planar shape, and a plurality of guide rollers 28. The pair of driving rollers 196 is rotated by the substrate side driving unit 26 to move the substrate P in the scanning direction. The air stage 197 is provided between the pair of driving rollers 196 and is provided on the back side of the substrate P that is stretched between the pair of driving rollers 196 with a certain tension, and is in a non-contact state or a low friction state. The substrate P is supported in a flat shape. The plurality of guide rollers 28 are respectively provided on the upstream side and the downstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P with the pair of drive rollers 196 interposed therebetween. For example, four guide rollers 28 are provided, two on the upstream side in the transport direction and two on the downstream side in the transport direction.
 したがって、基板支持機構12は、位置調整ユニット120から搬送された基板Pを、2つのガイドローラ28により一方の駆動ローラ196に案内する。一方の駆動ローラ196に案内された基板Pは、他方の駆動ローラ196に案内されることで、一対の駆動ローラ196に一定のテンションで掛け渡される。基板支持機構12は、基板側駆動部26により一対の駆動ローラ196を回転させることで、一対の駆動ローラ196に掛け渡された基板Pを、エアステージ197で支持しながら、ガイドローラ28へ向けて搬送する。基板支持機構12は、ガイドローラ28に搬送された基板Pを、基板回収装置4へ向けて案内する。 Therefore, the substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P transported from the position adjustment unit 120 to one drive roller 196 by the two guide rollers 28. The substrate P guided by one drive roller 196 is passed over the pair of drive rollers 196 with a constant tension by being guided by the other drive roller 196. The substrate support mechanism 12 rotates the pair of drive rollers 196 by the substrate-side drive unit 26, so that the substrate P stretched over the pair of drive rollers 196 is directed toward the guide roller 28 while being supported by the air stage 197. Transport. The substrate support mechanism 12 guides the substrate P conveyed to the guide roller 28 toward the substrate recovery device 4.
 照明機構13は、円筒状の反射型のマスクMBを用いる場合、マスク保持ドラム21bの外周側から照明光束EL1を照明する。つまり、照明機構13は、光源装置および照明光学系ILがマスク保持ドラム21bの外周に設けられている。照明光学系ILは、偏光ビームスプリッタPBSを用いた落射照明系となっている。照明光学系ILの各照明モジュールIL1~IL6とマスクMBとの間には、偏光ビームスプリッタPBSと、1/4波長板198とが設けられている。つまり、光源装置からの照明光束EL1の入射側から順に、照明モジュールIL1~IL6と、偏光ビームスプリッタPBSと、1/4波長板198とが設けられている。 When the cylindrical reflection type mask MB is used, the illumination mechanism 13 illuminates the illumination light beam EL1 from the outer peripheral side of the mask holding drum 21b. That is, in the illumination mechanism 13, the light source device and the illumination optical system IL are provided on the outer periphery of the mask holding drum 21b. The illumination optical system IL is an epi-illumination system using a polarization beam splitter PBS. Between each of the illumination modules IL1 to IL6 of the illumination optical system IL and the mask MB, a polarization beam splitter PBS and a quarter wavelength plate 198 are provided. That is, the illumination modules IL1 to IL6, the polarization beam splitter PBS, and the quarter wavelength plate 198 are provided in order from the incident side of the illumination light beam EL1 from the light source device.
 ここで、光源装置から出射された照明光束EL1は、照明モジュールIL1~IL6を通って、偏光ビームスプリッタPBSに入射する。偏光ビームスプリッタPBSに入射した照明光束EL1は、偏光ビームスプリッタPBSにより反射された後、1/4波長板198を通過して、照明領域IRに照明される。照明領域IRから反射された投影光束EL2は、1/4波長板198を再び通過することで、偏光ビームスプリッタPBSにおいて透過する光束に変換される。1/4波長板198を通過した投影光束EL2は、偏光ビームスプリッタPBSを通過し、投影光学系PLに入射する。 Here, the illumination light beam EL1 emitted from the light source device enters the polarization beam splitter PBS through the illumination modules IL1 to IL6. The illumination light beam EL1 incident on the polarization beam splitter PBS is reflected by the polarization beam splitter PBS, passes through the quarter-wave plate 198, and is illuminated on the illumination region IR. The projection light beam EL2 reflected from the illumination region IR passes through the quarter-wave plate 198 again, and is converted into a light beam that passes through the polarization beam splitter PBS. The projection light beam EL2 that has passed through the quarter-wave plate 198 passes through the polarization beam splitter PBS and enters the projection optical system PL.
 以上、第3の実施の形態は、露光ユニット121bのマスクMBが、円筒状の反射型のマスクであり、基板Pが平面状に支持される場合であっても、露光ユニット121bと、位置調整ユニット120および駆動ユニット122とをそれぞれ独立状態(振動の伝達が絶縁される状態)で設けることができる。このため、露光ユニット121bは、除振台131により、位置調整ユニット120および駆動ユニット122からの振動を低減でき、上記第2の実施の形態と同様の効果を得ることができる。 As described above, in the third embodiment, even when the mask MB of the exposure unit 121b is a cylindrical reflective mask and the substrate P is supported in a planar shape, the position adjustment with the exposure unit 121b is performed. The unit 120 and the drive unit 122 can be provided in an independent state (a state in which vibration transmission is insulated). For this reason, the exposure unit 121b can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120 and the drive unit 122 by the vibration isolation table 131, and can obtain the same effect as that of the second embodiment.
[第4の実施の形態]
 次に、第4の実施の形態の露光装置(パターン形成装置)U3について説明する。なお、第4の実施の形態でも、重複する記載を避けるべく、第1~第3の実施の形態と異なる部分についてのみ説明し、第1~第3の実施の形態と同様の構成要素については、第1~第3の実施の形態と同じ符号を付して、その説明を省略する。
[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, an exposure apparatus (pattern forming apparatus) U3 of the fourth embodiment will be described. Also in the fourth embodiment, only parts different from the first to third embodiments will be described in order to avoid overlapping descriptions, and the same components as those in the first to third embodiments will be described. The same reference numerals as those in the first to third embodiments are given, and the description thereof is omitted.
 図12は、第4の実施の形態による露光装置U3の構成を示す図、図13は、図12に示す露光装置U3内で搬送される基板Pを上方(+Z方向)側から見たときの図である。図14は、図13に示す位置調整ユニット120a側の最後のローラ126と露光ユニット121c側の最初のローラAR1との間で搬送される基板Pを-Y方向側から見たときの図、図15は、図12に示す回転ドラム25によって搬送される基板Pを-X方向側から見たときの図である。露光装置(処理装置)U3は、位置調整ユニット120aと、位置調整ユニット120aに対して基板Pの搬送方向の下流側(+X方向側)に設けられた露光ユニット121cとを備える。位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとは、別体として設けられている。つまり、位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとは、非接触となる独立状態、或いは位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの間の基板Pの搬送路や露光ユニット121cの後の基板Pの搬送路を覆う蛇腹式等の防塵カバー121dを介して相互に接触していてもよいが、位置調整ユニット120aで発生する振動成分を露光ユニット121cに直接伝えない状態(振動の伝達を抑制した状態)で設けられている。露光ユニット121cは、パッシブまたはアクティブな除振台(除振装置、防振装置)131を介して設置面(基台面)E上に設けられている。位置調整ユニット120aは、基台200を介して設置面E上に設けられている。これにより、設置面Eを介して他の処理装置U1、U2、U4~Un等からの振動や位置調整ユニット120aからの振動が露光ユニット121cに伝達することがない。つまり、露光ユニット121cと、位置調整ユニット120aおよび他の処理装置U等との間における振動伝搬を縁切り(絶縁)することができる。言い換えるならば、位置調整ユニット120aおよび他の処理装置U等の振動と、露光ユニット121cとの振動とが相互に絶縁された状態となる。なお、基台200は、除振・防振機能を有する除振台(除振装置、防振装置)であってもよい。 FIG. 12 is a view showing a configuration of an exposure apparatus U3 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13 is a view when the substrate P transported in the exposure apparatus U3 shown in FIG. 12 is viewed from above (+ Z direction). FIG. 14 is a view when the substrate P transported between the last roller 126 on the position adjustment unit 120a side and the first roller AR1 on the exposure unit 121c side shown in FIG. 13 is viewed from the −Y direction side. 15 is a view of the substrate P transported by the rotary drum 25 shown in FIG. 12 when viewed from the −X direction side. The exposure apparatus (processing apparatus) U3 includes a position adjustment unit 120a and an exposure unit 121c provided on the downstream side (+ X direction side) in the transport direction of the substrate P with respect to the position adjustment unit 120a. The position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c are provided separately. That is, the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c are in an independent state where they are not in contact with each other, or the transport path of the substrate P between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c or the transport path of the substrate P after the exposure unit 121c. They may be in contact with each other via a dust-proof cover 121d such as a bellows type covering them, but in a state where vibration components generated in the position adjustment unit 120a are not directly transmitted to the exposure unit 121c (state in which transmission of vibration is suppressed). Is provided. The exposure unit 121c is provided on an installation surface (base surface) E via a passive or active vibration isolation table (vibration isolation device, vibration isolation device) 131. The position adjustment unit 120 a is provided on the installation surface E via the base 200. Thereby, vibrations from other processing apparatuses U1, U2, U4 to Un, etc. and vibrations from the position adjustment unit 120a are not transmitted to the exposure unit 121c via the installation surface E. That is, the vibration propagation between the exposure unit 121c and the position adjustment unit 120a and other processing apparatus U can be cut off (insulated). In other words, the vibration of the position adjustment unit 120a and other processing apparatus U and the vibration of the exposure unit 121c are insulated from each other. The base 200 may be a vibration isolation table (vibration isolation device, vibration isolation device) having a vibration isolation / anti-vibration function.
 位置調整ユニット(位置調整装置)120aは、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3a、固定ローラ(案内ローラ)126、第1基板検出部202、および、下位制御装置(制御部)204を備える。エッジポジションコントローラEPC3a、固定ローラ126、および、第1基板検出部202は、基板Pの搬送方向の上流側(-X方向側)から前記の順で設けられている。エッジポジションコントローラEPC3aは、長尺方向に所定のテンション(例えば、20~200Nの範囲の一定値)を伴って搬送される基板Pの幅方向の位置が目標位置となるように基板Pの幅方向における位置を調整(修正)する。エッジポジションコントローラEPC3aは、位置調整ユニット120a内で基板Pの幅方向(Y方向)に移動可能となっている。エッジポジションコントローラEPC3aは、アクチュエータ206(図13参照)が駆動することでY方向に移動し、基板Pの幅方向における位置を調整する。エッジポジションコントローラEPC3aは、基板Pを固定ローラ126へ向けて搬送するための、ガイドローラRs1、Rs2、および、駆動ローラNRを有する。ガイドローラRs1、Rs2は、搬送される基板Pを案内するものであり、駆動ローラNRは、基板Pの表裏両面を挟持しながら回転して、基板Pを搬送するものである。なお、図13の参照符号207aは、ガイドローラRs1、Rs2、および、駆動ローラNRを回転可能に支持する支持部材(エッジポジションコントローラEPC3aのフレーム)である。また、参照符号207bは、第1基板検出部202を支持するとともに、固定ローラ126を回転可能に支持する支持部材(位置調整ユニット120aの本体フレーム)であり、この本体フレーム207bの上にエッジポジションコントローラEPC3aのフレーム207aがY方向移動可能に搭載されている。 The position adjustment unit (position adjustment device) 120a includes an edge position controller EPC3a, a fixed roller (guide roller) 126, a first substrate detection unit 202, and a lower control device (control unit) 204. The edge position controller EPC3a, the fixed roller 126, and the first substrate detection unit 202 are provided in the order described above from the upstream side (−X direction side) in the transport direction of the substrate P. The edge position controller EPC3a is arranged in the width direction of the substrate P so that the position in the width direction of the substrate P transported with a predetermined tension (for example, a constant value in the range of 20 to 200N) in the longitudinal direction becomes the target position. Adjust (correct) the position at. The edge position controller EPC3a is movable in the width direction (Y direction) of the substrate P in the position adjustment unit 120a. The edge position controller EPC3a moves in the Y direction when the actuator 206 (see FIG. 13) is driven, and adjusts the position of the substrate P in the width direction. The edge position controller EPC3a has guide rollers Rs1, Rs2 and a driving roller NR for transporting the substrate P toward the fixed roller 126. The guide rollers Rs1 and Rs2 guide the substrate P to be transported, and the drive roller NR transports the substrate P by rotating while sandwiching both front and back surfaces of the substrate P. Reference numeral 207a in FIG. 13 is a support member (a frame of the edge position controller EPC3a) that rotatably supports the guide rollers Rs1, Rs2 and the driving roller NR. Reference numeral 207b denotes a support member (a main body frame of the position adjustment unit 120a) that supports the first substrate detection unit 202 and rotatably supports the fixed roller 126, and an edge position on the main body frame 207b. A frame 207a of the controller EPC3a is mounted so as to be movable in the Y direction.
 固定ローラ126は、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3aで幅方向に位置調整された基板Pを露光ユニット121cへ向けて案内する。このガイドローラRs1、Rs2、駆動ローラNR、および、固定ローラ126によって、基板Pは、長尺方向に折り曲げられて案内搬送される。第1基板検出部(基板誤差計測部、変化計測部)202は、固定ローラ126から露光ユニット121cへ向けて搬送される基板Pの幅方向の位置を検出する。具体的には、図13に示すように、第1基板検出部202は、基板Pの幅方向の-Y側のエッジ部EaのY方向位置を検出する検出部202aと、+Y側のエッジ部EbのY方向位置を検出する検出部202bとで構成され、両検出部202a、202bからの検出信号に基づいて、基板Pの幅方向の位置変化を計測する。さらに、第1基板検出部202(202a、202b)は、基板Pの幅方向の位置検出以外に、基板Pの姿勢変化(微少な傾斜)、基板Pの変形(幅方向の伸縮)等に関する変化情報を検出(計測)するようなセンサー構成としてもよい。第1基板検出部202が検出した基板Pの幅方向における位置や基板Pの変化情報は、下位制御装置204に送られる。なお、第1基板検出部202は、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3aから固定ローラ126に向けて搬送される基板Pの幅方向の位置を検出してもよい。 The fixed roller 126 guides the substrate P, whose position has been adjusted in the width direction by the edge position controller EPC3a, toward the exposure unit 121c. By the guide rollers Rs1, Rs2, the driving roller NR, and the fixed roller 126, the substrate P is bent and guided and conveyed in the longitudinal direction. The first substrate detection unit (substrate error measurement unit, change measurement unit) 202 detects the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed from the fixed roller 126 toward the exposure unit 121c. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the first substrate detection unit 202 includes a detection unit 202a that detects the Y-direction position of the −Y side edge portion Ea in the width direction of the substrate P, and a + Y side edge portion. A detection unit 202b that detects the position of Eb in the Y direction, and measures a change in the position of the substrate P in the width direction based on detection signals from both detection units 202a and 202b. Furthermore, the first substrate detection unit 202 (202a, 202b) is not limited to detecting the position of the substrate P in the width direction, but is related to a change in the posture of the substrate P (a slight inclination), a deformation of the substrate P (extension in the width direction), and the like. A sensor configuration that detects (measures) information may be used. The position in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202 and the change information of the substrate P are sent to the lower control device 204. The first substrate detection unit 202 may detect the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed toward the fixed roller 126 from the edge position controller EPC3a.
 第1基板検出部202によって、基板Pの姿勢変化、特に固定ローラ126から露光ユニット121cに至る水平面(XY面)と平行な搬送路における基板PのX軸回り(YZ面内)の微少な傾斜を計測する場合は、図14に示すように、検出部202a、202bの各々に、基板Pのエッジ部Ea、Ebの各々のZ位置(基板Pの表面の法線方向の高さ位置)Ze1、Ze2の変化を計測可能なZセンサーを組み込む。検出部202a、202bが基板Pの搬送方向に関して固定ローラ126から一定距離だけ離れて配置されるので、固定ローラ126に対して露光ユニット121c側(ローラAR1)がXY面に対して微少傾斜した場合、検出部202aによって検出されるZ位置Ze1と、検出部202bによって検出されるZ位置Ze2との差分値が傾斜量に応じて変化する。このように差分値を求めることにより、固定ローラ126(位置調整ユニット120a)と露光ユニット121c(ローラAR1)との相対的なZ方向への位置変化ΔZsは相殺され、検出部202a、202bが配置された位置での基板Pの微少傾斜(X軸回り)が正確に求まる。 The first substrate detector 202 changes the posture of the substrate P, in particular, a slight inclination around the X axis (in the YZ plane) of the substrate P in the transport path parallel to the horizontal plane (XY plane) from the fixed roller 126 to the exposure unit 121c. 14, as shown in FIG. 14, each of the detection units 202 a and 202 b includes a Z position (a height position in the normal direction of the surface of the substrate P) Ze1 of each of the edge portions Ea and Eb of the substrate P. A Z sensor capable of measuring changes in Ze2 is incorporated. Since the detection units 202a and 202b are arranged at a certain distance from the fixed roller 126 in the conveyance direction of the substrate P, the exposure unit 121c side (roller AR1) is slightly inclined with respect to the XY plane with respect to the fixed roller 126. The difference value between the Z position Ze1 detected by the detection unit 202a and the Z position Ze2 detected by the detection unit 202b changes according to the amount of inclination. By obtaining the difference value in this way, the relative position change ΔZs in the Z direction between the fixed roller 126 (position adjustment unit 120a) and the exposure unit 121c (roller AR1) is canceled out, and the detection units 202a and 202b are arranged. The slight inclination (around the X axis) of the substrate P at the position obtained can be accurately obtained.
 基板Pの実際の傾斜量(角度Δψ)は、検出部202a、202bのZセンサー部のY方向の距離をLz(一定値)とすると、tanΔψ=(Ze1-Ze2)/Lzで算出できる。このように、検出部202a、202bに組み込まれたZセンサーによって計測される基板Pの微少傾斜の変化は、固定ローラ126すなわち位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの相対的なZ軸回りの傾斜変化にも対応している。Zセンサーとしては、光学式や静電容量式の非接触型のギャップセンサー等が利用できる。また、図14の固定ローラ126と露光ユニット121c側の最初のローラ(AR1)との間の基板Pにも、長尺方向に一定のテンションが付与されている。そのため、その間で基板Pが撓む可能性は少ないが、テンションが小さい場合には撓みが発生することもあり、Zセンサーによる計測に誤差が生じ得る。このことから、検出部202a、202b(Zセンサー部)は、基板Pの長尺方向(搬送方向)に関して、露光ユニット121c側の最初のローラ(AR1)に近い位置に配置するのがよい。 The actual tilt amount (angle Δψ) of the substrate P can be calculated as tan Δψ = (Ze1−Ze2) / Lz, where the distance in the Y direction of the Z sensor unit of the detection units 202a and 202b is Lz (a constant value). As described above, the slight inclination change of the substrate P measured by the Z sensors incorporated in the detection units 202a and 202b is the relative inclination around the Z axis between the fixed roller 126, that is, the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c. Responds to change. As the Z sensor, an optical or capacitive non-contact type gap sensor can be used. Further, a constant tension is also applied to the substrate P between the fixed roller 126 and the first roller (AR1) on the exposure unit 121c side in FIG. For this reason, there is little possibility that the substrate P bends in the meantime, but when the tension is small, the bending may occur, and an error may occur in the measurement by the Z sensor. For this reason, the detection units 202a and 202b (Z sensor unit) are preferably arranged at positions close to the first roller (AR1) on the exposure unit 121c side in the longitudinal direction (transport direction) of the substrate P.
 なお、図14のように、固定ローラ126から見て、露光ユニット121c(最初のローラAR1)がYZ面内で傾いた状態のまま基板Pが搬送されると、ローラAR1で折り曲げられた後の基板Pの搬送方向(-Z方向)は、XZ平面との平行性が損なわれるとともに、テンションの作用によって、基板Pは幅方向の一方側(+Y方向か-Y方向)に徐々に変位していくことになり、結果的に回転ドラム25に支持される基板Pも徐々にY方向に変位していくことになる。位置調整ユニット120a(エッジポジションコントローラEPC3a)は、基板PのそのようなY方向の変位を補正するように機能するが、露光ユニット121c側に設けられたローラAR1を含む基板調整部214(詳しくは後述する)によっても補正可能である。したがって、検出部202a、202bによって検出される基板Pの微少傾斜(X軸回り)に関する変化情報に基づいて、位置調整ユニット120aと基板調整部214のいずれか一方、または双方を制御することにより、回転ドラム25に支持される基板PのY方向の位置を高精度に維持することができる。また、回転ドラム25に達するまでの基板Pの幅方向の位置調整に関し、位置調整ユニット120aを粗調整、基板調整部214を微調整として使うこともできる。 As shown in FIG. 14, when the substrate P is transported while the exposure unit 121c (first roller AR1) is inclined in the YZ plane as viewed from the fixed roller 126, the substrate P is bent by the roller AR1. In the transport direction (−Z direction) of the substrate P, the parallelism with the XZ plane is impaired, and the substrate P is gradually displaced to one side in the width direction (+ Y direction or −Y direction) by the action of tension. As a result, the substrate P supported by the rotary drum 25 is also gradually displaced in the Y direction. The position adjustment unit 120a (edge position controller EPC3a) functions to correct such displacement of the substrate P in the Y direction, but includes a substrate adjustment unit 214 (in detail, including a roller AR1 provided on the exposure unit 121c side). It can also be corrected by (described later). Therefore, by controlling one or both of the position adjustment unit 120a and the substrate adjustment unit 214 based on the change information regarding the slight inclination (around the X axis) of the substrate P detected by the detection units 202a and 202b, The position of the substrate P supported by the rotary drum 25 in the Y direction can be maintained with high accuracy. Further, regarding the position adjustment in the width direction of the substrate P until it reaches the rotary drum 25, the position adjustment unit 120a can be used as a rough adjustment, and the substrate adjustment unit 214 can be used as a fine adjustment.
 下位制御装置204は、位置調整ユニット120aのエッジポジションコントローラEPC3a、または基板調整部214等を制御して、基板Pの幅方向の位置を制御するものである。この下位制御装置204は、上位制御装置5の一部または全部であってもよいし、上位制御装置5に制御される、上位制御装置5とは別のコンピュータであってもよい。 The lower-level control device 204 controls the position of the substrate P in the width direction by controlling the edge position controller EPC3a of the position adjustment unit 120a, the substrate adjustment unit 214, or the like. The lower level control device 204 may be a part or all of the higher level control device 5, or may be a computer different from the higher level control device 5 controlled by the higher level control device 5.
 露光ユニット(パターニング装置)121cは、基板支持機構12a、第2基板検出部208、照明機構13a、露光ヘッド(パターン形成部)210、および下位制御装置(制御部)212を備える。露光ユニット121cは、温調チャンバECV内に格納されている。この温調チャンバECVは、内部を所定の温度に保つことで、内部において搬送される基板Pの温度による形状変化を抑制する。この温調チャンバECVは、パッシブまたはアクティブな除振台131を介して設置面Eに配置されている。 The exposure unit (patterning device) 121c includes a substrate support mechanism 12a, a second substrate detection unit 208, an illumination mechanism 13a, an exposure head (pattern formation unit) 210, and a lower level control device (control unit) 212. The exposure unit 121c is stored in the temperature control chamber ECV. This temperature control chamber ECV keeps the inside at a predetermined temperature, thereby suppressing the shape change due to the temperature of the substrate P transported inside. The temperature control chamber ECV is disposed on the installation surface E via a passive or active vibration isolation table 131.
 基板支持機構(搬送部)12aは、位置調整ユニット120aから送られてきた基板Pを支持しながら、下流側(+X方向)に搬送するものであり、基板Pの搬送方向の上流側(-X方向側)から順に、基板調整部214、ガイドローラRs3、テンションローラRT1、回転ドラム25、テンションローラRT2、および、駆動ローラR5、R6を有する。 The substrate support mechanism (transport unit) 12a transports the substrate P sent from the position adjustment unit 120a to the downstream side (+ X direction) while supporting the substrate P. The upstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P (−X The substrate adjustment unit 214, the guide roller Rs3, the tension roller RT1, the rotating drum 25, the tension roller RT2, and the driving rollers R5 and R6 are provided in this order from the direction side.
 基板調整部214は、複数のローラ(AR1、RT3、AR2)を有し、基板Pの幅方向の位置を調整することで、基板Pに生じている捩れや皺を補正しながら、基板Pを搬送方向(+X方向)に搬送する。この基板調整部214の構成については後で説明する。ガイドローラRs3は、基板調整部214によって基板Pの幅方向の位置が調整された基板Pを回転ドラム25に搬送する。回転ドラム25は、回転しながら基板P上で所定のパターンが露光される部分を円周面で保持しつつ、基板Pを駆動ローラR5、R6側へ搬送する。駆動ローラR5、R6の機能については上記第1の実施の形態で述べた通りである。テンションローラRT1、RT2は、回転ドラム25に巻き付けられて支持されている基板Pに所定のテンションを与えるものである。なお、図13の参照符号215は、基板調整部214の複数のローラ、ガイドローラRs3、テンションローラRT1、回転ドラム25、テンションローラRT2、および、駆動ローラR5、R6を回転可能に支持する支持部材(露光ユニット121cの本体フレーム)である。 The substrate adjustment unit 214 has a plurality of rollers (AR1, RT3, AR2), and adjusts the position in the width direction of the substrate P, thereby correcting the torsion and wrinkle generated on the substrate P, while adjusting the substrate P. Transport in the transport direction (+ X direction). The configuration of the substrate adjustment unit 214 will be described later. The guide roller Rs3 conveys the substrate P, whose position in the width direction of the substrate P has been adjusted by the substrate adjusting unit 214, to the rotary drum 25. The rotating drum 25 conveys the substrate P toward the driving rollers R5 and R6 while holding a portion where a predetermined pattern is exposed on the substrate P while rotating on the circumferential surface. The functions of the driving rollers R5 and R6 are as described in the first embodiment. The tension rollers RT1 and RT2 apply a predetermined tension to the substrate P that is wound around and supported by the rotary drum 25. Reference numeral 215 in FIG. 13 denotes a support member that rotatably supports the plurality of rollers of the substrate adjustment unit 214, the guide roller Rs3, the tension roller RT1, the rotating drum 25, the tension roller RT2, and the driving rollers R5 and R6. (Main body frame of the exposure unit 121c).
 図16は、基板調整部214の構成を示す図である。基板調整部214は、調整ローラAR1、AR2と、テンションローラRT3を備える。調整ローラAR1、テンションローラRT3、および、調整ローラAR2は、基板Pの搬送方向の上流側(-X方向側)から前記の順で設けられている。この調整ローラAR1、AR2は、所定のテンション(張力)が掛けられた状態で、基板Pの搬送経路を折り曲げるように配置されている。具体的には、調整ローラAR1、AR2より下方側(-Z方向側)にテンションローラRT3を設けることで、調整ローラAR1、AR2によって所定のテンションが掛けられた状態で搬送経路が折り曲げられる。これにより、位置調整ユニット120aから+X方向に搬送される基板Pは所定のテンションが掛けられた状態で調整ローラAR1によって下方(-Z方向)に折り曲げられてテンションローラRT3に導かれ、テンションローラRT3から上方(+Z方向)に搬送される基板Pは所定のテンションが掛けられた状態で調整ローラAR2によって+X方向に折り曲げられてガイドローラRs3に導かれる。なお、テンションローラRT3は、Z方向に平行移動可能なようにY方向の両端で軸支され、基板Pが搬送される間は、-Z方向に所定の付勢力を発生して基板Pにテンションを与える。 FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the substrate adjustment unit 214. The substrate adjustment unit 214 includes adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 and a tension roller RT3. The adjustment roller AR1, the tension roller RT3, and the adjustment roller AR2 are provided in the order described above from the upstream side (−X direction side) in the transport direction of the substrate P. The adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 are arranged so as to bend the transport path of the substrate P in a state where a predetermined tension is applied. Specifically, by providing the tension roller RT3 below the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 (−Z direction side), the conveyance path is bent in a state where a predetermined tension is applied by the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2. As a result, the substrate P transported in the + X direction from the position adjustment unit 120a is bent downward (−Z direction) by the adjustment roller AR1 in a state where a predetermined tension is applied, and is guided to the tension roller RT3. The substrate P transported upward (in the + Z direction) is bent in the + X direction by the adjustment roller AR2 and guided to the guide roller Rs3 in a state where a predetermined tension is applied. The tension roller RT3 is pivotally supported at both ends in the Y direction so that it can be translated in the Z direction. While the substrate P is being transported, a predetermined biasing force is generated in the −Z direction to tension the substrate P. give.
 調整ローラAR1は、ベアリング214aによって回転軸AX3aに対して回転可能となっており、調整ローラAR2も同様に、ベアリング214bによって回転軸AX3bに対して回転可能となっている。回転軸AX3a、AX3bは、Y方向に沿って平行に設けられている。調整ローラAR1、AR2は、Y方向に沿って平行な軸に対して傾斜可能である。つまり、調整ローラAR1の回転軸AX3aの一端側(-Y方向側)は、他端側(+Y方向側)を支点としてZ方向およびX方向に微少移動可能である。調整ローラAR2も同様に、回転軸AX3bの一端側(-Y方向側)は、他端側(+Y方向側)を支点としてX方向およびZ方向に移動可能である。回転軸AX3a、AX3bの一端側(-Y方向側)の微少移動は、図示しないピエゾ素子等のアクチュエータによって駆動される。調整ローラAR1、AR2を微少に傾斜させることで、基板Pの長尺方向の搬送に伴って基板Pの幅方向の位置を微調整することができ、基板Pに生じている僅かな捩れや基板Pの内部応力による僅かな面内変形(或いは皺)を補正することができる。なお、図16では、2つの調整ローラAR1、AR2をXY面内またはYZ面内で微少に傾けられるようにしたが、調整ローラAR1、AR2は傾斜させずにテンションローラRT1を傾斜可能としてもよい。さらに、調整ローラAR1は傾斜させずに、調整ローラAR2とテンションローラRT1を傾斜可能としてもよい。 The adjustment roller AR1 is rotatable with respect to the rotation axis AX3a by the bearing 214a, and the adjustment roller AR2 is also rotatable with respect to the rotation axis AX3b by the bearing 214b. The rotation axes AX3a and AX3b are provided in parallel along the Y direction. The adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 can be tilted with respect to an axis parallel to the Y direction. That is, one end side (−Y direction side) of the rotation shaft AX3a of the adjustment roller AR1 can be slightly moved in the Z direction and the X direction with the other end side (+ Y direction side) as a fulcrum. Similarly, the adjustment roller AR2 can move in the X direction and the Z direction on one end side (−Y direction side) of the rotation axis AX3b with the other end side (+ Y direction side) as a fulcrum. The minute movement on one end side (−Y direction side) of the rotation shafts AX3a and AX3b is driven by an actuator such as a piezo element (not shown). By slightly tilting the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2, the position in the width direction of the substrate P can be finely adjusted along with the conveyance of the substrate P in the longitudinal direction. A slight in-plane deformation (or wrinkle) due to the internal stress of P can be corrected. In FIG. 16, the two adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 are slightly tilted in the XY plane or the YZ plane, but the tension roller RT1 may be tilted without tilting the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2. . Further, the adjusting roller AR2 and the tension roller RT1 may be tilted without tilting the adjusting roller AR1.
 第2基板検出部(基板誤差計測部、変化計測部)208は、テンションローラRT1から回転ドラム25に向かって+Z方向に搬送される基板Pの幅方向における位置を検出する。具体的には、図15に示すように、第2基板検出部208は、基板Pの幅方向の両端側にそれぞれ設けられ、基板Pの幅方向の両端部のエッジを検出する。図17Aは、第2基板検出部208の構成を示す図、図17Bは、第2基板検出部208によって基板Pに照射されたビーム光Bmを示す図、図17Cは、第2基板検出部208によって受光されるビーム光Bmを示す図である。第2基板検出部208は、ビーム光Bmを照射する照射系216と、ビーム光Bmを受光する受光系218とを備える。照射系216は、投光部220、シリンドリカルレンズ222、および、反射ミラー224を有し、受光系218は、反射ミラー226、結像光学系228、および、撮像素子230を有する。投光部220は、ビーム光Bmを発光する光源を含み、発光したビーム光Bmを基板Pに向けて照射する。投光部220が照射したビーム光Bmは、シリンドリカルレンズ222および反射ミラー224を介して、基板P上に照射される。シリンドリカルレンズ222は、図17Bに示すように、基板P上で基板PのY方向と平行なスリット状のビーム光Bmとなるように、入射したビーム光BmをZ方向に関して収斂する。この基板Pに向かって照射されるビーム光Bmの長さをLbmとする。基板P側に向かって照射したビーム光Bmの少なくとも一部は基板Pによって反射され、基板Pに当らなかった残部のビーム光Bmは、基板Pで反射されることはなくそのまま直進する。 The second substrate detection unit (substrate error measurement unit, change measurement unit) 208 detects the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed in the + Z direction from the tension roller RT1 toward the rotary drum 25. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, the second substrate detection unit 208 is provided on each of both ends in the width direction of the substrate P, and detects edges at both ends in the width direction of the substrate P. FIG. 17A is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the second substrate detection unit 208, FIG. 17B is a diagram illustrating the beam light Bm irradiated onto the substrate P by the second substrate detection unit 208, and FIG. 17C is a diagram illustrating the second substrate detection unit 208. It is a figure which shows the beam light Bm light-received by. The second substrate detection unit 208 includes an irradiation system 216 that irradiates the beam light Bm, and a light receiving system 218 that receives the beam light Bm. The irradiation system 216 includes a light projecting unit 220, a cylindrical lens 222, and a reflection mirror 224, and the light receiving system 218 includes a reflection mirror 226, an imaging optical system 228, and an image sensor 230. The light projecting unit 220 includes a light source that emits the light beam Bm, and irradiates the emitted light beam Bm toward the substrate P. The beam light Bm irradiated by the light projecting unit 220 is irradiated onto the substrate P via the cylindrical lens 222 and the reflection mirror 224. As shown in FIG. 17B, the cylindrical lens 222 converges the incident light beam Bm with respect to the Z direction so as to be a slit-shaped light beam Bm parallel to the Y direction of the substrate P on the substrate P. The length of the beam light Bm irradiated toward the substrate P is Lbm. At least a part of the beam light Bm irradiated toward the substrate P is reflected by the substrate P, and the remaining beam light Bm that does not hit the substrate P goes straight without being reflected by the substrate P.
 基板Pを反射したスリット状のビーム光Bmは反射ミラー226を介して結像光学系228に入射する。結像光学系228は、反射ミラー226から反射されたビーム光Bmを撮像素子230上で結像させ、撮像素子230は、入射したビーム光Bmを撮像する。この撮像素子230で撮像されるビーム光Bmの長さは、図17Cに示すように、基板Pを反射したビーム光Bmの長さLbm1となるので、このLbm1の長さを計測することで基板Pのエッジの位置を検出することができる。このような構成を有することで、第2基板検出部208は、テンションローラRT1から回転ドラム25に向かって+Z方向に搬送される基板Pの幅方向における位置を高精度に検出することできる。また、第2基板検出部208は、基板Pの位置を検出することで、基板Pの幅方向の位置変化、基板Pの変形(幅方向の伸縮)等に関する変化情報を検出(計測)することができる。第2基板検出部208が検出した基板Pの幅方向における位置や基板Pの変化情報は、下位制御装置204に送られる。参照符号230aは、撮像素子230の撮像領域を示す。なお、第1基板検出部202の構成も、第2基板検出部208と同様の構成にしてもよい。 The slit-shaped light beam Bm reflected from the substrate P enters the imaging optical system 228 via the reflection mirror 226. The imaging optical system 228 images the beam light Bm reflected from the reflection mirror 226 on the image sensor 230, and the image sensor 230 images the incident beam light Bm. As shown in FIG. 17C, the length of the beam light Bm imaged by the image sensor 230 becomes the length Lbm1 of the beam light Bm reflected from the substrate P. Therefore, the length of the Lbm1 is measured to measure the length of the substrate. The position of the edge of P can be detected. By having such a configuration, the second substrate detection unit 208 can detect the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed in the + Z direction from the tension roller RT1 toward the rotary drum 25 with high accuracy. Further, the second substrate detection unit 208 detects (measures) change information related to a change in the position of the substrate P in the width direction, deformation of the substrate P (extension in the width direction), and the like by detecting the position of the substrate P. Can do. The position in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 208 and the change information of the substrate P are sent to the lower control device 204. Reference numeral 230 a indicates an imaging region of the imaging element 230. The configuration of the first substrate detection unit 202 may be the same as that of the second substrate detection unit 208.
 露光ユニット121cの各アライメント顕微鏡(基板誤差計測部、変化計測部)AM1、AM2は、基板Pの幅方向に沿って複数設けられており、図15に示すような基板P上に形成されたアライメントマークKsを検出する。図15に示す例では、アライメントマークKsは、基板Pの両端部側に基板Pの長尺方向に沿って一定の間隔で形成されており、基板P上の長尺方向に並んだ露光領域A7と露光領域A7との間では、基板Pの幅方向に沿って一定の間隔で5つ設けられている。したがって、基板P上に形成されたアライメントマークKsを検出できるように、アライメント顕微鏡AM1(図19参照)、AM2は、基板Pの幅方向に沿って一定の間隔で5つ設けられている。アライメント顕微鏡AM1、AM2がアライメントマークKsを検出することで、回転ドラム25に支持されながら搬送されている基板Pの幅方向における位置を高精度に検出することできる。また、アライメント顕微鏡AM1、AM2は、アライメントマークKsの位置を検出することで、基板Pの幅方向の位置変化、姿勢変化、基板Pの変形等に関する変化情報を検出(計測)することができる。 A plurality of alignment microscopes (substrate error measurement unit, change measurement unit) AM1 and AM2 of the exposure unit 121c are provided along the width direction of the substrate P, and are formed on the substrate P as shown in FIG. The mark Ks is detected. In the example shown in FIG. 15, the alignment marks Ks are formed at regular intervals along the longitudinal direction of the substrate P on both ends of the substrate P, and the exposure areas A7 aligned in the longitudinal direction on the substrate P. And five exposure regions A7 are provided at regular intervals along the width direction of the substrate P. Accordingly, five alignment microscopes AM1 (see FIG. 19) and AM2 are provided at regular intervals along the width direction of the substrate P so that the alignment marks Ks formed on the substrate P can be detected. When the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 detect the alignment mark Ks, the position in the width direction of the substrate P being conveyed while being supported by the rotary drum 25 can be detected with high accuracy. In addition, the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 can detect (measure) change information regarding the position change in the width direction of the substrate P, the posture change, the deformation of the substrate P, and the like by detecting the position of the alignment mark Ks.
 このアライメント顕微鏡AM1、AM2によって検出されたアライメントマークKsの長尺方向(搬送方向)と幅方向の各々における位置情報は、下位制御装置212に送られる。下位制御装置212は、取得したアライメントマークKsの位置情報に基づいて、パターン形成位置を補正するための補正情報を生成して露光ヘッド(パターン形成部)210に送るとともに、基板Pの幅方向における位置、および、基板Pの変化情報を計算して下位制御装置204に送る。なお、図15の参照符号232は、各アライメント顕微鏡AM1の検出領域(検出視野)を示し、基板Pの搬送方向(図15ではZ方向)に関する5つの検出領域232の位置は、基板Pが回転ドラム25の外周面に安定的に密接するような位置に設定される。検出領域232の基板P上の大きさは、アライメントマークKsの大きさやアライメント精度(位置計測精度)に応じて設定されるが、100~500μm角程度の大きさである。 The positional information of the alignment mark Ks detected by the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 in each of the longitudinal direction (conveying direction) and the width direction is sent to the lower-level control device 212. The lower-level control device 212 generates correction information for correcting the pattern formation position based on the acquired position information of the alignment mark Ks, sends it to the exposure head (pattern formation unit) 210, and also in the width direction of the substrate P. The change information of the position and the substrate P is calculated and sent to the lower control device 204. Reference numeral 232 in FIG. 15 indicates a detection region (detection field of view) of each alignment microscope AM1, and the positions of the five detection regions 232 in the transport direction (Z direction in FIG. 15) of the substrate P are rotated by the substrate P. The position is set so as to stably come into close contact with the outer peripheral surface of the drum 25. The size of the detection region 232 on the substrate P is set according to the size of the alignment mark Ks and the alignment accuracy (position measurement accuracy), but is about 100 to 500 μm square.
 ところで、図12に示すように、位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの間には、位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの相対的な位置や位置変化に関する変化情報を検出(計測)する相対位置検出部(位置誤差計測部、変化計測部)234が設けられている。図18は、相対位置検出部234の構成を示す図である。相対位置検出部234は、位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの間であって、-Y方向の端部側と+Y方向の端部側とにそれぞれ設けられている。相対位置検出部234は、YZ平面における位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの相対的な位置変化を検出する第1検出部236と、XZ平面における位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの相対的な位置変化を検出する第2検出部238とを有する。これにより、相対位置検出部234は、位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの相対的な位置や変化情報を3次元(XYZ空間)で検出することができる。 By the way, as shown in FIG. 12, a relative position between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c is detected (measured) relative to the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c. A position detection unit (position error measurement unit, change measurement unit) 234 is provided. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the relative position detection unit 234. The relative position detector 234 is provided between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c, on the end side in the −Y direction and on the end side in the + Y direction, respectively. The relative position detector 234 detects the relative position change between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c in the YZ plane, and the relative position between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c in the XZ plane. And a second detector 238 for detecting a change in position. Thereby, the relative position detector 234 can detect the relative position and change information between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c in three dimensions (XYZ space).
 第1検出部236は、+X方向に向かってレーザ光を照射する投光部240aと、投光部240aが照射したレーザ光を受光する受光部242aとを有する。第2検出部238は、+Y方向に向かってレーザ光を照射する投光部240bと、投光部240bが照射したレーザ光を受光する受光部242bとを有する。第1検出部236の投光部240aおよび第2検出部238の投光部240bは、位置調整ユニット120aの露光ユニット121cと対向する面側(+X方向側)に設けられている。また、第1検出部236の受光部242bおよび第2検出部238の受光部242bは、露光ユニット121cの位置調整ユニット120aと対向する面側(-X方向側)に設けられている。 The first detection unit 236 includes a light projecting unit 240a that emits laser light in the + X direction and a light receiving unit 242a that receives the laser light emitted by the light projecting unit 240a. The second detection unit 238 includes a light projecting unit 240b that emits laser light in the + Y direction and a light receiving unit 242b that receives the laser light emitted by the light projecting unit 240b. The light projecting unit 240a of the first detection unit 236 and the light projecting unit 240b of the second detection unit 238 are provided on the surface side (+ X direction side) facing the exposure unit 121c of the position adjustment unit 120a. Further, the light receiving unit 242b of the first detection unit 236 and the light receiving unit 242b of the second detection unit 238 are provided on the surface side (−X direction side) facing the position adjustment unit 120a of the exposure unit 121c.
 受光部242a、242bは、4分割センサーで構成される。つまり、受光部242a、242bは、4つのフォトダイオード(光電変換素子)244を有し、この4つのフォトダイオード244の各々が受光した受光量の差(信号レベルの差分)を用いてレーザ光のビーム中心と垂直な面内での位置変化を検出する。受光部242aに入射するレーザ光は、+X方向に進む光なので、受光部242aは、X方向に垂直なYZ平面におけるレーザ光の中心の位置や位置変化を検出する。また、受光部242bに入射するレーザ光は、+Y方向に進む光なので、受光部242bは、Y方向に垂直なXZ平面におけるレーザ光の中心の位置や位置変化を検出する。これにより、位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの相対的な位置や位置変化に関する変化情報を3次元で検出(計測)することができる。特に、Y方向に離れた1対の第1検出部236の各検出情報の差分や平均によって、位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとのX軸回りの相対回転誤差(YZ面内での相対傾斜)とY方向の相対位置誤差とがリアルタイムに計測できる。また、Y方向に離れた1対の第2検出部238の各検出情報の差分によって、位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとのZ軸回りの相対回転誤差(XY面内での相対傾斜)がリアルタイムに計測できる。 The light receiving units 242a and 242b are configured by four-divided sensors. That is, the light receiving units 242a and 242b have four photodiodes (photoelectric conversion elements) 244, and the difference in the amount of light received by each of the four photodiodes 244 (signal level difference) is used. Changes in position in a plane perpendicular to the beam center are detected. Since the laser light incident on the light receiving unit 242a is light traveling in the + X direction, the light receiving unit 242a detects the position and position change of the center of the laser light in the YZ plane perpendicular to the X direction. In addition, since the laser light incident on the light receiving unit 242b is light traveling in the + Y direction, the light receiving unit 242b detects the position and position change of the center of the laser light in the XZ plane perpendicular to the Y direction. As a result, the relative position between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c and the change information regarding the position change can be detected (measured) in three dimensions. In particular, the relative rotation error about the X axis between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c (relative tilt in the YZ plane) is determined by the difference or average of the detection information of the pair of first detection units 236 separated in the Y direction. ) And relative position errors in the Y direction can be measured in real time. Further, the relative rotation error (relative tilt in the XY plane) about the Z axis between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c is caused by the difference between the detection information of the pair of second detection units 238 separated in the Y direction. It can be measured in real time.
 図12の説明に戻り、照明機構13aは、レーザ光源を有し、露光に用いられるレーザ光(露光ビーム)LBを射出するものである。このレーザ光LBは、370nm以下の波長帯域にピーク波長を有する紫外線光であってもよい。レーザ光LBは、発振周波数Fsで発光したパルス光であってもよい。照明機構13aが射出したレーザ光LBは、露光ヘッド210に入射する。 Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12, the illumination mechanism 13a has a laser light source and emits a laser beam (exposure beam) LB used for exposure. This laser beam LB may be ultraviolet light having a peak wavelength in a wavelength band of 370 nm or less. The laser beam LB may be pulsed light emitted at the oscillation frequency Fs. The laser beam LB emitted from the illumination mechanism 13a enters the exposure head 210.
 露光ヘッド210は、照明機構13aからのレーザ光LBがそれぞれ入射する複数の描画ユニットDU(DU1~DU5)を備えている。つまり、照明機構13aからのレーザ光LBは、反射ミラーやビームスプリッタ等を有する光導入光学系250に導かれて複数の描画ユニットDU(DU1~DU5)に入射する。露光ヘッド210は、基板支持機構12aによって搬送され、回転ドラム25の円周面で支持されている基板Pの一部分に、複数の描画ユニットDU(DU1~DU5)によって、パターンを描画する。露光ヘッド210は、構成が同一の描画ユニットDU(DU1~DU5)を複数有することで、いわゆるマルチビーム型の露光ヘッド210となっている。描画ユニットDU1、DU3、DU5は、回転ドラム25の回転軸AX2に対して基板Pの搬送方向の上流側(-X方向側)に配置され、描画ユニットDU2、DU4は、回転ドラム25の回転軸AX2に対して基板Pの搬送方向の下流側(+X方向側)に配置されている。 The exposure head 210 includes a plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5) on which the laser beams LB from the illumination mechanism 13a are respectively incident. That is, the laser beam LB from the illumination mechanism 13a is guided to the light introducing optical system 250 having a reflection mirror, a beam splitter, etc., and enters the plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5). The exposure head 210 draws a pattern on a part of the substrate P conveyed by the substrate support mechanism 12a and supported by the circumferential surface of the rotary drum 25 by a plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5). The exposure head 210 is a so-called multi-beam type exposure head 210 by having a plurality of drawing units DU (DU1 to DU5) having the same configuration. The drawing units DU1, DU3, and DU5 are arranged on the upstream side (−X direction side) in the transport direction of the substrate P with respect to the rotation axis AX2 of the rotating drum 25. The drawing units DU2 and DU4 are the rotating shafts of the rotating drum 25. It is arranged on the downstream side (+ X direction side) in the transport direction of the substrate P with respect to AX2.
 各描画ユニットDUは、入射したレーザ光LBを基板P上で収斂させてスポット光にし、且つ、そのスポット光を走査ラインに沿って回転ポリゴンミラー等により高速に走査させる。各描画ユニットDUの走査ラインLは、図19に示すように、Y方向(基板Pの幅方向)に関して互いに分離することなく、繋ぎ合わされるように設定されている。図19では、描画ユニットDU1の走査ラインLをL1、描画ユニットDU2の走査ラインLをL2で表している。同様に、描画ユニットDU3、DU4、DU5の走査ラインLをL3、L4、L5で表している。このように、描画ユニットDU1~DU5全部で露光領域A7の幅方向の全てをカバーするように、各描画ユニットDUは走査領域を分担している。なお、例えば、1つの描画ユニットDUによるY方向の描画幅(走査ラインLの長さ)を20~50mm程度とすると、奇数番の描画ユニットDU1、DU3、DU5の3個と、偶数番の描画ユニットDU2、DU4の2個との計5個の描画ユニットDUをY方向に配置することによって、描画可能なY方向の幅を100~250mm程度に広げている。なお、アライメント顕微鏡AM1、AM2は、走査ラインL1、L3、L5より基板Pの搬送方向の上流側(-X方向側)に設けられており、且つ、回転ドラム25の円周面で密着支持されながら搬送されている基板上に形成されたアライメントマークKsを検出する。 Each drawing unit DU converges the incident laser beam LB on the substrate P to be spot light, and scans the spot light at high speed along a scanning line by a rotating polygon mirror or the like. As shown in FIG. 19, the scanning lines L of the drawing units DU are set so as to be connected without being separated from each other in the Y direction (width direction of the substrate P). In FIG. 19, the scanning line L of the drawing unit DU1 is represented by L1, and the scanning line L of the drawing unit DU2 is represented by L2. Similarly, the scanning lines L of the drawing units DU3, DU4, and DU5 are represented by L3, L4, and L5. In this way, each drawing unit DU shares the scanning area so that the drawing units DU1 to DU5 all cover the entire width of the exposure area A7. For example, if the drawing width in the Y direction (the length of the scanning line L) by one drawing unit DU is about 20 to 50 mm, three odd-numbered drawing units DU1, DU3, and DU5 and even-numbered drawing By arranging a total of five drawing units DU, two units DU2 and DU4, in the Y direction, the width in the Y direction that can be drawn is increased to about 100 to 250 mm. The alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 are provided on the upstream side (−X direction side) in the transport direction of the substrate P from the scanning lines L1, L3, and L5, and are closely supported by the circumferential surface of the rotary drum 25. The alignment mark Ks formed on the substrate being conveyed is detected.
 この描画ユニットDUは、国際公開第2013/146184号パンフレット(図36参照)に開示されているように公知技術であるが、図20を用いて描画ユニットDUについて簡単に説明する。なお、各描画ユニットDU(DU1~DU5)は、同一の構成を有することから、描画ユニットDU2についてのみ説明し、他の描画ユニットDUについては説明を省略する。 This drawing unit DU is a known technique as disclosed in International Publication No. 2013/146184 pamphlet (see FIG. 36), but the drawing unit DU will be briefly described with reference to FIG. Since each drawing unit DU (DU1 to DU5) has the same configuration, only the drawing unit DU2 will be described, and description of the other drawing units DU will be omitted.
 図20に示すように、描画ユニットDU2は、例えば、集光レンズ252、描画用光学素子(光変調器)254、吸収体256、コリメートレンズ258、反射ミラー260、シリンドリカルレンズ262、フォーカスレンズ264、反射ミラー266、ポリゴンミラー(光走査部材)268、反射ミラー270、f-θレンズ272、および、シリンドリカルレンズ274を有する。 As shown in FIG. 20, the drawing unit DU2 includes, for example, a condenser lens 252, a drawing optical element (light modulator) 254, an absorber 256, a collimator lens 258, a reflection mirror 260, a cylindrical lens 262, a focus lens 264, A reflection mirror 266, a polygon mirror (light scanning member) 268, a reflection mirror 270, an f-θ lens 272, and a cylindrical lens 274 are included.
 描画ユニットDU2に入射するレーザ光LBは、鉛直方向の上方から下方(-Z方向)に向けて進み、集光レンズ252を介して描画用光学素子254に入射する。集光レンズ252は、描画用光学素子254に入射するレーザ光LBを描画用光学素子254内でビームウエストとなるように集光(収斂)させる。描画用光学素子254は、レーザ光LBに対して透過性を有するものであり、例えば、音響光学素子(AOM:Acousto-Optic Modulator)が用いられる。 The laser beam LB incident on the drawing unit DU2 travels from the upper side to the lower side (−Z direction) in the vertical direction, and enters the drawing optical element 254 via the condenser lens 252. The condensing lens 252 condenses (converges) the laser beam LB incident on the drawing optical element 254 so as to be a beam waist in the drawing optical element 254. The drawing optical element 254 is transparent to the laser beam LB, and for example, an acousto-optic element (AOM: Acousto-Optic Modulator) is used.
 描画用光学素子254は、下位制御装置212からの駆動信号(高周波信号)がオフの状態のときは、入射したレーザ光LBを吸収体256側に透過し、下位制御装置212からの駆動信号(高周波信号)がオンの状態のときは、入射したレーザ光LBを回折させて反射ミラー260に向かわせる。吸収体256は、レーザ光LBの外部への漏れを抑制するためにレーザ光LBを吸収する光トラップである。このように、描画用光学素子254に印加すべき描画用の駆動信号(超音波の周波数)をパターンデータ(白黒)に応じて高速にオン/オフすることによって、レーザ光LBが反射ミラー260に向かうか、吸収体256に向かうかがスイッチングされる。このことは、基板P上で見ると、感光面に達するレーザ光LB(スポット光SP)の強度が、パターンデータに応じて高レベルと低レベル(例えば、ゼロレベル)のいずれかに高速に変調されることを意味する。 The drawing optical element 254 transmits the incident laser beam LB to the absorber 256 side when the drive signal (high frequency signal) from the low order control device 212 is off, and the drive signal (from the low order control device 212 ( When the high-frequency signal is on, the incident laser beam LB is diffracted and directed to the reflection mirror 260. The absorber 256 is an optical trap that absorbs the laser light LB in order to suppress leakage of the laser light LB to the outside. In this manner, the laser beam LB is applied to the reflection mirror 260 by turning on / off the drawing drive signal (ultrasonic frequency) to be applied to the drawing optical element 254 at high speed according to the pattern data (black and white). Switching to or from the absorber 256 is switched. This means that when viewed on the substrate P, the intensity of the laser light LB (spot light SP) reaching the photosensitive surface is rapidly modulated to either a high level or a low level (for example, zero level) according to the pattern data. Means that
 コリメートレンズ258は、描画用光学素子254から反射ミラー260に向かうレーザ光LBを平行光にする。反射ミラー260は、入射したレーザ光LBを-X方向に反射させて、シリンドリカルレンズ262、フォーカスレンズ264を介して反射ミラー266に照射する。反射ミラー266は、入射したレーザ光LBをポリゴンミラー268に照射する。ポリゴンミラー(回転多面鏡)268は、回転することでレーザ光LBの反射角を連続的に変化させて、基板P上に照射されるレーザ光LBの位置を走査方向(基板Pの幅方向)に走査する。ポリゴンミラー268は、図示しない回転駆動源(例えば、モータや減速機構等)によって一定の速度(例えば1万回転/分)で回転する。 The collimator lens 258 converts the laser beam LB from the drawing optical element 254 toward the reflection mirror 260 into parallel light. The reflection mirror 260 reflects the incident laser beam LB in the −X direction and irradiates the reflection mirror 266 via the cylindrical lens 262 and the focus lens 264. The reflection mirror 266 irradiates the polygon mirror 268 with the incident laser beam LB. The polygon mirror (rotating polygonal mirror) 268 rotates to continuously change the reflection angle of the laser beam LB, thereby changing the position of the laser beam LB irradiated on the substrate P in the scanning direction (width direction of the substrate P). Scan to. The polygon mirror 268 rotates at a constant speed (for example, 10,000 rotations / minute) by a rotation drive source (for example, a motor, a speed reduction mechanism, etc.) not shown.
 反射ミラー260と反射ミラー266との間に設けられたシリンドリカルレンズ262は、フォーカスレンズ264と協働して、前記走査方向と直交する非走査方向(Z方向)に関してレーザ光LBをポリゴンミラー268の反射面上に集光(収斂)する。このシリンドリカルレンズ262によって、前記反射面がZ方向に対して傾いている場合(XY面の法線と前記反射面との平衡状態からの傾き)があっても、その影響を抑制することができ、基板P上に照射されるレーザ光LBの照射位置がX方向にずれることを抑制する。 A cylindrical lens 262 provided between the reflection mirror 260 and the reflection mirror 266 cooperates with the focus lens 264 to transmit the laser beam LB in the non-scanning direction (Z direction) orthogonal to the scanning direction of the polygon mirror 268. Condensed (converged) on the reflective surface. The cylindrical lens 262 can suppress the influence even when the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the Z direction (inclination from the equilibrium state between the normal line of the XY surface and the reflection surface). The irradiation position of the laser beam LB irradiated on the substrate P is prevented from shifting in the X direction.
 ポリゴンミラー268で反射したレーザ光LBは、反射ミラー270によって-Z方向に反射され、Z軸と平行な光軸AXuを有するf-θレンズ272に入射する。このf-θレンズ272は、基板Pに投射されるレーザ光LBの主光線が走査中は常に基板Pの表面の法線となるようなテレセントリック系であり、それによって、レーザ光LBをY方向に正確に等速度で走査することが可能になる。f-θレンズ272から照射されたレーザ光LBは、母線がY方向と平行となっているシリンドリカルレンズ274を介して、基板P上に直径数μm程度の略円形の微小なスポット光SPとなって照射される。スポット光(走査スポット光)SPは、ポリゴンミラー268によって、Y方向に延びる走査ラインL2に沿って一方向に1次元走査される。 The laser beam LB reflected by the polygon mirror 268 is reflected in the −Z direction by the reflection mirror 270 and enters the f-θ lens 272 having an optical axis AXu parallel to the Z axis. The f-θ lens 272 is a telecentric system in which the principal ray of the laser beam LB projected onto the substrate P is always normal to the surface of the substrate P during scanning. Therefore, it is possible to scan at a uniform speed. The laser beam LB emitted from the f-θ lens 272 becomes a substantially circular minute spot beam SP having a diameter of about several μm on the substrate P through a cylindrical lens 274 whose bus is parallel to the Y direction. Is irradiated. The spot light (scanning spot light) SP is one-dimensionally scanned in one direction along the scanning line L2 extending in the Y direction by the polygon mirror 268.
 下位制御装置212は、照明機構13aおよび露光ヘッド210等を制御して、パターンを基板Pに付与する。つまり、下位制御装置212は、照明機構13aを制御してレーザ光LBを照射させるとともに、アライメント顕微鏡AM1が検出したアライメントマークKsの位置に基づいて、露光ヘッド210の各描画ユニットDUが有する描画用光学素子254を制御することで、基板P上の所定の位置に、つまり、露光領域A7にパターンを描画露光する。この下位制御装置212は、上位制御装置5の一部または全部であってもよいし、上位制御装置5に制御される、上位制御装置5とは別のコンピュータであってもよい。 The subordinate control device 212 controls the illumination mechanism 13a, the exposure head 210, and the like to apply a pattern to the substrate P. That is, the lower order control device 212 controls the illumination mechanism 13a to irradiate the laser beam LB, and based on the position of the alignment mark Ks detected by the alignment microscope AM1, the drawing unit DU of each exposure head 210 has a drawing purpose. By controlling the optical element 254, a pattern is drawn and exposed at a predetermined position on the substrate P, that is, in the exposure region A7. The lower level control device 212 may be a part or all of the higher level control device 5, or may be a computer different from the higher level control device 5 controlled by the higher level control device 5.
 ここで、基板Pの長尺方向が回転ドラム25の回転軸AX2と直交し、基板Pに捩れや皺等が発生していない状態で、基板Pを回転ドラム25に搬送することにより、基板Pへのパターンの露光精度が向上する。そのため、露光装置U3の基板搬送を行う各ローラ(Rs1~Rs3、NR、126、AR1、AR2、RT1~RT3、R5、R6)および回転ドラム25の回転軸を互いにY方向に沿って平行に配置し、これらの各ローラおよび回転ドラム25の回転軸に対して基板Pの長尺方向が直交するように基板Pを搬送することが望ましい。 Here, the substrate P is transported to the rotating drum 25 in a state in which the longitudinal direction of the substrate P is orthogonal to the rotation axis AX2 of the rotating drum 25 and the substrate P is not twisted or wrinkled, whereby the substrate P The exposure accuracy of the pattern is improved. Therefore, the rollers (Rs1 to Rs3, NR, 126, AR1, AR2, RT1 to RT3, R5, R6) for carrying the substrate of the exposure apparatus U3 and the rotation shaft of the rotary drum 25 are arranged in parallel with each other along the Y direction. Then, it is desirable to transport the substrate P so that the longitudinal direction of the substrate P is orthogonal to the rotation axes of these rollers and the rotating drum 25.
 しかし、実際には、各ローラ(Rs1~Rs3、NR、126、AR1、AR2、RT1~RT3、R5、R6)の回転軸が微妙にずれて設置され、各ローラの回転軸が互いに平行とならない場合がある。また、振動等によって位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの位置が相対的に変化することで、位置調整ユニット120aのローラの回転軸と露光ユニット121cのローラの回転軸と平行とならない場合もある。これにより、基板Pの内部に僅かな応力乱れや捩れや皺等が発生し、基板Pの長尺方向が回転ドラム25の回転軸AX2に対して僅かに傾いた状態で巻き付いたり、基板Pが描画すべきパターンの線幅寸法に比べると大きく変形(面内歪変形)した状態で回転ドラム25に支持されたりする。 However, in actuality, the rotation axes of the rollers (Rs1 to Rs3, NR, 126, AR1, AR2, RT1 to RT3, R5, R6) are slightly offset and the rotation axes of the rollers are not parallel to each other. There is a case. Further, the relative positions of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c may change due to vibration or the like, and the rotation axis of the roller of the position adjustment unit 120a may not be parallel to the rotation axis of the roller of the exposure unit 121c. . As a result, slight stress disturbances, twists, wrinkles, etc. occur inside the substrate P, and the substrate P is wound in a state where the longitudinal direction of the substrate P is slightly inclined with respect to the rotation axis AX2 of the rotary drum 25. It is supported by the rotary drum 25 in a state of being greatly deformed (in-plane distortion deformation) compared to the line width dimension of the pattern to be drawn.
 したがって、第4の実施の形態では、下位制御装置204は、第1基板検出部202、第2基板検出部208、アライメント顕微鏡AM1、AM2、および、相対位置検出部234の検出結果に基づいて、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3aおよび基板調整部214を制御する。 Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the lower control device 204 is based on the detection results of the first substrate detection unit 202, the second substrate detection unit 208, the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2, and the relative position detection unit 234. The edge position controller EPC3a and the substrate adjustment unit 214 are controlled.
 詳しくは、下位制御装置204は、第1基板検出部202が検出した基板Pの幅方向における位置や基板Pの変化情報に基づいてエッジポジションコントローラEPC3aのアクチュエータ(駆動機構)206を制御することで、基板Pの幅方向における位置を調整する。例えば、下位制御装置204は、第1基板検出部202により検出された基板Pの両端部のエッジの位置から求まるY方向の中心位置と目標位置との差分を算出し、該算出した差分がゼロ(0)となるようにアクチュエータ206をフィードバック制御して、基板PをY方向に移動させる。これにより、位置調整ユニット120aから搬送される基板Pの幅方向の位置を目標位置にすることができ、基板Pに微小な捩れや皺等が発生することを抑えることができる。これによって、回転ドラム25に巻き付く基板PのY方向の位置を高精度に一定にすることができ、基板Pの長尺方向に並んだ複数のアライメントマークKsを、各アライメント顕微鏡AM1の検出領域(検出視野)232内で確実に捕捉し続けることができる。 Specifically, the lower-level control device 204 controls the actuator (drive mechanism) 206 of the edge position controller EPC3a based on the position in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202 and the change information of the substrate P. The position of the substrate P in the width direction is adjusted. For example, the lower-level control device 204 calculates the difference between the center position in the Y direction obtained from the edge positions of both ends of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202 and the target position, and the calculated difference is zero. The actuator 206 is feedback controlled so as to be (0), and the substrate P is moved in the Y direction. Accordingly, the position in the width direction of the substrate P transported from the position adjustment unit 120a can be set as the target position, and occurrence of minute twists, wrinkles, etc. on the substrate P can be suppressed. As a result, the position in the Y direction of the substrate P wound around the rotary drum 25 can be made constant with high accuracy, and a plurality of alignment marks Ks arranged in the longitudinal direction of the substrate P can be detected by the detection region of each alignment microscope AM1. (Detection field) 232 can continue to be reliably captured.
 また、下位制御装置204は、相対位置検出部234が検出した位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの相対的な位置や位置変化に関する変化情報を用いて、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3aのアクチュエータ206を制御することで、基板Pの幅方向における位置変化(傾斜状態の変化に伴う基板Pの幅方向へのシフト)を早期に補正することができる。また、下位制御装置204は、相対位置検出部234が検出した相対的な位置や位置変化に関する情報に基づいて、基板調整部214の調整ローラAR1、AR2の傾斜角度を調整することで、基板Pの幅方向における位置を調整する。この調整ローラAR1、AR2の傾斜角度の調整は、前記ピエゾ素子等のアクチュエータ(駆動部)を駆動させることで実行できる。これにより、位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの相対的な位置が変化した場合であっても、回転ドラム25に搬送される基板Pの幅方向における位置を、高精度で応答性高く目標位置に設定し続けることができ、基板Pに微小な捩れや皺等が発生することを抑えることができる。 Further, the lower-level control device 204 controls the actuator 206 of the edge position controller EPC3a using change information regarding the relative position and position change between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c detected by the relative position detection unit 234. Thus, the position change in the width direction of the substrate P (shift in the width direction of the substrate P accompanying the change in the tilt state) can be corrected at an early stage. Further, the lower-level control device 204 adjusts the inclination angles of the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 of the substrate adjustment unit 214 based on information on the relative position and position change detected by the relative position detection unit 234, so that the substrate P Adjust the position in the width direction. The adjustment of the inclination angles of the adjustment rollers AR1 and AR2 can be performed by driving an actuator (drive unit) such as the piezo element. Thereby, even when the relative position between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c changes, the position in the width direction of the substrate P transported to the rotary drum 25 is set to the target position with high accuracy and high responsiveness. And the occurrence of minute twists, wrinkles and the like on the substrate P can be suppressed.
 また、アライメント顕微鏡AM1、AM2が検出したアライメントマークKsの位置によっても基板Pの幅方向における位置や、基板Pの微小な捩れや皺等の基板Pの姿勢変化、変形に関する変化情報もわかる。そのため、下位制御装置204は、検出されたアライメントマークKsの位置に基づいて、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3a(アクチュエータ206)、および、基板調整部214(前記ピエゾ素子等のアクチュエータ)を制御することで、基板Pの幅方向における位置を調整する。これにより、回転ドラム25に搬送される基板Pの幅方向における位置を、高精度で応答性高く目標位置にすることができ、基板Pに微小な捩れや皺等が発生することを抑えることができる。 In addition, the position in the width direction of the substrate P, the change in the posture of the substrate P such as a minute twist or wrinkle of the substrate P, and the change information regarding the deformation are also known by the position of the alignment mark Ks detected by the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2. Therefore, the lower-level control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a (actuator 206) and the substrate adjustment unit 214 (actuator such as the piezo element) based on the detected position of the alignment mark Ks. The position of P in the width direction is adjusted. As a result, the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed to the rotary drum 25 can be set to the target position with high accuracy and high responsiveness, and the occurrence of minute twists, wrinkles, etc. on the substrate P can be suppressed. it can.
 また、下位制御装置204は、第2基板検出部208が検出した回転ドラム25に搬送される直前の基板Pの幅方向の位置に基づいて、基板Pの幅方向における位置が目標位置にあるか否か、基板Pに捩れ(傾斜)が発生していないか否か等を確認する。基板Pの捩れ(傾斜)の検出では、図17Aで説明した検出系によるビーム光Bmの基板Pに対する入射角を大きくして、基板Pが表面の法線方向(図17AではX方向)にシフトした場合、撮像素子230の撮像領域230a内ではビームBmの反射像BmがZ方向にシフトすることを利用すればよい。第2基板検出部208も基板Pの両側のエッジ部Ea、Ebの各々に対応して設けられているので、反射ビームBmの像の撮像領域230a内でのZ方向へのシフト量を比較する(差分値を求める)ことで、基板Pの幅方向に関する微少な傾斜量を求めることも可能である。 Further, the low order control device 204 determines whether the position in the width direction of the substrate P is at the target position based on the position in the width direction of the substrate P immediately before being transported to the rotary drum 25 detected by the second substrate detection unit 208. It is confirmed whether or not the substrate P is twisted (tilted). In detecting the twist (tilt) of the substrate P, the incident angle of the light beam Bm with respect to the substrate P by the detection system described in FIG. 17A is increased, and the substrate P is shifted in the normal direction of the surface (X direction in FIG. 17A). In this case, the fact that the reflected image Bm of the beam Bm is shifted in the Z direction within the imaging region 230a of the imaging device 230 may be used. Since the second substrate detection unit 208 is also provided corresponding to each of the edge portions Ea and Eb on both sides of the substrate P, the shift amount in the Z direction of the image of the reflected beam Bm within the imaging region 230a is compared. By obtaining the difference value, it is also possible to obtain a minute amount of inclination in the width direction of the substrate P.
 そして、基板Pの幅方向における位置が目標位置にない場合は、下位制御装置204は、第2基板検出部208が検出した基板Pの幅方向における位置や基板Pの変化情報に基づいてエッジポジションコントローラEPC3a(アクチュエータ206)、および、基板調整部214(前記ピエゾ素子等のアクチュエータ)を制御することで、基板Pの幅方向における位置を調整する。これにより、回転ドラム25に搬送される基板Pの幅方向における位置を目標位置にすることができる。 If the position in the width direction of the substrate P is not at the target position, the lower control device 204 determines the edge position based on the position in the width direction of the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 208 and the change information of the substrate P. The position of the substrate P in the width direction is adjusted by controlling the controller EPC3a (actuator 206) and the substrate adjusting unit 214 (actuator such as the piezo element). Thereby, the position in the width direction of the substrate P conveyed to the rotary drum 25 can be set as the target position.
 ただし、第2基板検出部208は、回転ドラム25に基板Pが巻き付く直前の位置に配置されているため、この位置で突発的に基板Pの幅方向の大きな変化、例えば、アライメント顕微鏡AM1の検出領域232からアライメントマークKsが外れるような大きな位置ずれエラーが生じた場合は、露光領域A7に形成すべきパターンを精密に位置決めすることが困難となる。そのような場合は、アライメントマークKsが検出領域232内に捕捉されるまで、露光領域A7に対するパターン形成を中止してスキップしたり、一時的に基板Pを一定長分だけ逆転させて、再び順方向に搬送しながらアライメント顕微鏡AM1によるアライメントマークKsの再検出を行う等のエラーシーケンス(リトライ動作等)が実行される。 However, since the second substrate detection unit 208 is disposed at a position immediately before the substrate P is wound around the rotary drum 25, a large change in the width direction of the substrate P suddenly occurs at this position, for example, the alignment microscope AM1. When a large misalignment error that causes the alignment mark Ks to deviate from the detection area 232 occurs, it is difficult to accurately position the pattern to be formed in the exposure area A7. In such a case, until the alignment mark Ks is captured in the detection region 232, the pattern formation for the exposure region A7 is stopped and skipped, or the substrate P is temporarily reversed by a certain length, and the sequence is repeated again. An error sequence (retry operation or the like) such as re-detection of the alignment mark Ks by the alignment microscope AM1 is performed while being conveyed in the direction.
 このように、第4の実施の形態においても、露光ユニット121cと、位置調整ユニット120aとをそれぞれ独立状態(振動の伝達が絶縁される状態)で設けることができる。このため、露光ユニット121cは、除振台131により、位置調整ユニット120aからの振動を低減でき、上記第1の実施の形態と同様の効果を得ることができる。さらに、第4の実施の形態においては、下位制御装置204は、第1基板検出部202、第2基板検出部208、および、アライメント顕微鏡AM1、AM2の検出結果に基づいて、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3aおよび基板調整部214を制御する。これにより、露光ヘッド210による基板Pへのパターンの露光精度を向上させることができる。下位制御装置204は、相対位置検出部234の検出結果に基づいて、エッジポジションコントローラEPC3aおよび基板調整部214を制御する。これにより、位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの相対的な位置が変化した場合であっても、露光ヘッド210による基板Pへのパターンの露光精度を向上させることができる。 Thus, also in the fourth embodiment, the exposure unit 121c and the position adjustment unit 120a can be provided in an independent state (a state in which vibration transmission is insulated). For this reason, the exposure unit 121c can reduce the vibration from the position adjustment unit 120a by the vibration isolation table 131, and can obtain the same effect as the first embodiment. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the low-order control device 204 includes the edge position controller EPC3a and the first substrate detection unit 202, the second substrate detection unit 208, and the edge position controller EPC3a based on the detection results of the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2. The substrate adjustment unit 214 is controlled. Thereby, the exposure accuracy of the pattern on the substrate P by the exposure head 210 can be improved. The low-order control device 204 controls the edge position controller EPC3a and the substrate adjustment unit 214 based on the detection result of the relative position detection unit 234. Thereby, even if the relative position of the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c changes, the exposure accuracy of the pattern on the substrate P by the exposure head 210 can be improved.
 なお、上記第4の実施の形態では、露光装置U3内に、位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとを設ける構成にしたが、基板Pの搬送方向からみて位置調整ユニット120aの直後に露光ユニット121cが設置される構成であればよい。したがって、露光装置U3内に位置調整ユニット120aを設けなくてもよい。この場合は、位置調整ユニット120aは、基板Pの搬送方向からみて、図1のような露光装置U3の直前に配置される処理装置U(U2)側に設けてもよい。または、露光装置U3の直前に基板供給装置2が設けられる場合は、その基板供給装置2内に位置調整ユニット120aの機能を設けてもよい。 In the fourth embodiment, the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c are provided in the exposure apparatus U3. However, the exposure unit 121c is located immediately after the position adjustment unit 120a as viewed from the transport direction of the substrate P. Any configuration may be used. Therefore, the position adjustment unit 120a may not be provided in the exposure apparatus U3. In this case, the position adjustment unit 120a may be provided on the side of the processing apparatus U (U2) arranged immediately before the exposure apparatus U3 as shown in FIG. Alternatively, when the substrate supply apparatus 2 is provided immediately before the exposure apparatus U3, the function of the position adjustment unit 120a may be provided in the substrate supply apparatus 2.
 また、露光装置U3、露光ユニット121、121c等(第2処理ユニット)による光パターニング工程の直前の工程は、基板Pの表面に液状の感光層を形成(塗布)する工程と、その感光層を乾燥(ベーク)する工程とがセットになっている。しかしながら、感光層としてドライフィルムを用いる場合は、ラミネーター等の圧着式の転写装置を用いて、ドライフィルム上の感光層を被露光基板となる基板Pの表面に圧着によって転写する工程(感光層の形成工程)となり、乾燥工程が不要となる場合もある。したがって、光パターニング工程の直前の工程を司る前処理装置(第1処理ユニット)としては、基板Pの表面に感光層を形成する感光層形成装置、または基板Pを乾燥する乾燥(加熱)装置であり、それらの前処理装置内の基板搬送路の下流側(基板搬出部)、またはその前処理装置と光パターニング装置との間に、位置調整ユニット120aの機能を設けることができる。 Further, the process immediately before the photopatterning process by the exposure apparatus U3, the exposure units 121, 121c, etc. (second processing unit) includes a process of forming (coating) a liquid photosensitive layer on the surface of the substrate P, and a process for forming the photosensitive layer. The process of drying (baking) is a set. However, when a dry film is used as the photosensitive layer, a process of transferring the photosensitive layer on the dry film to the surface of the substrate P to be exposed by pressure bonding using a pressure transfer device such as a laminator (photosensitive layer Forming step) and the drying step may be unnecessary. Therefore, the pre-processing apparatus (first processing unit) that controls the process immediately before the photo-patterning process is a photosensitive layer forming apparatus that forms a photosensitive layer on the surface of the substrate P or a drying (heating) apparatus that dries the substrate P. In addition, the function of the position adjustment unit 120a can be provided on the downstream side (substrate unloading portion) of the substrate transport path in the pretreatment apparatus or between the pretreatment apparatus and the optical patterning device.
 また、パターニング工程として、印刷機が使われる場合、その直前の工程としては、基板Pの表面へのインクの密着性を高めるために、基板Pの表面全体、或いはパターン形成すべき部分のみを改質処理する工程(撥液性/親液性の選択的な付与工程等)が実施される。そのような表面改質処理工程も、単独または複数の前処理装置で実施されるので、印刷機の直前に設置される前処理装置内の基板搬送路の下流側(基板搬出部)、またはその前処理装置と印刷機との間に、位置調整ユニット120aの機能を設けることができる。 Further, when a printing machine is used as the patterning process, as a process immediately before that, the entire surface of the substrate P or only the portion where the pattern is to be formed is modified in order to improve the adhesion of the ink to the surface of the substrate P. A quality treatment step (such as a step of selectively imparting liquid repellency / lyophilicity) is performed. Since such a surface modification process is also performed by a single or a plurality of pretreatment apparatuses, the downstream side (substrate unloading section) of the substrate conveyance path in the pretreatment apparatus installed immediately before the printing press, or its The function of the position adjustment unit 120a can be provided between the preprocessing device and the printing press.
 上記第4の実施の形態では、位置調整ユニット120aに第1基板検出部202を設け、露光ユニット121cに第2基板検出部208を設けたが、第1基板検出部202および第2基板検出部208のどちらか一方のみを設けてもよい。また、第1基板検出部202および第2基板検出部208の両方を設けなくてもよい。第1基板検出部202および第2基板検出部208が無くても、アライメント顕微鏡AM1、AM2によって、基板Pの幅方向における位置等を検出することができるからである。 In the fourth embodiment, the first substrate detection unit 202 is provided in the position adjustment unit 120a and the second substrate detection unit 208 is provided in the exposure unit 121c. However, the first substrate detection unit 202 and the second substrate detection unit are provided. Only one of 208 may be provided. Further, both the first substrate detection unit 202 and the second substrate detection unit 208 may not be provided. This is because the position and the like in the width direction of the substrate P can be detected by the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2 without the first substrate detection unit 202 and the second substrate detection unit 208.
 上記第4の実施の形態では、処理装置U3を露光装置として説明したが、基板Pにパターンを付与するパターン形成装置であればよい。パターン形成装置としては、例えば、露光装置の他に、インクを塗布することで基板Pにパターンを付与するインクジェット印刷機等が挙げられる。この場合は、露光ヘッド210は、インク材を液滴にして選択的に付与することで基板Pにパターンを描画する多数のノズルを備えたノズルヘッド部(パターン形成部)に置き換え、露光ユニット121、121a~121cは、パターン形成部を有するパターニング装置に置き換えられる。また、上記第1~第3の実施の形態でも同様に、処理装置U3は、基板Pにパターンを付与するパターン形成装置であってもよい。 In the fourth embodiment, the processing apparatus U3 has been described as an exposure apparatus, but any pattern forming apparatus that applies a pattern to the substrate P may be used. Examples of the pattern forming apparatus include an ink jet printer that applies a pattern to the substrate P by applying ink in addition to the exposure apparatus. In this case, the exposure head 210 is replaced with a nozzle head portion (pattern forming portion) having a large number of nozzles for drawing a pattern on the substrate P by selectively applying the ink material as droplets. , 121a to 121c are replaced with a patterning apparatus having a pattern forming portion. Similarly, in the first to third embodiments, the processing apparatus U3 may be a pattern forming apparatus that applies a pattern to the substrate P.
 上記各実施の形態で説明したように、基板Pに電子デバイス用の微細パターンを形成する露光装置やインクジェット印刷機等のパターニング装置では、基板P上にパターンを精密に位置決めして形成することが重要である。その位置決め精度を低下させるような外乱因子の1つである振動は、近くに設置される処理装置に内蔵された空圧用や液体用のコンプレッサやポンプ等から発生し、工場の床を介して、露光ヘッド(パターン形成部)210や基板Pを支持する回転ドラム25等の支持部材に伝わってくる。その振動伝達の経路を絶縁するために、パターニング装置に防振装置(除振台131等)を設けることが有効である。また、工場の床(基礎)はできるだけ強固で、共振周波数が低くなるように施工する方が望ましいが、上記の各実施の形態では、床条件がそのように厳しくなくても、基板Pを精密に搬送して高精度なパターニングが可能である。 As described in the above embodiments, in a patterning apparatus such as an exposure apparatus or an ink jet printer that forms a fine pattern for an electronic device on a substrate P, the pattern can be precisely positioned and formed on the substrate P. is important. Vibration, which is one of the disturbance factors that lowers the positioning accuracy, is generated by pneumatic or liquid compressors and pumps built in nearby processing equipment, and passes through the factory floor. It is transmitted to a support member such as the rotary drum 25 that supports the exposure head (pattern forming unit) 210 and the substrate P. In order to insulate the vibration transmission path, it is effective to provide an anti-vibration device (such as a vibration isolation table 131) in the patterning device. In addition, it is desirable to construct the factory floor (foundation) as strong as possible and to reduce the resonance frequency. However, in each of the above-described embodiments, the substrate P is precisely formed even if the floor conditions are not so strict. And can be patterned with high accuracy.
 例えば、製造ラインの構築時に、パターニング装置(露光ユニット121、121a~121c)を通る基板Pが幅方向にシフトしないように、パターニング装置内のローラと、パターニング装置の上流側の処理装置(位置調整ユニット120、120a)内のローラとの平行出しを行って、基板Pの処理を開始した後、時間経過に伴って装置荷重等の影響で床が部分的に僅かにへこんで傾斜したりする場合がある。そのような場合でも、第1基板検出部202(202a、202b)や相対位置検出部234によって、基板Pがパターニング装置内に搬入される際の幅方向の位置変位や変形(捩れによる微少傾斜)を計測して、基板調整部214(ローラAR1、RT3、AR2)によって補正することができる。 For example, when the production line is constructed, the rollers in the patterning device and the processing device (position adjustment) on the upstream side of the patterning device are prevented so that the substrate P passing through the patterning device ( exposure units 121, 121a to 121c) does not shift in the width direction. When the floor of the unit 120, 120a) is made parallel with the rollers in the unit 120 and the processing of the substrate P is started, the floor is partially dented and tilted due to the influence of the apparatus load or the like with time. There is. Even in such a case, the first substrate detection unit 202 (202a, 202b) or the relative position detection unit 234 causes positional displacement or deformation in the width direction when the substrate P is carried into the patterning apparatus (a slight inclination due to twisting). Can be measured and corrected by the substrate adjustment unit 214 (rollers AR1, RT3, AR2).
 また、第4の実施の形態の場合、図16に示すような複数のローラ(そのうちの少なくとも1つのローラは傾斜可能)で構成される基板調整部214は、図12に示すように露光ユニット121c側の本体フレーム215に設けられているが、位置調整ユニット120a内の本体フレーム207bに設けてもよい。その場合、振動伝達を絶縁若しくは抑制するために相互に分離される位置調整ユニット120a(第1の処理装置)と露光ユニット121c(第2の処理装置)において、露光ユニット121c側に設けられる第2基板検出部208は、図2中に示された第2基板検出部124と同様に、ガイドローラRs3、またはテンションローラRT1の近傍に設けられる。さらに、位置調整ユニット120a(第1の処理装置)と露光ユニット121c(第2の処理装置)のいずれとも独立して、基板調整部214を単独のユニットとして設置面Eに設けてもよい。 Further, in the case of the fourth embodiment, the substrate adjustment unit 214 composed of a plurality of rollers as shown in FIG. 16 (of which at least one roller can be tilted) includes an exposure unit 121c as shown in FIG. Although it is provided on the main body frame 215 on the side, it may be provided on the main body frame 207b in the position adjustment unit 120a. In that case, in the position adjustment unit 120a (first processing apparatus) and the exposure unit 121c (second processing apparatus) which are separated from each other in order to insulate or suppress vibration transmission, the second is provided on the exposure unit 121c side. The substrate detection unit 208 is provided in the vicinity of the guide roller Rs3 or the tension roller RT1, similarly to the second substrate detection unit 124 shown in FIG. Further, the substrate adjustment unit 214 may be provided on the installation surface E as a single unit independently of any of the position adjustment unit 120a (first processing apparatus) and the exposure unit 121c (second processing apparatus).
 光パターニング工程を行う露光ユニット121、121c等(第2処理ユニット)と、光パターニング工程の直前の工程を司る前処理装置(第1処理ユニット)との間に、位置調整ユニット120aまたは第1基板検出部202を設ける場合は、第1基板検出部202によって、第1処理ユニットから第2処理ユニットに搬送される基板Pの位置変化を検出することができる。また、第1処理ユニット内の基板Pの搬送方向の下流側に位置調整ユニット120aまたは第1基板検出部202を設ける場合は、第1基板検出部202によって、第1処理ユニットから第2処理ユニットに搬送される基板Pの位置変化を検出してもよいし、第1基板検出部202が検出した基板Pの位置と、第2基板検出部208またはアライメント顕微鏡AM1、AM2によって検出された基板Pの位置とから、第1処理ユニットから第2処理ユニットに搬送される基板Pの位置変化を検出してもよい。また、相対位置検出部234が位置調整ユニット120aと露光ユニット121cとの相対的な位置や位置変化を検出することで、第1処理ユニットから第2処理ユニットに搬送される基板Pの位置変化を検出してもよい。 Position adjustment unit 120a or first substrate between exposure units 121, 121c and the like (second processing unit) that perform the optical patterning process and a pre-processing apparatus (first processing unit) that manages the process immediately before the optical patterning process When the detection unit 202 is provided, the first substrate detection unit 202 can detect a change in the position of the substrate P transported from the first processing unit to the second processing unit. Further, when the position adjustment unit 120a or the first substrate detection unit 202 is provided on the downstream side in the transport direction of the substrate P in the first processing unit, the first processing unit 202 changes the first processing unit to the second processing unit. The position change of the substrate P conveyed to the substrate may be detected, the position of the substrate P detected by the first substrate detection unit 202, and the substrate P detected by the second substrate detection unit 208 or the alignment microscopes AM1 and AM2. The position change of the substrate P transported from the first processing unit to the second processing unit may be detected from this position. Further, the relative position detection unit 234 detects the relative position or position change between the position adjustment unit 120a and the exposure unit 121c, thereby detecting the position change of the substrate P transported from the first processing unit to the second processing unit. It may be detected.

Claims (26)

  1.  設置面上に設けられた除振台と、
     前記除振台上に設けられ、供給される基板に対して露光処理を行う露光ユニットと、
     前記設置面上に設けられるとともに、前記露光ユニットとは非接触となる独立状態で設けられ、前記露光ユニットに対する処理を行う処理ユニットと、
     を備えた基板処理装置。
    A vibration isolator provided on the installation surface;
    An exposure unit that is provided on the vibration isolation table and performs an exposure process on a substrate to be supplied;
    A processing unit that is provided on the installation surface and is provided in an independent state that is not in contact with the exposure unit, and performs processing on the exposure unit;
    A substrate processing apparatus comprising:
  2.  請求項1に記載の基板処理装置であって、
     前記処理ユニットは、前記露光ユニットに供給される前記基板の幅方向における位置を調整する位置調整ユニットを含み、
     前記位置調整ユニットは、
     前記設置面上に設けられた基台と、
     前記基台上に設けられ、前記基台に対して前記基板の幅方向に前記基板を移動させる幅移動機構と、
     前記基台上に設けられ、前記幅移動機構による位置調整後の前記基板を、前記露光ユニットへ向けて案内するとともに、前記基台に対する位置が固定された固定ローラと、
     を有する基板処理装置。
    The substrate processing apparatus according to claim 1,
    The processing unit includes a position adjustment unit that adjusts a position in the width direction of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit,
    The position adjustment unit includes:
    A base provided on the installation surface;
    A width moving mechanism that is provided on the base and moves the substrate in the width direction of the substrate with respect to the base;
    A fixed roller provided on the base and guiding the substrate after position adjustment by the width moving mechanism toward the exposure unit, and a position fixed to the base;
    A substrate processing apparatus.
  3.  請求項2に記載の基板処理装置であって、
     前記基台上に固定して設けられ、前記固定ローラに供給される前記基板の幅方向における位置を検出する第1基板検出部と、
     前記第1基板検出部の検出結果に基づいて前記幅移動機構を制御し、前記固定ローラに供給される前記基板の幅方向における位置を第1目標位置に補正する制御部と、
     をさらに備えた基板処理装置。
    The substrate processing apparatus according to claim 2,
    A first substrate detection unit that is fixed on the base and detects a position in the width direction of the substrate supplied to the fixed roller;
    A control unit that controls the width moving mechanism based on a detection result of the first substrate detection unit and corrects a position in the width direction of the substrate supplied to the fixed roller to a first target position;
    A substrate processing apparatus further comprising:
  4.  請求項2または3に記載の基板処理装置であって、
     前記位置調整ユニットは、前記露光ユニットに対する前記固定ローラの位置を調整するローラ位置調整機構をさらに有し、
     前記除振台上に固定して設けられ、前記露光ユニットに供給される前記基板の位置を検出する第2基板検出部と、
     前記第2基板検出部の検出結果に基づいて前記ローラ位置調整機構を制御し、前記露光ユニットに供給される前記基板の位置を第2目標位置に補正する制御部と、
     をさらに備えた基板処理装置。
    The substrate processing apparatus according to claim 2 or 3,
    The position adjustment unit further includes a roller position adjustment mechanism that adjusts the position of the fixed roller with respect to the exposure unit;
    A second substrate detection unit fixed on the vibration isolation table and detecting the position of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit;
    A controller that controls the roller position adjustment mechanism based on the detection result of the second substrate detector, and corrects the position of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit to a second target position;
    A substrate processing apparatus further comprising:
  5.  請求項2~4のいずれか1項に記載の基板処理装置であって、
     前記位置調整ユニットから前記露光ユニットへ供給される前記基板に対して、テンションが付与されるように押圧する押圧機構と、
     前記除振台上に固定して設けられ、前記露光ユニットに供給される前記基板の位置を検出する第2基板検出部と、
     前記第2基板検出部の検出結果に基づいて前記押圧機構を制御し、前記基板への押圧量を調整する制御部と、
     をさらに備えた基板処理装置。
    The substrate processing apparatus according to any one of claims 2 to 4, comprising:
    A pressing mechanism that presses the substrate supplied from the position adjustment unit to the exposure unit so that tension is applied;
    A second substrate detection unit fixed on the vibration isolation table and detecting the position of the substrate supplied to the exposure unit;
    A control unit that controls the pressing mechanism based on a detection result of the second substrate detection unit and adjusts a pressing amount to the substrate;
    A substrate processing apparatus further comprising:
  6.  請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の基板処理装置であって、
     前記処理ユニットは、前記露光ユニットを駆動する駆動ユニットを含み、
     前記露光ユニットは、
     照明光が照明されるマスクを保持するマスク保持部材と、
     前記マスクからの投影光が投射される前記基板を支持する基板支持部材と、
     を有し、
     前記駆動ユニットは、
     前記マスクを走査方向に移動させるために前記マスク保持部材を駆動させるマスク側駆動部と、
     前記基板を走査方向に移動させるために前記基板支持部材を駆動させる基板側駆動部と、
     を有する基板処理装置。
    A substrate processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
    The processing unit includes a drive unit that drives the exposure unit,
    The exposure unit includes
    A mask holding member for holding a mask illuminated with illumination light;
    A substrate support member for supporting the substrate on which projection light from the mask is projected;
    Have
    The drive unit is
    A mask side drive unit for driving the mask holding member to move the mask in the scanning direction;
    A substrate-side drive unit that drives the substrate support member to move the substrate in the scanning direction;
    A substrate processing apparatus.
  7.  請求項6に記載の基板処理装置であって、
     前記露光ユニットは、
     前記マスク保持部材を支持する第1フレームと、
     前記基板支持部材を支持する第2フレームと、
     を有し、
     前記除振台は、前記設置面と前記第1フレームとの間に設けられた第1除振台と、前記設置面と前記第2フレームとの間に設けられた第2除振台と、を含んでいる、基板処理装置。
    The substrate processing apparatus according to claim 6,
    The exposure unit includes
    A first frame that supports the mask holding member;
    A second frame for supporting the substrate support member;
    Have
    The vibration isolation table includes: a first vibration isolation table provided between the installation surface and the first frame; a second vibration isolation table provided between the installation surface and the second frame; A substrate processing apparatus.
  8.  請求項6に記載の基板処理装置であって、
     前記露光ユニットは、前記マスク保持部材および前記基板支持部材を支持するフレームを有し、
     前記除振台は、前記設置面と前記フレームとの間に設けられる、基板処理装置。
    The substrate processing apparatus according to claim 6,
    The exposure unit has a frame that supports the mask holding member and the substrate support member,
    The vibration isolation table is a substrate processing apparatus provided between the installation surface and the frame.
  9.  請求項6~8のいずれか1項に記載の基板処理装置であって、
     前記マスク保持部材は、第1軸を中心とした第1の曲率半径となるマスク面を有する前記マスクを保持し、
     前記マスク側駆動部は、前記マスク保持部材を回転駆動させることで、前記マスクを走査方向に移動させ、
     前記基板支持部材は、第2軸を中心とした第2の曲率半径となる支持面に沿って、前記基板を支持し、
     前記基板側駆動部は、前記基板支持部材を回転駆動させることで、前記基板を走査方向に移動させる、基板処理装置。
    The substrate processing apparatus according to any one of claims 6 to 8, comprising:
    The mask holding member holds the mask having a mask surface having a first radius of curvature around a first axis;
    The mask side drive unit moves the mask in the scanning direction by rotating the mask holding member,
    The substrate support member supports the substrate along a support surface having a second radius of curvature around the second axis;
    The substrate processing apparatus, wherein the substrate side driving unit moves the substrate in a scanning direction by rotationally driving the substrate support member.
  10.  請求項6~8のいずれか1項に記載の基板処理装置であって、
     前記マスク保持部材は、平面となるマスク面を有する前記マスクを保持し、
     前記マスク側駆動部は、前記マスク保持部材を直線駆動させることで、前記マスクを走査方向に移動させ、
     前記基板支持部材は、第2軸を中心とした第2の曲率半径となる支持面に沿って、前記基板を支持し、
     前記基板側駆動部は、前記基板支持部材を回転駆動させることで、前記基板を走査方向に移動させる、基板処理装置。
    The substrate processing apparatus according to any one of claims 6 to 8, comprising:
    The mask holding member holds the mask having a flat mask surface,
    The mask side drive unit moves the mask in the scanning direction by linearly driving the mask holding member,
    The substrate support member supports the substrate along a support surface having a second radius of curvature around the second axis;
    The substrate processing apparatus, wherein the substrate side driving unit moves the substrate in a scanning direction by rotationally driving the substrate support member.
  11.  請求項6~8のいずれか1項に記載の基板処理装置であって、
     前記マスク保持部材は、第1軸を中心とした第1の曲率半径となるマスク面を有する前記マスクを保持し、
     前記マスク側駆動部は、前記マスク保持部材を回転駆動させることで、前記マスクを走査方向に移動させ、
     前記基板支持部材は、前記基板が平面を有するように、前記基板の走査方向における両側を回転可能に支持する一対の支持ローラを有し、
     前記基板側駆動部は、前記一対の支持ローラを回転駆動させることで、前記基板を走査方向に移動させる、基板処理装置。
    The substrate processing apparatus according to any one of claims 6 to 8, comprising:
    The mask holding member holds the mask having a mask surface having a first radius of curvature around a first axis;
    The mask side drive unit moves the mask in the scanning direction by rotating the mask holding member,
    The substrate support member has a pair of support rollers that rotatably support both sides of the substrate in the scanning direction so that the substrate has a flat surface.
    The substrate processing apparatus, wherein the substrate side driving unit moves the substrate in a scanning direction by rotationally driving the pair of support rollers.
  12.  請求項1~11のいずれか1項に記載の基板処理装置と、
     前記基板処理装置に前記基板を供給する基板供給装置と、
     前記基板処理装置により処理された前記基板を回収する基板回収装置と、
     を備えるデバイス製造システム。
    A substrate processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
    A substrate supply apparatus for supplying the substrate to the substrate processing apparatus;
    A substrate recovery apparatus for recovering the substrate processed by the substrate processing apparatus;
    A device manufacturing system comprising:
  13.  請求項12に記載のデバイス製造システムであって、
     前記基板供給装置は、
     ロール状に前記基板が巻回された供給用ロールが回転可能に支持される第1軸受部と、
     前記第1軸受部を昇降させる第1昇降機構と、
     前記供給用ロールから送り出された前記基板が巻き付けられる第1ローラに対する前記基板の進入角度を検出する進入角度検出部と、
     前記進入角度検出部の検出結果に基づいて前記第1昇降機構を制御し、前記進入角度を目標進入角度に補正する制御部と、
     を有するデバイス製造システム。
    A device manufacturing system according to claim 12,
    The substrate supply apparatus includes:
    A first bearing portion rotatably supported by a supply roll on which the substrate is wound in a roll;
    A first lifting mechanism for lifting and lowering the first bearing portion;
    An approach angle detection unit for detecting an approach angle of the substrate with respect to a first roller around which the substrate sent from the supply roll is wound;
    A controller that controls the first elevating mechanism based on a detection result of the approach angle detector and corrects the approach angle to a target approach angle;
    A device manufacturing system.
  14.  請求項12または13に記載のデバイス製造システムであって、
     前記基板回収装置は、
     前記基板処理装置で処理された処理後の前記基板が巻回される回収用ロールが回転可能に支持される第2軸受部と、
     前記第2軸受部を昇降させる第2昇降機構と、
     前記回収用ロールへ送り出される前記基板が巻き付けられる第2ローラに対する前記基板の排出角度を検出する排出角度検出部と、
     前記排出角度検出部の検出結果に基づいて前記第2昇降機構を制御し、前記排出角度を目標排出角度に補正する制御部と、
     を有するデバイス製造システム。
    The device manufacturing system according to claim 12 or 13,
    The substrate recovery apparatus is
    A second bearing portion rotatably supported by a recovery roll on which the substrate after processing processed by the substrate processing apparatus is wound;
    A second lifting mechanism for lifting and lowering the second bearing part;
    A discharge angle detection unit for detecting a discharge angle of the substrate with respect to a second roller around which the substrate sent to the collection roll is wound;
    A control unit that controls the second lifting mechanism based on a detection result of the discharge angle detection unit and corrects the discharge angle to a target discharge angle;
    A device manufacturing system.
  15.  請求項6~11のいずれか1項に記載の基板処理装置を用いて前記基板に露光処理をすることと、
     露光処理された前記基板を処理することにより、前記マスクのパターンを形成することと、
     を含むデバイス製造方法。
    Performing an exposure process on the substrate using the substrate processing apparatus according to any one of claims 6 to 11,
    Processing the exposed substrate to form a pattern of the mask;
    A device manufacturing method including:
  16.  長尺の可撓性のシート基板を長尺方向に搬送しつつ、該シート基板上の所定位置にパターンを形成するパターン形成装置であって、
     前記シート基板を所定の搬送経路に沿って長尺方向に搬送するための複数の案内ローラを含む搬送部と、前記搬送経路の一部に設けられ、前記シート基板の表面の前記所定位置に前記パターンを形成するパターン形成部と、を備えるパターニング装置と、
     前記パターニング装置が設置される基台面と前記パターニング装置との間に設けられる除振装置と、
     前記パターニング装置とは別体に設けられて前記基台面に設置され、前記パターニング装置の前記搬送部に向けて前記シート基板を送り出すための案内ローラを含むとともに、前記シート基板の長尺方向と直交した幅方向に関して前記シート基板の位置を調整する位置調整装置と、
     前記搬送経路中の前記パターン形成部に対して上流側で、前記シート基板の前記幅方向の位置変化、姿勢変化、または、前記シート基板の変形に関する変化情報を計測する基板誤差計測部と、
     前記変化情報に基づいて前記位置調整装置を制御する制御装置と、
     を備えるパターン形成装置。
    A pattern forming apparatus for forming a pattern at a predetermined position on a sheet substrate while conveying a long flexible sheet substrate in the longitudinal direction,
    A conveyance unit including a plurality of guide rollers for conveying the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined conveyance path; and a part of the conveyance path, and the predetermined position on the surface of the sheet substrate at the predetermined position. A patterning device comprising: a pattern forming unit that forms a pattern;
    A vibration isolator provided between a base surface on which the patterning device is installed and the patterning device;
    The guide plate is provided separately from the patterning device and installed on the base surface. The guide roller includes a guide roller for feeding the sheet substrate toward the transport unit of the patterning device, and is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the sheet substrate. A position adjusting device for adjusting the position of the sheet substrate with respect to the width direction,
    A substrate error measurement unit that measures change information regarding the position change, posture change, or deformation of the sheet substrate on the upstream side of the pattern forming unit in the conveyance path;
    A control device that controls the position adjustment device based on the change information;
    A pattern forming apparatus comprising:
  17.  請求項16に記載のパターン形成装置であって、
     前記基板誤差計測部は、前記シート基板の幅方向のエッジ、若しくは、前記シート基板上に形成されたマークを検出することで、前記変化情報を計測する、パターン形成装置。
    The pattern forming apparatus according to claim 16, wherein
    The said board | substrate error measurement part is a pattern formation apparatus which measures the said change information by detecting the edge of the width direction of the said sheet | seat board | substrate, or the mark formed on the said sheet | seat board | substrate.
  18.  請求項16または17に記載のパターン形成装置であって、
     前記基板誤差計測部は、前記パターニング装置および前記位置調整装置の少なくとも一方に設けられている、パターン形成装置。
    The pattern forming apparatus according to claim 16 or 17,
    The substrate error measuring unit is a pattern forming device provided in at least one of the patterning device and the position adjusting device.
  19.  長尺の可撓性のシート基板を長尺方向に搬送しつつ、該シート基板上の所定位置にパターンを形成するパターン形成装置であって、
     前記シート基板を所定の搬送経路に沿って長尺方向に搬送するための複数の案内ローラを含む搬送部と、前記搬送経路の一部に設けられ、前記シート基板の表面の前記所定位置に前記パターンを形成するパターン形成部と、を備えるパターニング装置と、
     前記パターニング装置が設置される基台面と前記パターニング装置との間に設けられる除振装置と、
     前記パターニング装置とは別体に設けられて前記基台面に設置され、前記パターニング装置の前記搬送部に向けて前記シート基板を送り出すための案内ローラを含むとともに、前記シート基板の長尺方向と直交した幅方向に関して前記シート基板の位置を調整する位置調整装置と、
     前記パターニング装置と前記位置調整装置との相対的な位置変化に関する変化情報を計測する位置誤差計測部と、
     前記変化情報に基づいて前記位置調整装置を制御する制御装置と、
     を備えるパターン形成装置。
    A pattern forming apparatus for forming a pattern at a predetermined position on a sheet substrate while conveying a long flexible sheet substrate in the longitudinal direction,
    A conveyance unit including a plurality of guide rollers for conveying the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined conveyance path; and a part of the conveyance path, and the predetermined position on the surface of the sheet substrate at the predetermined position. A patterning device comprising: a pattern forming unit that forms a pattern;
    A vibration isolator provided between a base surface on which the patterning device is installed and the patterning device;
    The guide plate is provided separately from the patterning device and installed on the base surface. The guide roller includes a guide roller for feeding the sheet substrate toward the transport unit of the patterning device, and is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the sheet substrate. A position adjusting device for adjusting the position of the sheet substrate with respect to the width direction,
    A position error measurement unit that measures change information regarding a relative position change between the patterning device and the position adjustment device;
    A control device that controls the position adjustment device based on the change information;
    A pattern forming apparatus comprising:
  20.  請求項16~19のいずれか1項に記載のパターン形成装置であって、
     前記パターニング装置内に設けられ、前記搬送経路中の前記パターン形成部に対して上流側で、前記長尺方向に所定の張力が掛けられた状態で、前記シート基板の前記搬送経路を折り曲げるように配置された傾斜可能な調整ローラを備え、
     前記制御装置は、前記変化情報に基づいて前記調整ローラを傾斜させることで、パターン形成部に搬送されるシート基板の幅方向の位置を調整する、パターン形成装置。
    The pattern forming apparatus according to any one of claims 16 to 19,
    The transport path of the sheet substrate is bent in a state where a predetermined tension is applied in the longitudinal direction on the upstream side with respect to the pattern forming unit in the transport path, provided in the patterning apparatus. With a tiltable adjusting roller arranged,
    The said control apparatus is a pattern formation apparatus which adjusts the position of the width direction of the sheet | seat board | substrate conveyed by a pattern formation part by inclining the said adjustment roller based on the said change information.
  21.  長尺の可撓性のシート基板を長尺方向に搬送しつつ、該シート基板に順次第1の処理、第2の処理を施すデバイス製造システムであって、
     所定の基台面に設置され、前記シート基板を所定の搬送経路に沿って長尺方向に送るための複数のローラを含み、前記シート基板に前記第1の処理を施す第1処理ユニットと、
     前記基台面に設置され、前記第1処理ユニットから送られてくる前記シート基板を所定の搬送経路に沿って長尺方向に送るための複数のローラを含み、前記シート基板に前記第2の処理を施す第2処理ユニットと、
     前記基台面と前記第1処理ユニットとの間の振動伝達、または、前記基台面と前記第2処理ユニットとの間の振動伝達、或いは、前記第1処理ユニットと前記第2処理ユニットとの間の振動伝達を絶縁若しくは抑制する防振装置と、
     前記第1処理ユニットと前記第2処理ユニットとの相対的な位置変化、または前記第1処理ユニットから前記第2処理ユニットに搬送される前記シート基板の位置変化に関する変化情報を計測する変化計測部と、
     前記第2処理ユニット内に搬入される前記シート基板の長尺方向と直交した幅方向の位置を前記変化情報に基づいて調整する位置調整装置と、
     を備えるデバイス製造システム。
    A device manufacturing system for sequentially performing a first process and a second process on a sheet substrate while conveying a long flexible sheet substrate in the longitudinal direction,
    A first processing unit that is installed on a predetermined base surface and includes a plurality of rollers for feeding the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined conveyance path, and performs the first processing on the sheet substrate;
    A plurality of rollers installed on the base surface for sending the sheet substrate sent from the first processing unit in a longitudinal direction along a predetermined conveyance path; A second processing unit for applying
    Vibration transmission between the base surface and the first processing unit, vibration transmission between the base surface and the second processing unit, or between the first processing unit and the second processing unit. A vibration isolator that insulates or suppresses vibration transmission of
    A change measuring unit that measures change information related to a relative position change between the first processing unit and the second processing unit or a position change of the sheet substrate conveyed from the first processing unit to the second processing unit. When,
    A position adjusting device that adjusts the position in the width direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the sheet substrate carried into the second processing unit based on the change information;
    A device manufacturing system comprising:
  22.  請求項21に記載のデバイス製造システムであって、
     前記第2処理ユニットは、前記シート基板の長尺方向に電子デバイス用のパターンを形成するために、前記シート基板の表面に形成された光感応層に前記パターンに応じた光エネルギーを投射する露光装置、または導電材料、絶縁材料、半導体材料のいずれか1つを含有するインクの塗布によって前記シート基板の表面に前記パターンを描画する印刷装置のいずれか一方を含むパターニング装置である、デバイス製造システム。
    The device manufacturing system according to claim 21,
    The second processing unit is configured to project light energy corresponding to the pattern onto a photosensitive layer formed on the surface of the sheet substrate in order to form a pattern for an electronic device in the longitudinal direction of the sheet substrate. A device manufacturing system comprising: an apparatus, or a patterning apparatus including any one of a printing apparatus that draws the pattern on the surface of the sheet substrate by applying an ink containing any one of a conductive material, an insulating material, and a semiconductor material .
  23.  請求項22に記載のデバイス製造システムであって、
     前記第1処理ユニットは、前記パターニング装置によって前記シート基板上に施される処理の前工程に相当する処理を実施する単独または複数の前処理装置で構成され、
     前記位置調整装置は、前記シート基板の搬送路上で前記パターニング装置の直前に設置される前記前処理装置内、または前記直前の前処理装置と前記パターニング装置との間に設けられる、デバイス製造システム。
    The device manufacturing system according to claim 22,
    The first processing unit is configured by a single or a plurality of pre-processing devices that perform processing corresponding to a pre-process of processing performed on the sheet substrate by the patterning device,
    The device manufacturing system, wherein the position adjusting device is provided in the pre-processing device installed immediately before the patterning device on the conveyance path of the sheet substrate or between the pre-processing device just before and the patterning device.
  24.  請求項21~23のいずれか1項に記載のデバイス製造システムであって、
     前記位置調整装置は、前記シート基板を長尺方向に折り曲げて案内搬送する複数の回転ローラと、該複数の回転ローラのうちの一部の回転ローラを、回転中心軸の方向に平行移動させる駆動機構と、前記変化計測部で計測される前記変化情報に基づいて前記駆動機構を制御する制御部とを備える、デバイス製造システム。
    The device manufacturing system according to any one of claims 21 to 23,
    The position adjusting device is configured to drive a plurality of rotating rollers that bend and guide the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction and to translate a part of the rotating rollers in the direction of the rotation center axis. A device manufacturing system comprising: a mechanism; and a control unit that controls the drive mechanism based on the change information measured by the change measurement unit.
  25.  請求項21~24のいずれか1項に記載のデバイス製造システムであって
     前記位置調整装置は、前記シート基板を長尺方向に折り曲げて案内搬送する複数の回転ローラと、該複数の回転ローラのうちの一部の回転ローラの回転中心軸を傾ける駆動部と、前記変化計測部で計測される前記変化情報に基づいて前記駆動部を制御する制御部とを備える、デバイス製造システム。
    The device manufacturing system according to any one of claims 21 to 24, wherein the position adjusting device includes a plurality of rotating rollers configured to bend and guide and convey the sheet substrate in a longitudinal direction, and the plurality of rotating rollers. A device manufacturing system comprising: a drive unit that inclines the rotation center axis of some of the rotation rollers; and a control unit that controls the drive unit based on the change information measured by the change measurement unit.
  26.  請求項24または請求項25に記載のデバイス製造システムであって、
     前記変化計測部は、前記第1処理ユニットと前記第2処理ユニットとの間の前記シート基板の搬送路に配置されて、前記長尺方向と直交した前記シート基板の幅方向に関する傾斜変化を前記変化情報として検出するセンサーを含む、デバイス製造システム。
    A device manufacturing system according to claim 24 or claim 25,
    The change measuring unit is disposed in a conveyance path of the sheet substrate between the first processing unit and the second processing unit, and changes the inclination change in the width direction of the sheet substrate perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. A device manufacturing system that includes sensors that detect change information.
PCT/JP2014/066885 2013-07-08 2014-06-25 Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus WO2015005118A1 (en)

Priority Applications (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201480049332.7A CN105556391B (en) 2013-07-08 2014-06-25 Substrate board treatment, device inspection apparatus, device making method and patterning device
KR1020197037109A KR102097769B1 (en) 2013-07-08 2014-06-25 Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus
KR1020197022344A KR102058830B1 (en) 2013-07-08 2014-06-25 Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus
KR1020197014816A KR102007627B1 (en) 2013-07-08 2014-06-25 Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus
KR1020207009396A KR102219169B1 (en) 2013-07-08 2014-06-25 Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus
KR1020167002859A KR101984360B1 (en) 2013-07-08 2014-06-25 Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus
HK16108788.1A HK1220776A1 (en) 2013-07-08 2016-07-21 Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013-142922 2013-07-08
JP2013142922A JP2015018006A (en) 2013-07-08 2013-07-08 Substrate treatment apparatus, device production system, and device production method
JP2014-123088 2014-06-16
JP2014123088A JP6459234B2 (en) 2014-06-16 2014-06-16 Substrate processing equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015005118A1 true WO2015005118A1 (en) 2015-01-15

Family

ID=52279804

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/066885 WO2015005118A1 (en) 2013-07-08 2014-06-25 Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus

Country Status (5)

Country Link
KR (5) KR102007627B1 (en)
CN (3) CN105556391B (en)
HK (3) HK1257621A1 (en)
TW (4) TWI627510B (en)
WO (1) WO2015005118A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2016133666A (en) * 2015-01-20 2016-07-25 大日本印刷株式会社 Method for manufacturing flexible display device
WO2016204202A1 (en) * 2015-06-15 2016-12-22 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Production method for organic electroluminescent elements
JP2019200433A (en) * 2019-08-01 2019-11-21 株式会社ニコン Pattern drawing method

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019012495A1 (en) * 2017-07-14 2019-01-17 エーエスエムエル ネザーランズ ビー.ブイ. Measurement apparatus
KR102267473B1 (en) * 2019-06-26 2021-06-22 한국기계연구원 Fine pattern roll manufacturing system via tension control, and method of manufacturing fine pattern roll using the same
KR20210059549A (en) * 2019-11-15 2021-05-25 캐논 톡키 가부시키가이샤 Film forming apparatus
CN111580473B (en) * 2020-04-10 2021-05-28 彩虹集团有限公司 Method for automatically controlling glass extraction amount of liquid crystal substrate
IL301222A (en) * 2020-09-28 2023-05-01 Asml Netherlands Bv Metrology tool with position control of projection system

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6019037U (en) * 1983-07-18 1985-02-08 株式会社リコー exposure equipment
JPH04296741A (en) * 1991-03-26 1992-10-21 Ushio Inc Film carrier mechanism and exposurre device provided with the same
JP2003091069A (en) * 2001-09-17 2003-03-28 Ushio Inc Device for exposure for belt shape work having zigzag correction mechanism
JP2006098718A (en) * 2004-09-29 2006-04-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Drawing apparatus
JP2008076650A (en) * 2006-09-20 2008-04-03 Nikon Corp Mask, exposure device, exposure method, and method for manufacturing device
JP2009220945A (en) * 2008-03-17 2009-10-01 Orc Mfg Co Ltd Conveyance apparatus
JP2010207961A (en) * 2009-03-10 2010-09-24 Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd Die cutting method for long film and device therefor
JP2011022583A (en) * 2009-07-17 2011-02-03 Nikon Corp Pattern forming apparatus and method, and device manufacturing method
WO2011099563A1 (en) * 2010-02-12 2011-08-18 株式会社ニコン Substrate processing device

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4296741B2 (en) 2002-01-28 2009-07-15 パナソニック電工株式会社 Cogeneration system
JP2006102991A (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-04-20 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Image recording device and image recording method
CN100517080C (en) * 2006-04-27 2009-07-22 株式会社Orc制作所 Conveying device
CN101364052B (en) * 2008-10-08 2010-10-27 上海微电子装备有限公司 Active vibration damping system and forecast control method thereof
US8541163B2 (en) * 2009-06-05 2013-09-24 Nikon Corporation Transporting method, transporting apparatus, exposure method, and exposure apparatus
KR101070734B1 (en) * 2009-06-30 2011-10-07 건국대학교 산학협력단 Feedforward control of cross direction register system and methode for printed electronics roll-to-roll
NL2006385A (en) * 2010-04-12 2011-10-13 Asml Netherlands Bv Substrate handling apparatus and lithographic apparatus.
KR101638222B1 (en) * 2010-12-15 2016-07-08 가부시키가이샤 니콘 Substrate processing system and method for producing display elements

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6019037U (en) * 1983-07-18 1985-02-08 株式会社リコー exposure equipment
JPH04296741A (en) * 1991-03-26 1992-10-21 Ushio Inc Film carrier mechanism and exposurre device provided with the same
JP2003091069A (en) * 2001-09-17 2003-03-28 Ushio Inc Device for exposure for belt shape work having zigzag correction mechanism
JP2006098718A (en) * 2004-09-29 2006-04-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Drawing apparatus
JP2008076650A (en) * 2006-09-20 2008-04-03 Nikon Corp Mask, exposure device, exposure method, and method for manufacturing device
JP2009220945A (en) * 2008-03-17 2009-10-01 Orc Mfg Co Ltd Conveyance apparatus
JP2010207961A (en) * 2009-03-10 2010-09-24 Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd Die cutting method for long film and device therefor
JP2011022583A (en) * 2009-07-17 2011-02-03 Nikon Corp Pattern forming apparatus and method, and device manufacturing method
WO2011099563A1 (en) * 2010-02-12 2011-08-18 株式会社ニコン Substrate processing device

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2016133666A (en) * 2015-01-20 2016-07-25 大日本印刷株式会社 Method for manufacturing flexible display device
WO2016204202A1 (en) * 2015-06-15 2016-12-22 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Production method for organic electroluminescent elements
JPWO2016204202A1 (en) * 2015-06-15 2018-03-29 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Method for manufacturing organic electroluminescence device
JP2019200433A (en) * 2019-08-01 2019-11-21 株式会社ニコン Pattern drawing method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20190091575A (en) 2019-08-06
HK1245421B (en) 2020-05-15
CN107255908A (en) 2017-10-17
KR102007627B1 (en) 2019-08-05
TW202013096A (en) 2020-04-01
TWI627510B (en) 2018-06-21
CN105556391B (en) 2018-06-29
TWI681261B (en) 2020-01-01
KR101984360B1 (en) 2019-05-30
KR20160029099A (en) 2016-03-14
TWI757817B (en) 2022-03-11
CN107255908B (en) 2019-08-06
HK1220776A1 (en) 2017-05-12
KR102097769B1 (en) 2020-04-07
KR20190060003A (en) 2019-05-31
CN108919607A (en) 2018-11-30
TW202041981A (en) 2020-11-16
CN105556391A (en) 2016-05-04
TW201514631A (en) 2015-04-16
TW201832017A (en) 2018-09-01
KR20190141793A (en) 2019-12-24
KR102058830B1 (en) 2019-12-23
CN108919607B (en) 2020-10-30
KR102219169B1 (en) 2021-02-23
KR20200037452A (en) 2020-04-08
TWI706234B (en) 2020-10-01
HK1257621A1 (en) 2019-10-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2015005118A1 (en) Substrate processing apparatus, device manufacturing system, device manufacturing method, and pattern formation apparatus
JP6540774B2 (en) Substrate processing equipment
JP6459234B2 (en) Substrate processing equipment
JP2015018006A (en) Substrate treatment apparatus, device production system, and device production method
JP6702404B2 (en) Device manufacturing system and device manufacturing method
JP6794980B2 (en) Substrate processing equipment and device manufacturing method
JP2020166275A (en) Pattern formation device
JP2020101821A (en) Pattern formation device
JP6733778B2 (en) Substrate processing apparatus and device manufacturing method
JP6680376B2 (en) Pattern forming equipment
JP6566102B2 (en) Pattern forming device
JP2019109546A (en) Substrate processing device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201480049332.7

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14823118

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20167002859

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14823118

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1